Fujitsu Life Jacket M4000 User manual

SPARC® Enterprise
M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000
Servers XSCF Reference Manual
XSCF Control Package (XCP) 107x
Manual Code C120-E333-06EN
Part No. 820-4157-13
April 2008, Revision A
Copyright 2007-2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. and FUJITSU LIMITED, 1-1,
Kamikodanaka 4-chome, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken 211-8588, Japan. All rights reserved.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited each own or control intellectual property rights relating to products and technology described in
this document, and such products, technology and this document are protected by copyright laws, patents and other intellectual property laws
and international treaties. The intellectual property rights of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited in such products, technology and this
document include, without limitation, one or more of the United States patents listed at http://www.sun.com/patents and one or more
additional patents or patent applications in the United States or other countries.
This document and the product and technology to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution,
and decompilation. No part of such product or technology, or of this document, may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior
written authorization of Fujitsu Limited and Sun Microsystems, Inc., and their applicable licensors, if any. The furnishing of this document to
you does not give you any rights or licenses, express or implied, with respect to the product or technology to which it pertains, and this
document does not contain or represent any commitment of any kind on the part of Fujitsu Limited or Sun Microsystems, Inc., or any affiliate of
either of them.
This document and the product and technology described in this document may incorporate third-party intellectual property copyrighted by
and/or licensed from suppliers to Fujitsu Limited and/or Sun Microsystems, Inc., including software and font technology.
Per the terms of the GPL or LGPL, a copy of the source code governed by the GPL or LGPL, as applicable, is available upon request by the End
User. Please contact Fujitsu Limited or Sun Microsystems, Inc.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the University of California. UNIX is a registered trademark in
the U.S. and in other countries, exclusively licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Java, Netra, Solaris, Sun Ray, Answerbook2, docs.sun.com, OpenBoot, and Sun Fire are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited.
All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SPARC64 is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc., used under license by Fujitsu Microelectronics, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited.
The OPEN LOOK and Sun™ Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for its users and licensees. Sun acknowledges
the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer industry. Sun
holds a non-exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface, which license also covers Sun’s licensees who implement OPEN
LOOK GUIs and otherwise comply with Sun’s written license agreements.
United States Government Rights - Commercial use. U.S. Government users are subject to the standard government user license agreements of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited and the applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements.
Disclaimer: The only warranties granted by Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. or any affiliate of either of them in connection with this
document or any product or technology described herein are those expressly set forth in the license agreement pursuant to which the product or
technology is provided. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN SUCH AGREEMENT, FUJITSU LIMITED, SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC.
AND THEIR AFFILIATES MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED) REGARDING SUCH
PRODUCT OR TECHNOLOGY OR THIS DOCUMENT, WHICH ARE ALL PROVIDED AS IS, AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE
EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. Unless otherwise expressly set forth in such agreement, to the
extent allowed by applicable law, in no event shall Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. or any of their affiliates have any liability to any third
party under any legal theory for any loss of revenues or profits, loss of use or data, or business interruptions, or for any indirect, special,
incidental or consequential damages, even if advised of the possibility of such damages.
DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT,
ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
Please
Recycle
Copyright 2007-2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. et FUJITSU LIMITED, 1-1,
Kamikodanaka 4-chome, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken 211-8588, Japon. Tous droits réservés.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. et Fujitsu Limited détiennent et contrôlent toutes deux des droits de propriété intellectuelle relatifs aux produits et
technologies décrits dans ce document. De même, ces produits, technologies et ce document sont protégés par des lois sur le copyright, des
brevets, d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle et des traités internationaux. Les droits de propriété intellectuelle de Sun Microsystems, Inc.
et Fujitsu Limited concernant ces produits, ces technologies et ce document comprennent, sans que cette liste soit exhaustive, un ou plusieurs
des brevets déposés aux États-Unis et indiqués à l’adresse http://www.sun.com/patents de même qu’un ou plusieurs brevets ou applications
brevetées supplémentaires aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Ce document, le produit et les technologies afférents sont exclusivement distribués avec des licences qui en restreignent l’utilisation, la copie, la
distribution et la décompilation. Aucune partie de ce produit, de ces technologies ou de ce document ne peut être reproduite sous quelque
forme que ce soit, par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans l’autorisation écrite préalable de Fujitsu Limited et de Sun Microsystems, Inc., et de leurs
éventuels bailleurs de licence. Ce document, bien qu’il vous ait été fourni, ne vous confère aucun droit et aucune licence, expresses ou tacites,
concernant le produit ou la technologie auxquels il se rapporte. Par ailleurs, il ne contient ni ne représente aucun engagement, de quelque type
que ce soit, de la part de Fujitsu Limited ou de Sun Microsystems, Inc., ou des sociétés affiliées.
Ce document, et le produit et les technologies qu’il décrit, peuvent inclure des droits de propriété intellectuelle de parties tierces protégés par
copyright et/ou cédés sous licence par des fournisseurs à Fujitsu Limited et/ou Sun Microsystems, Inc., y compris des logiciels et des
technologies relatives aux polices de caractères.
Par limites du GPL ou du LGPL, une copie du code source régi par le GPL ou LGPL, comme applicable, est sur demande vers la fin utilsateur
disponible; veuillez contacter Fujitsu Limted ou Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Cette distribution peut comprendre des composants développés par des tierces parties.
Des parties de ce produit pourront être dérivées des systèmes Berkeley BSD licenciés par l’Université de Californie. UNIX est une marque
déposée aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays et licenciée exclusivement par X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, Java, Netra, Solaris, Sun Ray, Answerbook2, docs.sun.com, OpenBoot, et Sun Fire sont des marques de
fabrique ou des marques déposées de Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Fujitsu et le logo Fujitsu sont des marques déposées de Fujitsu Limited.
Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc.
aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les produits portant les marques SPARC sont basés sur une architecture développée par Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
SPARC64 est une marques déposée de SPARC International, Inc., utilisée sous le permis par Fujitsu Microelectronics, Inc. et Fujitsu Limited.
L’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et Sun™ a été développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses utilisateurs et licenciés. Sun
reconnaît les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le développement du concept des interfaces d’utilisation visuelle ou graphique
pour l’industrie de l’informatique. Sun détient une license non exclusive de Xerox sur l’interface d’utilisation graphique Xerox, cette licence
couvrant également les licenciés de Sun qui mettent en place l’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et qui, en outre, se conforment aux
licences écrites de Sun.
Droits du gouvernement américain - logiciel commercial. Les utilisateurs du gouvernement américain sont soumis aux contrats de licence
standard de Sun Microsystems, Inc. et de Fujitsu Limited ainsi qu’aux clauses applicables stipulées dans le FAR et ses suppléments.
Avis de non-responsabilité: les seules garanties octroyées par Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. ou toute société affiliée de l’une ou l’autre
entité en rapport avec ce document ou tout produit ou toute technologie décrit(e) dans les présentes correspondent aux garanties expressément
stipulées dans le contrat de licence régissant le produit ou la technologie fourni(e). SAUF MENTION CONTRAIRE EXPRESSÉMENT
STIPULÉE DANS CE CONTRAT, FUJITSU LIMITED, SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. ET LES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES REJETTENT TOUTE
REPRÉSENTATION OU TOUTE GARANTIE, QUELLE QU’EN SOIT LA NATURE (EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE) CONCERNANT CE
PRODUIT, CETTE TECHNOLOGIE OU CE DOCUMENT, LESQUELS SONT FOURNIS EN L’ÉTAT. EN OUTRE, TOUTES LES CONDITIONS,
REPRÉSENTATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE À
LA QUALITÉ MARCHANDE, À L’APTITUDE À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE OU À L’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, SONT
EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISÉE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE. Sauf mention contraire expressément stipulée dans ce contrat, dans la
mesure autorisée par la loi applicable, en aucun cas Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. ou l’une de leurs filiales ne sauraient être tenues
responsables envers une quelconque partie tierce, sous quelque théorie juridique que ce soit, de tout manque à gagner ou de perte de profit, de
problèmes d’utilisation ou de perte de données, ou d’interruptions d’activités, ou de tout dommage indirect, spécial, secondaire ou consécutif,
même si ces entités ont été préalablement informées d’une telle éventualité.
LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE “EN L’ETAT” ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS, DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES
OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT
TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L’APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A
L’ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON.
Contents
Preface
Intro
ix
1
addboard
7
addcodlicense
addfru
11
13
adduser
15
applynetwork
cfgdevice
console
17
23
29
clockboard
31
deleteboard
33
deletecodlicense
deletefru
39
deleteuser
41
disableuser
43
enableuser
45
exit
37
47
flashupdate
fmadm
53
fmdump
fmstat
55
63
getflashimage
ioxadm
49
67
73
v
man
83
moveboard
85
nslookup
89
password
91
poweroff
95
poweron
99
prtfru
103
rebootxscf
107
replacefru
109
reset
111
resetdateoffset
115
sendbreak
117
setaltitude
119
setarchiving
setaudit
121
125
setautologout
setcod
133
setdate
setdcl
131
137
141
setdomainmode
setdomparam
setdscp
147
155
159
setdualpowerfeed
setemailreport
sethostname
165
169
sethttps
171
setldap
177
setlocale
181
setlocator
183
setlookup
185
setnameserver
setnetwork
setntp
187
189
195
setpasswordpolicy
vi
163
199
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
setpowerupdelay
setprivileges
setroute
203
205
209
setshutdowndelay
setsmtp
215
setsnmp
219
setsnmpusm
225
setsnmpvacm
setssh
213
229
233
settelnet
237
settimezone
setupfru
239
245
setupplatform
247
showaltitude
253
showarchiving
showaudit
255
259
showautologout
showboards
showcod
263
265
271
showcodlicense
273
showcodusage
275
showconsolepath
showdate
showdcl
281
283
285
showdevices
291
showdomainmode
297
showdomainstatus
299
showdscp
301
showdualpowerfeed
showemailreport
307
showenvironment
showfru
305
309
315
showhardconf
showhostname
317
323
Contents
vii
showhttps
325
showldap
327
showlocale
329
showlocator
showlogs
331
333
showlookup
349
showmonitorlog
351
shownameserver
353
shownetwork
shownotice
showntp
355
361
363
showpasswordpolicy
365
showpowerupdelay
showresult
369
showroute
371
367
showshutdowndelay
showsmtp
377
showsnmp
379
showsnmpusm
383
showsnmpvacm
showssh
385
387
showstatus
391
showtelnet
393
showtimezone
showuser
395
399
snapshot
401
switchscf
409
testsb
411
unlockmaintenance
version
viii
417
419
viewaudit
who
375
423
431
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
Preface
This manual describes how to use the shell command which can be executed in the
eXtended System Control Facility (hereinafter referred to as XSCF) environment in
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 servers. The shell command is
hereinafter referred to as XSCF shell command.
XSCF is a system monitoring facility to conduct monitoring, control, operation, or
maintenance of main unit and domains of SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/
M9000 servers. It is mounted as a firmware on the service processor which is
independent from the processor of the system. For each command, this manual
describes how to use and the execution examples, available in XSCF environment.
This document is provided as a manual to study the point which you can't understand
or would like to check on, while using XSCF shell command. Instead of reading from
the start as you do so when reading a tutorial, it is recommended to use this manual
as you come across a point you would like to check on.
The description of XSCF shell command written in this manual is the same as the
manual page which appears as a result of man command executed in XSCF
environment. For how to use the man command, please refer to man(1) in this manual.
In addition, for the detail content of XSCF, please refer to SPARC Enterprise M4000/
M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers XSCF User’s Guide.
This section includes:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Audience” on page xlviii
“Notation of This Manual” on page xlviii
“SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers Documentation” on page l
“Glossary” on page liv
“Abbreviated References to Other Documents” on page liv
“Models” on page lv
“Prompt Notations” on page lv
“Software License” on page lvi
“Fujitsu Welcomes Your Comments” on page lvi
Preface
xlvii
Audience
This manual is intended for users, who administrate SPARC Enterprise M4000/
M5000/M8000/M9000 servers (hereinafter referred to as XSCF user). The XSCF user is
required to have the following knowledge:
■
■
SolarisTM Operating System and Unix command
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 servers and basic knowledge of
XSCF
Notation of This Manual
Here describes the notation used in this manual.
Intro(8) provides the XSCF shell commands and the brief description of them in the
alphabetical order.
xlviii
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
Each XSCF shell command is described in the order of sections below. When there's no
relevant description provided, the section itself is omitted.
Section
Description
NAME
This section gives the names of the XSCF shell commands,
followed by a brief description of what they do.
SYNOPSIS
This section gives the syntax of commands.
The use of font style complies with the following rule.
bold
Enters the command name or the constants as
displayed.
Italic
Substitutes the variables and so forth with the
appropriate values when the command executed.
The use of symbols such as parenthesis complies with the
following rule.
[]
Brackets. The OPTIONS or OPERANDS enclosed in
these brackets can be omitted. Those not enclosed can't
be omitted.
{}
Braces. The OPTIONS or OPERANDS enclosed in these
braces are treated as a unit.
|
Separator. You should specify one of the OPTIONS or
OPERANDS delimited with this symbol "|".
...
Ellipsis. You can specify multiple OPTIONS or
OPERANDS just before.
DESCRIPTION
This section gives the detailed description such as the
command function. It describes the behavior after the
command executed and the content to be displayed. It doesn't
describe how to specify the OPTIONS or OPERANDS.
Privileges
This section gives the privileges required for command
execution. In case that what can be executed varies by the user
privileges, it is described here.
OPTIONS
This section gives the meaning of and how to specify the
OPTIONS. In case the OPERANDS required for the OPTIONS,
it is described here.
To specify multiple 1-character OPTIONS, you may specify the
first OPTION followed by the alphabetic part of the second.
e.g. fmadm -a -i
fmadm -ai
Preface
xlix
Section
Description
OPERANDS
This section gives the meaning of and how to specify the
OPERANDS. The OPERANDS which follows the OPTIONS are
described in "OPTIONS."
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
This section gives the description in case the supplementary
explanation required in addition to the content written in
"DESCRIPTION." Also used to divide the description
prolonged in "DESCRIPTION."
EXAMPLES
This section gives the examples of command execution. The
explanation of examples, the execution command, and the
messages returned from the system as a result of execution.
EXIT STATUS
This section gives the status which shows whether or not the
command executed normally terminated. "0" for normal
termination, and ">0" for abnormal termination.
SEE ALSO
This section gives the related command names.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers
Documentation
The manuals listed below are provided for reference.
l
Book Titles
Manual Codes
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Site Planning Guide
C120-H015
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Site Planning Guide
C120-H014
SPARC Enterprise Equipment Rack Mounting Guide
C120-H016
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Getting Started Guide
C120-E345
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Getting Started Guide
C120-E323
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Overview Guide
C120-E346
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Overview Guide
C120-E324
Important Safety Information for Hardware Systems
C120-E391
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Safety and
Compliance Guide
C120-E348
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
Book Titles
Manual Codes
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Safety and
Compliance Guide
C120-E326
External I/O Expansion Unit Safety and Compliance Guide
C120-E457
SPARC Enterprise M4000 Server Unpacking Guide
C120-E349
SPARC Enterprise M5000 Server Unpacking Guide
C120-E350
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Unpacking Guide
C120-E327
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Installation Guide
C120-E351
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Installation Guide
C120-E328
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Service Manual
C120-E352
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Service Manual
C120-E330
External I/O Expansion Unit Installation and Service Manual
C120-E329
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers RCI
Build Procedure
C120-E361
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Administration Guide
C120-E331
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers XSCF
User’s Guide
C120-E332
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers XSCF
Reference Manual
C120-E333
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Dynamic Reconfiguration (DR) User’s Guide
C120-E335
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Capacity on Demand (COD) User’s Guide
C120-E336
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers RCI
User’s Guide
C120-E360
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Product Notes
Go to the Web
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Product Notes
Go to the Web
External I/O Expansion Unit Product Notes
C120-E456
SPARC Enterprise Server UPC Connector Supplement
C120-E455
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Glossary
C120-E514
Preface
li
1. Manuals on the Web
The latest versions of all the SPARC Enterprise series manuals are available at the
following websites.
Global Site
http://www.fujitsu.com/sparcenterprise/manual/
Japanese Site
http://primeserver.fujitsu.com/sparcenterprise/manual/
Note – Product Notes are available on the website only. Please check for the most
recent update on your product.
2. Documentation CD
For the Documentation CD, please contact your local sales representative.
■
■
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Documentation CD (C120-E365)
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Documentation CD (C120-E364)
3. Manual on the Enhanced Support Facility x.x CD-ROM disk
■
Remote maintenance Service
Book Title
Manual Code
Enhanced Support Facility User’s Guide for REMCS
C112-B067
4. Manual (man page) provided in the system
XSCF man page
Note – The man page can be referenced on the XSCF Shell, and it provides the same
content as the SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers XSCF Reference
Manual.
5. Documentation and Support on the Web
The latest information about other documents and the support for your server are
provided on the websites.
a. Message
Global Site
http://www.fujitsu.com/sparcenterprise/msg/
lii
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
Japanese Site
http://primeserver.fujitsu.com/sparcenterprise/msg/
b. Firmware program
You can download the latest files of firmware at the following websites.
Global Site
http://www.fujitsu.com/sparcenterprise/firmware/
Japanese Site
http://primeserver.fujitsu.com/sparcenterprise/download/
firmware/
The following files or document are provided.
i. Firmware program file (XSCF Control Package (XCP) file)
ii. XSCF extension MIB definition file
Note – XSCF Control Package (XCP) : XCP is a package which has the control
programs of hardware that configures a computing system. The XSCF firmware and
the OpenBoot PROM firmware are included in the XCP file.
c. Fault Management MIB (SUN-FM-MIB) definition file
http://src.opensolaris.org/source/xref/innv/onnv-gate/usr/
src/lib/fm/libfmd_snmp/mibs/
6. Solaris Operating System Related Manuals
http://docs.sun.com/
7. Provided in firmware program CD (For maintenance service <for FEs>)
a. Firmware program file (XSCF Control Package (XCP) file)
b. XSCF extension MIB definition file
8. Information on Using the RCI function
The manual does not contain an explanation of the RCI build procedure. For
information on using the RCI function, refer to the SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/
M8000/M9000 Servers RCI Build Procedure and SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/
M8000/M9000 Servers RCI User’s Guide available on the website.
Preface
liii
Glossary
For the terms used in the “SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers Documentation” on page
l, refer to the SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers Glossary.
Abbreviated References to Other
Documents
In this manual, the following abbreviated titles may be used when referring to a
systems manual. The following table lists the abbreviations used in this manual.
liv
Abbreviated Title
Full Title
Overview Guide
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Overview Guide
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Overview Guide
Service Manual
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Service Manual
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Service Manual
Installation Guide
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 Servers Installation
Guide
SPARC Enterprise M8000/M9000 Servers Installation
Guide
Administration Guide
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Administration Guide
XSCF User’s Guide
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
XSCF User’s Guide
XSCF Reference Manual
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
XSCF Reference Manual
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
Abbreviated Title
Full Title
Dynamic
Reconfiguration User’s
Guide
or DR User’s Guide
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Dynamic Reconfiguration (DR) User’s Guide
COD User’s Guide
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Capacity on Demand (COD) User’s Guide
Glossary
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers
Glossary
Models
The model names used in this manual are as follows.
Server class
Model name
Midrange
SPARC Enterprise M4000
SPARC Enterprise M5000
High-end
SPARC Enterprise M8000
SPARC Enterprise M9000
Prompt Notations
The following prompt notations are used in the manual.
Shell
Prompt Notations
XSCF
XSCF>
C shell
machine-name%
C shell super user
machine-name#
Preface
lv
Shell
Prompt Notations
Bourne shell and Korn shell
$
Bourne shell and Korn shell
super user
#
OpenBoot PROM
ok
Software License
The function to explain in this manual uses the softwares of GPL,LGPL and others. For
the information of the license, see Appendix E, "Software License Condition" in SPARC
Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers XSCF User’s Guide.
Fujitsu Welcomes Your Comments
We would appreciate your comments and suggestions to improve this document. You
can submit your comments by using “Reader's Comment Form” on page xv.
lvi
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
Reader's Comment Form
Preface
lvii
FOLD AND TAPE
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 741 SUNNYVALE CA
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
FUJITSU COMPUTER SYSTEMS
AT TENTION ENGINEERING OPS M/S 249
1250 EAST ARQUES AVENUE
P O BOX 3470
SUNNYVALE CA 94088-3470
FOLD AND TAPE
lviii
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • April 2008
Intro(8)
NAME
DESCRIPTION
LIST OF
COMMANDS
Intro - eXtended System Control Facility (XSCF) man pages
This manual contains XSCF man pages.
The following commands are supported:
Intro, intro
eXtended System Control Facility (XSCF) man pages
addboard
configure an eXtended System Board(XSB) into the domain
configuration or assigns it to the domain configuration
addcodlicense
add a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU)
license key to the COD license database
addfru
add a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
adduser
create an XSCF user account
applynetwork
reset XSCF to reflect information that has been set for the
XSCF network
cfgdevice
connect a DVD/TAPE drive to the port, disconnect it from
the port, or display the status of the drive
clockboard
set or display the clock control unit used at system startup
console
connect to a domain console
deleteboard
disconnect an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the
domain configuration
deletecodlicense
remove a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU)
license key from the COD license database
deletefru
delete a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
deleteuser
delete an XSCF user account
disableuser
disable an XSCF user account
enableuser
enable an XSCF user account
exit
exit the XSCF shell
flashupdate
update the firmware
fmadm
fault management configuration tool
fmdump
view fault management logs
fmstat
report fault management module statistics
getflashimage
download a firmware image file
ioxadm
manage External I/O Expansion Units
Intro
1
Intro(8)
2
man
display manual pages of specified XSCF shell command
moveboard
move an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the current
domain to another
nslookup
refer to the DNS server for the host
password
manage user passwords and expiration settings
poweroff
turn off the power to the specified domain
poweron
turn on the power to the specified domain
prtfru
display FRUID data on the system and External I/O
Expansion Unit
rebootxscf
reset the XSCF
replacefru
replace a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
reset
reset the specified domain
resetdateoffset
reset the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain.
sendbreak
send a break signal to the specified domain
setaltitude
set the altitude of the system or whether or not the air filter
installed
setarchiving
configure the log archiving functionality
setaudit
manage the system auditing functionality
setautologout
set the session timeout time of the XSCF shell
setcod
set up the Capacity on Demand (COD) resources used for
domains
setdate
set the date and time of XSCF
setdcl
set a domain component list (DCL)
setdomainmode
set a domain mode
setdomparam
forcibly rewrite OpenBoot PROM environment variables
setdscp
set the IP address assignments for the Domain to Service
Processor Communications Protocol (DSCP)
setdualpowerfeed
set dual power feed mode
setemailreport
set up the email report configuration data
sethostname
set a host name and domain name for an XSCF unit
sethttps
start or stop the HTTPS service, which is used in the XSCF
network. This command also performs authenticationrelated settings.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
Intro(8)
man
display manual pages of specified XSCF shell command
moveboard
move an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the current
domain to another
nslookup
refer to the DNS server for the host
password
manage user passwords and expiration settings
poweroff
turn off the power to the specified domain
poweron
turn on the power to the specified domain
prtfru
display FRUID data on the system and External I/O
Expansion Unit
rebootxscf
reset the XSCF
replacefru
replace a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
reset
reset the specified domain
resetdateoffset
reset the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain.
sendbreak
send a break signal to the specified domain
setaltitude
set the altitude of the system or whether or not the air filter
installed
setarchiving
configure the log archiving functionality
setaudit
manage the system auditing functionality
setautologout
set the session timeout time of the XSCF shell
setcod
set up the Capacity on Demand (COD) resources used for
domains
setdate
set the date and time of XSCF
setdcl
set a domain component list (DCL)
setdomainmode
set a domain mode
setdomparam
forcibly rewrite OpenBoot PROM environment variables
setdscp
set the IP address assignments for the Domain to Service
Processor Communications Protocol (DSCP)
setdualpowerfeed
set dual power feed mode
setemailreport
set up the email report configuration data
sethostname
set a host name and domain name for an XSCF unit
sethttps
start or stop the HTTPS service, which is used in the XSCF
network. This command also performs authenticationrelated settings.
Intro
3
Intro(8)
setldap
configure the Service Processor as a Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) client
setlocale
sets the default locale of the XSCF
setlocator
control the blinking of the CHECK LED on the operator
panel
setlookup
enable or disable the use of the Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) server for authentication and
privilege lookup
setnameserver
set the domain name system (DNS) servers used in the
XSCF network
setnetwork
configure a network interface using by XSCF
setntp
set the NTP servers used in the XSCF network
setpasswordpolicy manage the system password policy
4
setpowerupdelay
set the warm-up time of the system and wait time before
system startup
setprivileges
assign user privileges
setroute
set routing information for an XSCF network interface
setshutdowndelay
set the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the
uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
setsmtp
set up the SMTP settings
setsnmp
manage the SNMP agent
setsnmpusm
specify the SNMPv3 agent’s User-based Security Model
(USM) configuration
setsnmpvacm
modify the SNMPv3 agent’s View-based Access Control
Model (VACM) configuration
setssh
set the SSH service used in the XSCF network. Also,
generate the host public key, and register or delete the user
public key, which are necessary for the SSH service
settelnet
start or stop the telnet service used in the XSCF network
settimezone
set the time zone and Daylight Saving Time of XSCF
setupfru
set up device hardware
setupplatform
set up platform specific settings
showaltitude
display the altitude of the system and whether the air filter
installed
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
Intro(8)
showarchiving
display log archiving configuration and status
showaudit
display the current auditing system state
showautologout
display the session timeout time of the XSCF shell
showboards
display information on an eXtended System Board (XSB)
showcod
display Capacity on Demand (COD) configuration
information
showcodlicense
display the current Capacity on Demand (COD) right-touse (RTU) licenses stored in the COD license database
showcodusage
display the current usage statistics for Capacity on Demand
(COD) resources
showconsolepath
display information on the domain console that is currently
connected
showdate
show the date and time of XSCF
showdcl
display the current domain component list (DCL)
showdevices
display current information on an eXtended System Board
(XSB)
showdomainmode
display the domain mode
showdomainstatus
display the current domain component list (DCL)
showdscp
display the IP addresses assigned to the Domain to Service
Processor Communications Protocol (DSCP)
showdualpowerfeed display the current setting of dual power feed mode
showemailreport
display the email report configuration data
showenvironment
display the intake air temperature and humidity,
temperature sensor information, voltage sensor
information, and fan rotation information about the system
showfru
display the hardware settings of specified device
showhardconf
display information about field replaceable unit (FRU)
installed in the system
showhostname
display the current host name for the XSCF unit
showhttps
display the status of the HTTPS service set for the XSCF
network
showldap
display the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
configuration for the Service Processor
showlocale
display the current setting for the XSCF locale
Intro
5
Intro(8)
showlocator
display the state of the CHECK LED on the operator panel
showlogs
display the specified log
showlookup
display the configuration for authentication and privileges
lookup
showmonitorlog
display the contents of monitoring messages in real time.
shownameserver
display the registered domain name system (DNS) servers
specified on the XSCF network
shownetwork
display information of network interfaces for XSCF
shownotice
display copyright and license information for the copyright
information for eXtended System Control Facility (XSCF)
Control Package (XCP)
showntp
display the NTP servers currently set for the XSCF network
showpasswordpolicy display the current password settings
showpowerupdelay
display the current settings for the warm-up time of the
system and wait time before system startup
showresult
display the exit status of the most recently executed
command
showroute
display routing information for an XSCF network interface
showshutdowndelay show the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the
uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
6
showsmtp
display the SMTP configuration information
showsnmp
display the configuration information and current status of
the SNMP agent
showsnmpusm
display the current User-based Security Model (USM)
information for the SNMP agent
showsnmpvacm
display the current View-based Access Control Access
(VACM) information for the SNMP agent
showssh
display the status, host public keys, fingerprint, or user
public keys of the SSH service configured for the XSCF
network
showstatus
display the degraded Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
showtelnet
display the current status of the telnet service for the XSCF
network
showtimezone
display the XSCF time zone and Daylight Saving Time
information of current settings
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
Intro(8)
showuser
display user account information
snapshot
collect and transfer environment, log, error, and FRUID
data
switchscf
switch the XSCF unit between the active and standby states
testsb
perform an initial diagnosis of the specified physical system
board (PSB)
unlockmaintenance forcibly release the locked status of XSCF
version
display firmware version
viewaudit
display audit records
who
display a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the
XSCF
Intro
7
Intro(8)
8
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
addboard(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
addboard - configure an eXtended System Board(XSB) into the domain
configuration or assign it to the domain configuration
addboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] [-c configure] -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...]
addboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c assign -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...]
addboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c reserve -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...]
addboard -h
DESCRIPTION
The addboard(8) command, based on domain component list (DCL), configures a
XSB into the domain configuration or assigns it to the domain configuration.
One of the following configuration methods can be specified:
Privileges
configure
Configures an XSB into the specified domain configuration. The
incorporated XSB can be accessed from the operating system.
assign
Assigns an XSB to the specified domain. The assigned XSB is
reserved for the specified domain and cannot be configured in or
assigned to other domains. The assigned XSB is configured in the
domain by reboot or execution of the addboard(8) command
with "-c configure".
reserve
Reserves incorporation of an XSB into the domain configuration.
The action of "reserve" is the same as "assign."
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm
Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c assign
Assigns an XSB to the domain configuration. If the -c option is
omitted, "-c configure" is used.
-c configure
Configures an XSB in the domain configuration. If the -c option
is omitted, "-c configure" is used.
-c reserve
Reserves incorporation of an XSB into the domain configuration.
If the -c option is omitted, "-c configure" is used.
-d domain_id
Specifies the ID of the domain in which an XSB is to be
configured or to which it is to be assigned. domain_id can be 0–23
depending on the system configuration.
System Administration
9
addboard(8)
Forcibly incorporates into a domain an XSB.
-f
Note – If the -f option is used to forcibly add a system board to
a domain, all the added hardware resources may not work
normally. For this reason, use of the -f option is not
recommended in normal operation. If the -f option must be
specified, verify the status of every added system board and
device.
OPERANDS
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-v
Displays a detailed message. If this option is specified with the
-q option, the -v option is ignored.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
The following operand is supported:
xsb
Specifies the XSB number to be configured or assigned. Multiple
xsb operands are permitted, separated by spaces. The following
xsb form is accepted:
x–y
where:
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
10
x
An integer from 00–15.
y
An integer from 0–3.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
If "-c configure" is specified when either the domain power has been turned
off or the operating system is not running, an error occurs.
■
When "-c configure" is specified, hardware diagnosis is performed on the
system board before it is incorporated into the domain. Therefore, command
execution may take time.
■
To use the addboard(8) command to configure or assign a system board, DCL
must be set up in advance using the setdcl(8) command.
■
If the addboard(8) command is executed under the progress of power-on or
power-off processing, the busy status is returned. After that processing in the
domain is completed, reexecute the command.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
addboard(8)
See the setdcl(8) and showdcl(8) commands for DCL.
■
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Configures XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 into domain ID 0.
XSCF> addboard -y -c assign -d 0 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0
EXAMPLE 2
Configures XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 forcibly into domain ID 2.
XSCF> addboard -f -d 2 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), replacefru(8), setdcl(8), setdomainmode(8),
setupfru(8), showboards(8),showdcl(8), showdevices(8),
showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8), testsb(8)
System Administration
11
addboard(8)
12
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
addcodlicense(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
addcodlicense - add a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU) license key to
the COD license database
addcodlicense license-signature
addcodlicense -h
DESCRIPTION
addcodlicense(8) adds the COD RTU specified license key to the COD license
database on the Service Processor. When the license key is added, the quantity of
headroom is reduced by the quantity provided by the license key. The quantity of
headroom cannot be lower than 0.
Note – Before you run this command, you must obtain a COD license key. To
obtain a license key, contact your sales representative. For details on COD RTU
license keys, refer to the COD documentation for your server.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
license-signature
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Specifies the COD RTU license key to be added to the COD
license database.
Adding a COD RTU License Key
XSCF> addcodlicense \
01:84000000:104:0301010100:3:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
deletecodlicense(8), setcod(8), showcod(8), showcodlicense(8),
showcodusage(8)
System Administration
13
addcodlicense(8)
14
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
addfru(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
addfru - add a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
addfru
addfru -h
DESCRIPTION
The addfru(8) command adds an FRU.
The addfru(8) command enables the user to make the settings that are required for
FRU addition and related to selecting, confirming, and mounting FRUs,
interactively using menus.
The following FRUs can be added by the addfru(8) command:
Privileges
■
CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU)
■
I/O unit (IOU)
■
Fan unit (FANU)
■
Power supply unit (PSU)
You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
-h
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
Displays usage statement.
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
deletefru(8), replacefru(8), setupfru(8), showfru(8), showhardconf(8),
testsb(8), unlockmaintenance(8)
System Administration
15
addfru(8)
16
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
adduser(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
adduser - create an XSCF user account
adduser [-u UID] user
adduser -h
DESCRIPTION
adduser(8) creates a new local XSCF user account. This account is used to
configure, operate, manage and administrate the XSCF firmware. Initially, this
account has no password. It cannot be used for login until either the password is set
(using password(8)) or Secure Shell (SSH) public key authentication is set for the
user. The new account will be locked but not disabled. The system can support up
to 100 local users with an average length of 10 characters for the user operand.
When invoked without the -u option, adduser automatically assigns a UID for the
user account. When invoked with the -u option adduser assigns the given UID to
the user account. Automatic UIDs are assigned starting from 100.
If the Service Processor is configured to use Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) for user account data, the user name and UID (if specified) must not
already be in use, either locally or in LDAP.
When a user is created, adduser(8) command stores the current password policy
values in a file for the user. For more information on setting password policy see,
setpasswordpolicy(8).
Privileges
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-u UID
OPERANDS
Creates a new user with the given user identifier (UID). Specifying
a UID is optional. If specified, the UID must be greater than or
equal to 100; and 65534 and 65535 are reserved. If not specified, a
UID is automatically assigned.
The following operands are supported:
user
Specifies a valid user name to be added. The maximum length of
the user name is 32 characters. New local XSCF user account can
be combination of alpha-numeric, "-", or "_". Any combination of
upper and lower case letters can be used. The first character must
be an alphabetical character ("jsmith", "j_smith", "j_smith-0123", or
"J_Smith-0123" for example).
System Administration
17
adduser(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Creating a New User
XSCF> adduser -u 359 jsmith
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
18
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
deleteuser(8), disableuser(8), enableuser(8), password(8), setldap(8),
setpasswordpolicy(8), showldap(8), showpasswordpolicy(8), showuser(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
applynetwork(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
applynetwork - reflect the information that has been set for the XSCF network
applynetwork [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-M]
applynetwork -h
DESCRIPTION
applynetwork(8) command reflects the information that has been set for the XSCF
network to XSCF.
When you set one of the following for the XSCF network, it is necessary to execute
the applynetwork(8) command to reflect the information to XSCF.
■
XSCF host name
■
DNS domain name
■
IP address
■
netmask
■
routing
When you execute the applynetwork(8)command, it displays the information
which has been set to XSCF host name, DNS domain name, name server, IP
address, net mask, and routing. After reflected the information of XSCF network,
use the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF, to complete the setting.
Note – If XSCF is reset without executing the applynetwork(8) command,
network information that is set is not reflected in XSCF. Also, information that is set
is deleted.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
System Administration
19
applynetwork(8)
EXAMPLES
■
Unless all of the host name, DNS domain name, IP address, net mask, and
routing settings have been made, it results in errors. Please execute the
sethostname(8), setnetwork(8), and setroute(8) command to set all items,
then reexecute the applynetwork(8) command.
■
To set to multiple interfaces, all of the host name, DNS domain name, IP address,
net mask, and routing settings need to be set on every interface. In these
interfaces, if any of these setting items omitted, it results in errors.
■
To specify a host name, use the sethostname(8) command. To specify an IP
address and net mask, use the setnetwork(8) command. To specify routing, use
the setroute(8) command.
EXAMPLE 1
Reflects the information that has been set for the XSCF network.
On a midrange server:
XSCF> applynetwork
The following network settings will be applied:
xscf#0 hostname
:hostname-0
DNS domain name
:example.com
nameserver
:10.23.4.3
interface
:xscf#0-lan#0
status
:up
IP address
:10.24.144.214
netmask
:255.255.255.0
route
:-n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1
interface
:xscf#0-lan#1
status
:down
IP address
:
netmask
:
route
:
Continue? [y|n] :y
20
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
applynetwork(8)
On a high-end server:
The case of high-end server.
XSCF> applynetwork
The following network settings will be applied:
xscf#0 hostname
:hostname-0
xscf#1 hostname
:hostname-1
DNS domain name
:example.com
nameserver
:10.23.4.3
interface
:xscf#0-lan#0
status
:up
IP address
:10.24.144.214
netmask
:255.255.255.0
route
: -n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1
interface
:xscf#0-lan#1
status
:down
IP address
:
netmask
:
route
:
interface
:xscf#0-if
status
:down
IP address
:10.24.100.1
netmask
:255.255.255.0
interface
:lan#0
status
:down
IP address
:
netmask
:
interface
:xscf#1-lan#0
status
:up
System Administration
21
applynetwork(8)
IP address
:10.24.144.215
netmask
:255.255.255.0
route
: -n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1
interface
:xscf#1-lan#1
status
:down
IP address
:
netmask
:
route
:
interface
:xscf#1-if
status
:down
IP address
:10.24.100.2
netmask
:255.255.255.0
interface
:lan#1
status
:down
IP address
:
netmask
:
Continue? [y|n] :y
EXAMPLE 2
On the midrange server, reflects the information that has been set for the
XSCF network. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts.
XSCF> applynetwork -y
The following network settings will be applied:
22
xscf#0 hostname
:hostname-0
DNS domain name
:example.com
nameserver
:10.23.4.3
interface
:xscf#0-lan#0
status
:up
IP address
:10.24.144.214
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
applynetwork(8)
netmask
:255.255.255.0
route
:-n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1
interface
:xscf#0-lan#1
status
:down
IP address
:
netmask
:
route
:
Continue? [y|n] :y
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the network settings.
Please confirm that the settings have been applied by executing
showhostname, shownetwork, showroute and shownameserver after rebooting
the XSCF.
EXAMPLE 3
Reflects the information that has been set for the XSCF network. Suppresses
prompts, and automatically answers "y" to all prompts.
XSCF> applynetwork -q -y
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
rebootxscf(8), sethostname(8), setnameserver(8), setnetwork(8), setroute(8)
System Administration
23
applynetwork(8)
24
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
cfgdevice(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
cfgdevice - connect the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit to the
port, disconnect it from the port, or display the status of the drive
cfgdevice [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c attach -p port_no
cfgdevice [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c detach -p port_no
cfgdevice -l [-M]
cfgdevice -h
DESCRIPTION
The cfgdevice(8) connects the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive
unit (hereafter collectively called the DVD drive/tape drive unit) to the specified
port, disconnects it from the domain, or displays the current status of the DVD
drive/tape drive unit.
To connect the DVD drive/tape drive unit, the port number which is a PCI slot
number on the I/O unit which installed IOU Onboard Device Card A (IOUA) needs
to specify. Executing the cfgdevice(8) command, the DVD drive/tape drive unit
is connected to specified port by the built-in switching unit.
System Administration
25
cfgdevice(8)
The current status of the drive that is displayed with this command includes the
following types of status information:
port_no
Port number of the port where the IOUA is installed and that
can be connected to the DVD drive/tape drive unit. It is
displayed in the "IOU number-PCI slot number" format.
IOU/SAS-status Connection status between IOUA and built-in switching unit. It
is changed by specifying "attach" or "detach."
■
enable/disable: Setting status of the cfgdeive(8)
command
enable: Connected with "-c attach."
disable: Not connected.
■
up/down: Logical connection between IOUA and built-in
switching unit.
up: Connected.
down: Not connected.
SAS-status
Connection status between I/O unit and the system.
■
enable/disable: Connection setting between I/O unit and
the system. When starting a domain with no I/O unit, the
"disable" may be displayed.
enable: Yes
disable: No
■
up/down: Logical connection between I/O unit and the
system.
up: Connected.
down: Not connected.
The cfgdevice(8) command is valid only for high-end server.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
■
For connection and disconnection:
platadm, fieldeng
■
For displaying the status:
platadm, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
26
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
cfgdevice(8)
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The following options are supported:
-c attach
Connects the DVD drive/tape drive unit to the specified port.
-c detach
Disconnects the DVD drive/tape drive unit from the specified
port.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-l
Displays the current status of the DVD drive/tape drive unit
currently set up.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is
the same as that of the more command.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-p port_no
Specifies the number of the port, in the specified domain, to
which the DVD drive/tape drive unit is to be connected.
port_no can be specified in the ’IOU number-PCI slot number’
format. The -p option cannot be omitted.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
If connection or disconnection is made when the power supply of the system is
ON, settings are made immediately after cfgdevice(8) command execution.
When the power supply of the system is OFF, connection or disconnection is
reserved and settings are made after the power supply is turned on.
■
The DVD/tape connection is maintained even if the domain configuration is
changed, or a CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU) or I/O unit (IOU) is replaced
with a connected DVD drive/tape drive unit.
■
The DVD/tape connection is maintained even if the domain power is turned off
or the system is rebooted.
■
The DVD drive/tape drive unit is mounted in each of the base and expansion
cabinets in a high-end server that has the expansion cabinet. In such cases, each
DVD drive/tape drive unit can be connected only to a domain within the cabinet
in which the drive is mounted. Settings for connection must be made for both the
base cabinet and expansion cabinet.
XSCF> cfgdevice -l
Current connection for DVD/DAT:
Main chassis:
port 0-0
System Administration
27
cfgdevice(8)
Expansion chassis: port 8-0
Expander status
Port No. IOU/SAS-status SAS-status
-----------------------------------
EXAMPLES
0-0
enable
0-2
enable
up
disable down
enable
up
0-4
disable down
enable
up
0-6
disable down
enable
up
1-0
disable down
enable
up
1-2
disable down
enable
up
1-4
disable down
enable
up
1-6
disable down
enable
up
2-0
disable down
enable
up
2-2
disable down
enable
up
2-4
disable down
enable
up
2-6
disable down
enable
up
8-0
enable
enable
up
8-2
disable down
enable
up
8-4
disable down
enable
up
8-6
disable down
enable
up
EXAMPLE 1
up
up
When the system is being powered off, reserves the connection of the DVD
drive/tape drive unit to the port 0-0.
XSCF> cfgdevice -c attach -p 0-0
Are you sure you want to attach the device [y|n] :y
Completed.( Reservation )
EXAMPLE 2
When the system is being powered on, connects the DVD drive/tape drive
unit to port 0-0.
XSCF> cfgdevice -c attach -p 0-0
Are you sure you want to attach the device [y|n] :y
Completed.
28
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
cfgdevice(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Disconnects the DVD drive/tape drive unit from the port 0-0.
XSCF> cfgdevice -f -c detach -p 0-0
Are you sure you want to detach the device [y|n] :y
Completed.
EXAMPLE 4
Displays the status of individual DVD drive/tape drive unit set (without the
expansion cabinet).
XSCF> cfgdevice -l
Current connection for DVD/DAT: port 0-0
Expander status
Port No. IOU/SAS-status SAS-status
----------------------------------0-0
enable
0-2
disable down
EXAMPLE 5
up
enable
up
enable
up
Displays the status of individual DVD drive/tape drive unit set (with the expansion cabinet).
XSCF> cfgdevice -l
Current connection for DVD/DAT: port 0-0
Expander status
Port No. IOU/SAS-status SAS-status
----------------------------------0-0
enable
0-2
up
enable
up
disable down
enable
up
0-4
disable down
enable
up
0-6
disable down
enable
up
1-0
disable down
enable
up
1-2
disable down
enable
up
1-4
disable down
enable
up
1-6
disable down
enable
up
2-0
disable down
enable
up
2-2
disable down
enable
up
2-4
disable down
enable
up
System Administration
29
cfgdevice(8)
2-6
disable down
enable
up
8-0
enable
enable
up
8-2
disable down
enable
up
8-4
disable down
enable
up
8-6
disable down
enable
up
EXAMPLE 6
up
Connects the DVD drive/tape drive unit to port 0-0 when the system is being
powered on. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts.
XSCF> cfgdevice -y -c attach -p 0-0
Are you sure you want to attach the device [y|n] :y
Completed.
EXAMPLE 7
Connects the DVD drive/tape drive unit to port 0-0 when the system is being
powered on. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts without displaying
messages.
XSCF> cfgdevice -q -y -c attach -p 0-0
EXIT STATUS
30
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
clockboard(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
clockboard - Set or display the clock control unit used at system startup
clockboard
clockboard -s CLKU_B-number
clockboard -h
DESCRIPTION
The clockboard(8) command specifies the clock control unit used when the
system power is turned on, or it displays the clock control unit that is currently
used and the clock control unit used at the next system startup.
The number 0 or 1 is used to specify or display a clock control unit. When the
clockboard(8) command is executed with no options, the clock control unit that is
currently used and the one used at the next system startup are displayed.
The clockboard(8) command is valid only for high-end server.
Privileges
You must have fieldeng privilege to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-s CLKU_B-number Specifies the clock control unit to be used the next time the
system power is turned on. Either 0 or 1 can be specified for
CLKU_B-number.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the clock control unit that is currently used and the one used at the
next system startup.
XSCF> clockboard
current CLKU_B number
next CLKU_B number
EXAMPLE 2
:0
:1
Specifies the clock control unit used at the next system startup.
XSCF> clockboard -s 1
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
31
clockboard(8)
32
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
console(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
console - connect to a domain console
console [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id [-f | -r] [-s escapeChar]
console -h
DESCRIPTION
The console(8) command connects the XSCF shell console to the console of the
specified domain (domain console).
Domain consoles include a writable console and read-only console. Only one
writable console and multiple read-only consoles can be connected to one domain.
An attempt to set up a connection to another writable console while one writable
console is already connected results in an error. Even in this case, however, a user
with the platadm or domainadm privilege can forcibly establish a connection to a
writable console, in which case the currently connected writable console is
disconnected.
To exit the domain console and return to the XSCF shell console, press the Enter key
and then enter '#.'.
Note – The console(8) command does not automatically log out the domain
command line. Make certain to log out from the domain prior to exiting the
console.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop
Can run this command only for your accessible domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-d domain_id
Specifies only one ID of the domain to which to connect to a
domain console. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system
configuration.
-f
Forcibly connects to a writable console. The currently connected
writable console is disconnected. Only users who belong to the
platadm or domainadm privilege can specify this option.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
System Administration
33
console(8)
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-r
Sets up a connection to a read-only console.
-s escapeChar
Specifies an escape character. The default is ’#’ (sharp). The
character specified for escapeChar must be enclosed in double
quotation (" "). The following symbols can be specified for
escapeChar:
’#’, ’@’, ’^’, ’&’, ’?’, ’*’, ’=’, ’.’, ’|’
Specified escape character is available only in the session that
executed the console(8) command.
-y
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
34
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
The domain console regards ’#’ used at the beginning of a line as an escape
character. An escape character is specified to instruct the console to perform
special processing. Examples of processing that can be specified in combination
with ’#’ are as follows.
#?
Outputs a status message.
#.
Disconnects the console.
■
To enter ’#’ at the beginning of a line, enter ’#’ twice.
■
To display information on the currently connected domain console, use the
showconsolepath(8) command.
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
sendbreak(8), showconsolepath(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
deleteboard(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
deleteboard - disconnect an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the domain
configuration
deleteboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] [-c disconnect] xsb [ xsb...]
deleteboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c unassign xsb [ xsb...]
deleteboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c reserve xsb [ xsb...]
deleteboard -h
DESCRIPTION
The deleteboard(8) command disconnects an XSB from the domain configuration
in which it has been configured.
One of the following disconnection methods can be specified:
Privileges
disconnect
Disconnects the XSB from the domain configuration but keeps it
assigned. Because the XSB thus remains assigned to the domain
configuration, it can be configured again in the domain by reboot
the domain or execution of the addboard(8) command.
unassign
Completely disconnects the XSB from the main configuration and
puts it in the system board pool. The XSB in the system board
pool can be incorporated into or assigned to other domain
configurations.
reserve
Does not immediately disconnects the XSB from the domain
configuration but only reserves detachment. When the domain
power is shut down, the reserved XSB is disconnected from the
domain configuration and put in the system board pool.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm
Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
35
deleteboard(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-c disconnect
Detaches the XSB from the domain configuration and keeps it
assigned. If the -c option is omitted, "-c disconnect" is used.
-c reset
Reserves disconnect of an XSB. If the -c option is omitted, "-c
disconnect" is used.
-c unassign
Disconnects the XSB completely from the domain configuration
and puts it in the system board pool. If the -c option is omitted,
"-c disconnect" is used.
-f
Forcibly detaches the specified XSB.
Note – If the -f option is used to forcibly add a system board to
a domain, all the added hardware resources may not work
normally. For this reason, use of the -f option is not
recommended in normal operation. If the -f option must be
specified, verify the status of every added system board and
device.
OPERANDS
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-v
Displays a detailed message. If this option is specified with the
-q option, the -v option is ignored.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
The following operand is supported:
xsb
Specifies the XSB number to be disconnected. Multiple xsb
operands are permitted, separated by spaces. The following xsb
form is accepted:
x–y
where:
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
36
■
x
An integer from 00–15.
y
An integer from 0–3.
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
deleteboard(8)
EXAMPLES
■
If "-c disconnect" is specified when either the domain power has been turned
off or the XSB is already disconnected from the domain configuration, no
operation is performed. If domain power-on or power-off is in progress, the
command results in an error.
■
If "-c unassign" is specified when either the domain power has been turned
off or the XSB is already disconnected from the domain configuration, the XSB is
switched from the assigned state to a system board pool. If the XSB is already in
a system board pool, no operation is performed.
■
If "-c reserve" is specified when either the domain power has been turned off
or the XSB is already disconnected from the domain configuration, the XSB is
immediately switched from the assigned state to a system board pool. If the XSB
is already in a system board pool, no operation is performed. If domain poweron or power-off is in progress, the command results in an error.
■
When the XSB is disconnected, the hardware resource on the XSB is disconnected
from the operating system. For this reason, command execution may take time.
■
The state in which an XSB has been assigned means that configuring the XSB in
the specified domain has been reserved. The reserved XSB is configured when
the domain is rebooted or the addboard(8) command is executed. An already
assigned XSB cannot be specified for configuring or assignment from other
domains.
■
An XSB in the system board pool means that the XSB belongs to no domain and
is therefore available for configuring or assignment.
EXAMPLE 1
Puts the system board XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 in the system board
pool
XSCF> deleteboard -c unassign 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0
EXAMPLE 2
Reserves disconnection of XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 .
XSCF> deleteboard -c reserve 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), moveboard(8), replacefru(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8),
showboards(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showdomainstatus(8),
showfru(8)
System Administration
37
deleteboard(8)
38
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
deletecodlicense(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
deletecodlicense - remove a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU) license
key from the COD license database
deletecodlicense [-f] license-signature
deletecodlicense -h
DESCRIPTION
The deletecodlicense(8) command removes the specified COD RTU license key
from the COD license database on the Service Processor. For further information
about COD RTU license keys, refer to the OPL Administration Guide.
The system checks the number of COD RTU licenses against the number of COD
CPUs in use. If the license removal will result in an insufficient number of COD
RTU licenses with respect to the CPU in use, the system does not delete the license
key from the COD RTU license database. If you still want to delete the COD RTU
license key, you must reduce the number of COD CPUs in use. Power off the
appropriate number of domains or disconnect the appropriate number of boards.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-f
Forces the specified COD RTU license key to be deleted from the
COD license database.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
license-signature
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Specifies the COD RTU license key to be deleted from the
COD license database.
Deleting a COD RTU license key
XSCF> deletecodlicense \
01:84000000:104:0301010100:3:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
39
deletecodlicense(8)
SEE ALSO
40
addcodlicense(8), setcod(8), showcod(8), showcodlicense(8),
showcodusage(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
deletefru(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
deletefru - delete a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
deletefru
deletefru -h
DESCRIPTION
The deletefru(8) command deletes a FRU.
The deletefru(8) command allows the user to make the settings that are required
for FRU deletion and related to selecting, confirming, and removing FRUs
interactively using menus.
The following FRUs can be deleted:
Privileges
■
CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU)
■
I/O unit (IOU)
You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
-h
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
Displays usage statement.
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addfru(8), deleteboard(8), replacefru(8), setupfru(8), showdomainstatus(8),
showfru(8), showhardconf(8), unlockmaintenance(8)
System Administration
41
deletefru(8)
42
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
deleteuser(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
deleteuser - delete an XSCF user account
deleteuser user
deleteuser -h
DESCRIPTION
deleteuser(8) deletes a local XSCF user account. All local account data associated
with the user account is deleted including password and Secure Shell (SSH) keys.
The local user’s currently running XSCF shell and browser sessions are terminated
at once. The user’s account is removed from the system and they cannot log back
in. You cannot delete your own account.
Privileges
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
user
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Specifies a valid user name. The name of the user account to be
deleted.
Deleting a User
XSCF> deleteuser jsmith
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
adduser(8), disableuser(8), enableuser(8)
System Administration
43
deleteuser(8)
44
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
disableuser(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
disableuser - disable an XSCF user account
disableuser user
disableuser -h
DESCRIPTION
disableuser(8) disables a local XSCF user account for subsequent logins. Current
sessions are not affected.
When an account is disabled, it cannot be used for login. This applies to console
(serial) and telnet connections, as well as the Secure Shell (SSH). XSCF Web login is
also disabled. All local XSCF account data associated with the user remains on the
system. This includes password and SSH keys. You can reenable a disabled account
using enableuser(8).
Privileges
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
user
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Specifies a valid user name of the user account to be disabled.
Disabling a User Account
XSCF> disableuser jsmith
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
adduser(8), deleteuser(8), enableuser(8), showuser(8)
System Administration
45
disableuser(8)
46
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
enableuser(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
enableuser - enable an XSCF user account
enableuser user
enableuser -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
enableuser(8) enables a local XSCF user account. An enabled account can be used
for login at the console, using Secure Shell (SSH). Using this command, you can
reenable accounts disabled by disableuser.
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
user
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Specifies the valid user name of the account to be enabled.
Enable a User Account
XSCF> enableuser jsmith
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
adduser(8), deleteuser(8), disableuser(8), showuser(8)
System Administration
47
enableuser(8)
48
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
exit(1)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
exit - exit the XSCF shell
exit
The exit(1) command exits and closes the XSCF shell.
No privileges are required to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
49
exit(1)
50
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
flashupdate(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
flashupdate - update the firmware
flashupdate -c check -m xcp -s version
flashupdate [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c update -m xcp -s version
flashupdate -c sync
flashupdate -h
DESCRIPTION
The flashupdate(8) command updates the firmware that is provided for the
SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 servers.
The entire firmware shown below is updated. Whether update can be performed
can be checked beforehand.
■
Privileges
Update of the entire firmware (XSCF, OpenBoot PROM) (xcp)
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:.
-c check
Checks whether the specified firmware can be updated.
-c update
Updates the specified firmware. In case the XSCF unit is
duplicated configuration, updates the firmware of both XSCF
units.
-c sync
Synchronizes the firmware versions of the XSCF units when the
XSCF units are duplicated configuration. This option is used
when replacing an XSCF unit.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-m xcp
Specifies the entire firmware as a target.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
System Administration
51
flashupdate(8)
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-s version
Specifies a XCP comprehensive firmware version. For version,
specify a major version, minor version and micro version
continuously.
The XCP version number appears as xyyz by four digits, where:
EXAMPLES
Major firmware release number
yy
Minor release number
z
Micro release number
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
-y
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
x
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
When the firmware is updated, the XSCF unit is reset. Therefore, LAN
connection to the XSCF is canceled if already established.
■
When there's a faulty FRU, can't update the firmware. Resolve the FRU fault
then update.
EXAMPLE 1
Check whether the entire firmware can be updated to version 1020.
XSCF> flashupdate -c check -m xcp -s 1020
EXAMPLE 2
Updates the entire firmware to version from 1010 to 1020.
XSCF> flashupdate -c update -m xcp -s 1020
The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y
XCP update is started (XCP version=1020:last version=1010)
OpenBoot PROM update is started
OpenBoot PROM update has been completed (OpenBoot PROM version=01010001)
XSCF update is started (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last version=1010)
XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
52
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
flashupdate(8)
:
:
XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
XSCF update has been completed (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010)
XSCF update is started (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last version=1010)
XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
:
:
XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last
version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last
version=01010001)
XSCF is rebooting to update the reserve bank
EXAMPLE 3
When XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, synchronizes the firmware versions after replacement of the XSCF unit.
XSCF> flashupdate -c sync
System Administration
53
flashupdate(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
54
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion
>0
An error occurred.
version(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
fmadm(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
fmadm - fault management configuration tool
fmadm [-q] config
fmadm -h
DESCRIPTION
fmadm (8) can be used to view system configuration parameters related to fault
management.
fmadm can be used to:
View the set of diagnosis engines and agents that are currently participating in
fault management
View the list of system components that have been diagnosed as faulty
The Fault Manager attempts to automate as many activities as possible, so use of
fmadm is typically not required. When the Fault Manager needs help from a human
administrator or service representative, it produces a message indicating its needs.
It also refers you to a URL containing the relevant knowledge article. The web site
might ask you to use fmadm or one of the other fault management utilities to gather
more information or perform additional tasks. The documentation for fmdump(8)
describes more about tools to observe fault management activities.
Privileges
You must have platop, platadm, or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-q
OPERANDS
Sets quiet mode. fmadm does not produce messages indicating the
result of successful operations to standard output.
The following operands are supported:
config
Displays the configuration of the Fault Manager itself, including
the module name, version, and description of each component
module. Fault Manager modules provide services such as
automated diagnosis, self-healing, and messaging for hardware
and software present on the system.
System Administration
55
fmadm(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying the Fault Manager Configuration
XSCF> fmadm config
MODULE
VERSION STATUS
case-close
1.0
active
Case-Close Agent
fmd-self-diagnosis 1.0
active
Fault Manager Self-Diagnosis
sysevent-transport
syslog-msgs
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
56
DESCRIPTION
1.0
1.0
active
SysEvent Transport Agent
active Syslog Messaging Agent
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
fmdump(8), fmstat(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
fmdump(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
fmdump - view fault management logs
fmdump
fmdump [-e] [-f] [-M] [-v] [-V] [-c class] [-t time] [-T time] [-u
uuid]
fmdump -m [-M] [-t time] [-T time]
fmdump -h
DESCRIPTION
The fmdump utility displays the contents of any of the logs associated with the Fault
Manager (fault manager daemon). The Fault Manager runs in the background on
each server. It records, in the error log, faults detected by the XSCF, and initiates
proactive self-healing activities, such as disabling faulty components.
The Fault Manager maintains two sets of logs for use by administrators and service
personnel:
Error log
Records error telemetry, the symptoms of problems detected by
the system
Fault log
Records fault diagnosis information; the problems believed to
explain these symptoms. By default, fmdump displays the
contents of the fault log, which records the result of each
diagnosis made by the fault manager or one of its component
modules.
Each problem recorded in the fault log is identified by:
■
The time of its diagnosis
■
A Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) that can be used to uniquely identify this
particular problem across any set of systems
■
A message identifier (MSG-ID) that can be used to access a corresponding
knowledge article located at the specified website.
If a problem requires action by a human administrator or service technician or
affects system behavior, the Fault Manager also issues a human-readable message.
This message provides a summary of the problem and a reference to the knowledge
article on the specified website.
You can use the -v and -V options to expand the display from a single-line
summary to increased levels of detail for each event recorded in the log. You can
also use the -M option to display only one screen at a time. The -c, -t, -T, and -u
options can be used to filter the output by selecting only those events that match
the specified class, range of times, or uuid. If more than one filter option is present
on the command line, the options combine to display only those events that are
selected by the logical AND of the options. If more than one instance of the same
System Administration
57
fmdump(8)
filter option is present on the command-line, the like options combine to display
any events selected by the logical OR of the options.
You can use the -m option to display the Fault Manager syslog contents.
Privileges
You must have platop, platadm, or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-c class
Selects events that match the specified class. The class argument
can use the global pattern matching syntax, which is similar to
global pattern matching for files. For example xyz.* would match
xyz.sxc and xyz.pdf. The class represents a hierarchical
classification string indicating the type of telemetry event.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-e
Displays events from the fault management error log instead of the
fault log.
The error log contains private telemetry information used by
XSCF’s automated diagnosis software. This information is recorded
to facilitate post-mortem analysis of problems and event replay,
and should not be parsed or relied upon for the development of
scripts and other tools.
58
-f
Displays only lines that have been appended to the dump file since
the command was executed. Output continues until interrupted by
Ctrl-C.
-m
Displays the Fault Manager syslog message contents.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-t time
Selects events that occurred at or after the specified time. The time
can be specified using the forms in the Time Formats following this
section. Used with -T you can specify a range.
-T time
Selects events that occurred at or before the specified time. time can
be specified using any of the time formats described for the -t
option. Used with -t you can specify a range.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
fmdump(8)
-u uuid
Selects fault diagnosis events that exactly match the specified uuid.
Each diagnosis is associated with a Universal Unique Identifier
(UUID) for identification purposes. The -u option can be
combined with other options such as -v to show all of the details
associated with a particular diagnosis.
If the -e option and -u option are specified at the same time,
fmdump displays the relevant error events.
-v
Displays verbose event detail. The event display is enlarged to
show additional common members of the selected events.
-V
Displays very verbose event detail. The event display is enlarged
to show every member of the name-value pair list associated with
each event. In addition, for fault logs, the event display includes a
list of cross-references to the corresponding errors that were
associated with the diagnosis.
The following are the Time Formats:
Time Format
Description
mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
Month, day, year, hour in 24-hour format, minute, and
second. Any amount of whitespace can separate the
date and time. The argument should be quoted so that
the shell interprets the two strings as a single
argument.
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
Month, day, year, hour in 24-hour format, and minute.
Any amount of whitespace can separate the date and
time. The argument should be quoted so that the shell
interprets the two strings as a single argument.
mm/dd/yy
12:00:00AM on the specified month, day, and year
ddMonyy hh:mm:ss
Day, month name, year, hour in 24-hour format,
minute, and second. Any amount of whitespace can
separate the date and time. The argument should be
quoted so that the shell interprets the two strings as a
single argument.
Mon dd hh:mm:ss
Month, day, hour in 24-hour format, minute, and
second of the current year. Any amount of whitespace
can separate the date and time. The argument should
be quoted so that the shell interprets the two strings as
a single argument.
System Administration
59
fmdump(8)
Time Format
Description
yyyy-mm-dd[T hh:mm[:ss]]
Year, month, day, and optional hour in 24-hour format,
minute, and second, where T is an integer value
specified in base 10. The second, or hour, minute, and
second, can be optionally omitted.
ddMonyy
12:00:00AM on the specified day, month name, and
year.
hh:mm:ss
Hour in 24-hour format, minute, and second of the
current day.
hh:mm
Hour in 24-hour format and minute of the current day.
Tns | Tnsec
T nanoseconds ago where T is an integer value
specified in base 10.
Tus | Tusec
T microseconds ago where T is an integer value
specified in base 10
Tms | Tmsec
T milliseconds ago where T is an integer value
specified in base 10.
Ts | Tsec
T seconds ago where T is an integer value specified in
base 10.
Tm | Tmin
T minutes ago where T is an integer value specified in
base 10.
Th | Thour
T hours ago where T is an integer value specified in
base 10.
Td | Tday
T days ago where T is an integer value specified in
base 10.
You can append a decimal fraction of the form .n to any -t option argument to
indicate a fractional number of seconds beyond the specified time.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Default fmdump Display
XSCF> fmdump
TIME
UUID
MSG-ID
Aug 12 16:12:13.2811 7868c1cc-23d4-c575-8659-85cdbe61842e FMD-8000-77
Aug 12 16:12:13.2985 7868c1cc-23d4-c575-8659-85cdbe61842e FMD-8000-77
Sep 01 16:06:57.5839 3ceca439-b0b2-4db1-9123-c8ace3f2b371 FMD-8000-77
Sep 01 16:06:57.6278 3ceca439-b0b2-4db1-9123-c8ace3f2b371 FMD-8000-77
Sep 06 09:37:05.0983 6485b42b-6638-4c5d-b652-bec485290788 LINUX-8000-1N
60
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
fmdump(8)
Sep 06 09:38:10.8584 77435994-5b99-4db8-bdcd-985c7d3ae3e4 LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 06 09:57:44.6502 0087d58c-e5b9-415d-91bc-adf7c41dd316 LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 06 12:40:59.2801 97de2cef-8ea1-407a-8a53-c7a67e61987a LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 06 12:41:10.1076 fa7304f9-c9e8-4cd1-9ca5-e35f57d53b2c LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 06 13:01:49.1462 ce550611-4308-4336-8a9a-19676f828515 LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 06 15:42:56.6132 0f4b429f-c048-47cd-9d9f-a2f7b6d4c957 LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 06 16:07:14.4652 7d5fb282-e01b-476a-b7e1-1a0f8de80758 LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 06 16:08:16.3755 41379237-9750-4fd6-bce3-b5131d864d34 LINUX-8000-1N
Sep 29 14:49:27.8452 0455ceaa-e226-424a-9b34-27603ca603f1 FMD-8000-58
Sep 29 15:02:00.3039 fb550ebc-80e9-41c8-8afc-ac680b9eb613 FMD-8000-58
Sep 29 15:09:25.4335 8cec9a83-e2a3-4dc3-a7cd-de01caef5c63 FMD-8000-4M
Sep 29 15:10:09.6151 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed FMD-8000-58
EXAMPLE 2
Display in Verbose Mode
XSCF> fmdump -v
TIME
UUID
MSG-ID
Nov 30 20:44:55.1283 9f773e33-e46f-466c-be86-fd3fcc449935 FMD-8000-0W
100%
defect.sunos.fmd.nosub
:
EXAMPLE 3
Display Very Verbose Event Detail for the Last UUID
XSCF> fmdump -e -V -u 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed
TIME
CLASS
Sep 29 2005 15:10:09.565220864 ereport.io.iox.cp.seeprom0.nresp
nvlist version: 0
detector = (embedded nvlist)
nvlist version: 0
scheme = hc
version = 0
hc-root = /
hc-list_sz = 0x1
hc-list = (array of embedded nvlists)
(start hc-list[0])
System Administration
61
fmdump(8)
nvlist version: 0
scheme = hc
hc-name = iox
hc-id = 0
(end hc-list[0])
(end detector)
IOXserial_no = 123456
class = ereport.io.iox.cp.seeprom0.nresp
ena = 0x921b650000000001
EXAMPLE 4
Displaying the Full Fault Report for the Specified UUID
XSCF> fmdump
-V -u 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed
TIME
UUID
MSG-ID
Sep 29 15:10:09.6151 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed FMD-8000-58
TIME
CLASS
Sep 29 15:10:09.5652 ereport.io.iox.cp.seeprom0.nresp
0x921b650000000001
nvlist version: 0
version = 0x0
class = list.suspect
uuid = 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed
code = FMD-8000-58
diag-time = 1128021009 615016
de = (embedded nvlist)
nvlist version: 0
version = 0x0
scheme = fmd
authority = (embedded nvlist)
nvlist version: 0
version = 0x0
product-id = SUNW,SPARC-Enterprise
chassis-id = BF0000001V
server-id = localhost
(end authority)
62
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
ENA
fmdump(8)
mod-name = sde
mod-version = 1.13
(end de)
fault-list-sz = 0x1
fault-list = (array of embedded nvlists)
(start fault-list[0])
nvlist version: 0
version = 0x0
class = fault.io.iox.cp.seeprom
certainty = 0x64
fru = (embedded nvlist)
nvlist version: 0
scheme = hc
version = 0x0
hc-root =
hc-list-sz = 0x1
hc-list = (array of embedded nvlists)
(start hc-list[0])
nvlist version: 0
hc-name = iox
hc-id = 0
(end hc-list[0])
(end fru)
(end fault-list[0])
EXAMPLE 5
Displaying Contents of the Fault Manager syslog Message
XSCF> fmdump
-m -M
MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11, TYPE: Defect, VER: 1, SEVERITY: Minor
EVENT-TIME: Tue Nov
7 07:01:44 PST 2006
PLATFORM: SUNW,SPARC-Enterprise, CSN: 7860000764, HOSTNAME: san-ff2-20-0
SOURCE: sde, REV: 1.5
EVENT-ID: 2daddee0-2f42-47ee-b5b2-57ae6a41bfc0
System Administration
63
fmdump(8)
DESC: A Solaris Fault Manager component generated a diagnosis for which no
message summary exists. Refer to http://www.sun.com/msg/FMD-8000-11 for
more information.
AUTO-RESPONSE: The diagnosis has been saved in the fault log for examination
by Sun.
IMPACT: The fault log will need to be manually examined using fmdump(1M)
in order to determine if any human response is required.
MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11, TYPE: Defect, VER: 1, SEVERITY: Minor
EVENT-TIME: Tue Nov
7 07:03:25 PST 2006
PLATFORM: SUNW,SPARC-Enterprise, CSN: 7860000764, HOSTNAME: san-ff2-20-0
SOURCE: sde, REV: 1.5
EVENT-ID: 2b03ab60-96db-439d-a13a-2f420a1b73c7
DESC: A Solaris Fault Manager component generated a diagnosis for which no
message summary exists. Refer to http://www.sun.com/msg/FMD-8000-11 for
more information.
AUTO-RESPONSE: The diagnosis has been saved in the fault log for examination
by Sun.
IMPACT: The fault log will need to be manually examined using fmdump(1M)
in order to determine if any human response is required.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
64
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion. All records in the log file were examined
successfully.
>0
An error occurred.
fmadm(8), fmstat(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
fmstat(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
fmstat - report fault management module statistics
fmstat [-a] [ [-s] [-z] [-m module]] [ interval [ count]]
fmstat -h
DESCRIPTION
The fmstat utility can be used by administrators and service personnel to report
statistics associated with the Fault Manager (fault manager daemon), and its
associated set of modules. The Fault Manager runs in the background on each OPL
system. It receives telemetry information relating to problems detected by the
system software, diagnoses these problems, and initiates proactive self-healing
activities such as disabling faulty components.
You can use fmstat to view statistics for diagnosis engines and agents that are
currently participating in fault management. The fmadm(8), and fmdump(8) man
pages describe more about tools to observe fault management activities.
If the -m option is present, fmstat reports any statistics kept by the specified fault
management module. The module list can be obtained using fmadm config.
If the -m option is not present, fmstat reports the following statistics for each of its
client modules:
module
The name of the fault management module as reported by
fmadm config.
ev_recv
The number of telemetry events received by the module.
ev_acpt
The number of events accepted by the module as relevant to a
diagnosis.
wait
The average number of telemetry events waiting to be examined
by the module.
svc_t
The average service time for telemetry events received by the
module, in milliseconds.
%w
The percentage of time that there were telemetry events waiting
to be examined by the module.
%b
The percentage of time that the module was busy processing
telemetry events.
open
The number of active cases (open problem investigations)
owned by the module.
System Administration
65
fmstat(8)
Privileges
solve
The total number of cases solved by this module since it was
loaded.
memsz
The amount of dynamic memory currently allocated by this
module.
bufsz
The amount of persistent buffer space currently allocated by this
module.
You must have platadm, platop, or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-a
Prints the default global statistics for the Fault Manager or a
module. If used without the -m module option, the default global
Fault Manager statistics are displayed. If used with the -m module
option, the global statistics for a module are displayed.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-m module
Prints a report on the statistics associated with the specified fault
management module, instead of the default statistics report.
Modules can publish an arbitrary set of statistics to help service the
fault management software itself.
If used without the -a option, displays only those statistics kept by
the module. If used with the -a option, displays statistics kept by
the module and the global statistics associated with the module.
OPERANDS
66
-s
Prints a report on Soft Error Rate Discrimination (SERD) engines
associated with the module instead of the default module statistics
report. A SERD engine is a construct used by fault management
software to determine if a statistical threshold measured as N
events in some time T has been exceeded. The -s option can only
be used in combination with the -m option.
-z
Omits statistics with a zero value from the report associated with
the specified fault management module. The -z option can only be
used in combination with the -m option.
The following operands are supported:
count
Print only count reports, and then exit.
interval
Print a new report every interval seconds.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
fmstat(8)
If neither count nor interval is specified, a single report is printed and fmstat exits.
If an interval is specified but no count is specified, fmstat prints reports every
interval seconds indefinitely until the command is interrupted by Control-C.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying FM Statistics for the Syslog Module
XSCF> fmstat -a -m syslog-msgs
NAME VALUE
DESCRIPTION
bad_code 0
event code has no dictionary name
bad_fmri 0
event fmri is missing or invalid
bad_time 0
event time is not properly encoded
bad_vers 0
event version is missing or invalid
fmd.accepted 0
total events accepted by module
fmd.buflimit 10M
limit on total buffer space
fmd.buftotal 0
total buffer space used by module
fmd.caseclosed 0
total cases closed by module
fmd.caseopen 0
cases currently open by module
fmd.casesolved 0
total cases solved by module
fmd.ckptcnt 0
number of checkpoints taken
fmd.ckptrestore true
restore checkpoints for module
fmd.ckptsave true
save checkpoints for module
fmd.ckpttime 0d
total checkpoint time
fmd.ckptzero false
zeroed checkpoint at startup
fmd.debugdrop 4
dropped debug messages
fmd.dequeued 1
total events dequeued by module
fmd.dispatched 1
total events dispatched to module
fmd.dlastupdate 1144424838299131us hrtime of last event dequeue completion
fmd.dropped 0
total events dropped on queue overflow
fmd.dtime 0d
total processing time after dequeue
fmd.loadtime 1144424251692484us hrtime at which module was loaded
fmd.memlimit 10M
limit on total memory allocated
fmd.memtotal 97b
total memory allocated by module
fmd.prdequeued 0
protocol events dequeued by module
fmd.snaptime 1144424838299148us hrtime of last statistics snapshot
fmd.thrlimit 8
limit on number of auxiliary threads
System Administration
67
fmstat(8)
fmd.thrtotal 0
total number of auxiliary threads
fmd.wcnt 0
count of events waiting on queue
fmd.wlastupdate 1144424838299131us hrtime of last wait queue update
fmd.wlentime 30us
total wait length * time product
fmd.wtime 30us
total wait time on queue
fmd.xprtlimit 256
limit on number of open transports
fmd.xprtopen 0
total number of open transports
fmd.xprtqlimit 256
limit on transport event queue length
log_err 0
failed to log message to log(7D)
msg_err 0
failed to log message to sysmsg(7D)
no_msg 0
message logging suppressed
XSCF> fmstat
module
ev_recv ev_acpt wait svc_t %w %b open solve memsz bufsz
case-close
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
fmd-self-diagnosis
1
1
0.0
0.2
0
0
1
0
27b
0
sysevent-transport
0
0
0.0
573.2
0
0
0
0
0
0
syslog-msgs
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
97b
0
EXAMPLE 2
Displaying FM Statistics for fmd Self-Diagnosis Module
XSCF> fmstat -z -m fmd-self-diagnosis
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
68
NAME VALUE
DESCRIPTION
module 1
error events received from fmd modules
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
fmadm(8), fmdump(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
getflashimage(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
getflashimage - download a firmware image file
getflashimage [-v ] [ [-q] -{y|n} ] [-u user ] [-p proxy [-t proxy_type]] url
getflashimage -l
getflashimage [ [-q] -{y|n} ] [-d]
getflashimage -h
DESCRIPTION
The getflashimage(8) command downloads a firmware image file for use by the
flashupdate(8) command.
If any previous image files of the firmware are present on the XSCF unit, they are
deleted prior to downloading the new version. After successful download, the
image file is checked for integrity, and the MD5 checksum is displayed.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d
Deletes all previous firmware image files still on the XSCF unit,
then exits.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-l
Lists firmware image files that are still on the XSCF unit, then exits.
-n
Automatically answers n (no) to all prompts.
-p proxy
Specifies the proxy server to be used for transfers. The default
transfer type is http, unless modified using the -t proxy_type
option. The value for proxy must be in the format servername:port.
(Refer to Example 3.)
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-t proxy_type
Used with the -p option to specify the type of proxy. Possible
values for proxy_type are: http, socks4, and socks5. The default
value is http.
-u user
Specifies the user name when logging in to a remote ftp or http
server that requires authentication. You will be prompted for a
password.
-v
Displays verbose output. This may be helpful when diagnosing
network or server problems.
-y
Automatically answers y (yes) to all prompts.
System Administration
69
getflashimage(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
url
Specifies the URL of the firmware image to download. Supported
formats for this value include the following:
http://server[:port]/path/file
https://server[:port]/path/file
ftp://server[:port]/path/file
file:///media/usb_msd/path/file
where the value for file is in one of the following formats:
XCPvvvv.tar.gz
FFXCPvvvv.tar.gz
DCXCPvvvv.tar.gz
and vvvv is the four-character version number.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Downloading a Version from an http Server
XSCF> getflashimage http://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz
Existing versions:
Version
FFXCP1040.tar.gz
Size
46827123
Date
Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007
Warning: About to delete existing versions.
Continue? [y|n]: y
Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz.
0MB received
1MB received
2MB received
...
43MB received
44MB received
45MB received
Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s
Checking file...
MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a0
70
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
getflashimage(8)
EXAMPLE 2
Downloading a Version from an ftp Server
XSCF> getflashimage ftp://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz
Existing versions:
Version
FFXCP1040.tar.gz
Size
46827123
Date
Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007
Warning: About to delete existing versions.
Continue? [y|n]: y
Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz.
0MB received
1MB received
2MB received
...
43MB received
44MB received
45MB received
Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s
Checking file...
MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a1
EXAMPLE 3
Downloading Using an http Proxy Server With Port 8080
XSCF> getflashimage -p webproxy.sun.com:8080 \
http://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz
Existing versions:
Version
FFXCP1040.tar.gz
Size
46827123
Date
Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007
Warning: About to delete existing versions.
Continue? [y|n]: y
Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz.
0MB received
1MB received
2MB received
...
43MB received
System Administration
71
getflashimage(8)
44MB received
45MB received
Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s
Checking file...
MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a2
EXAMPLE 4
Downloading Using a User Name and Password
XSCF> getflashimage -u jsmith \
http://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz
Existing versions:
Version
FFXCP1040.tar.gz
Size
46827123
Date
Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007
Warning: About to delete existing versions.
Continue? [y|n]: y
Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz.
Password: [not echoed]
0MB received
1MB received
2MB received
...
43MB received
44MB received
45MB received
Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s
Checking file...
MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a3
EXAMPLE 5
Downloading From a USB Memory Stick
XSCF> getflashimage file:///media/usb_msd/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz
Existing versions:
Version
FFXCP1040.tar.gz
Size
46827123
Date
Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007
Warning: About to delete existing versions.
72
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
getflashimage(8)
Continue? [y|n]: y
Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz.
Mounted USB device
0MB received
1MB received
...
44MB received
45MB received
Download successful: 46827 Kbytes in 109 secs (430.094 Kbytes/sec)
Checking file...
MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a4
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
flashupdate(8)
System Administration
73
getflashimage(8)
74
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
ioxadm(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
ioxadm - manage External I/O Expansion Units
ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] env [-e] [-l] [-t] [ target [ sensors]]
ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] list [ target]
ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] locator [on|off] [ target]
ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] poweroff target
ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] poweron target
ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] reset target
ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] setled [ on|off|slow|fast] target led_type
ioxadm -h
DESCRIPTION
ioxadm(8) manages External I/O Expansion Units and link cards attached to the
system.
For this utility, an operand with parameters and a target device must both be
specified. The target device can be a downlink card mounted in a built-in PCI slot
in the host system; an External I/O Expansion Unit; or a field replaceable unit
(FRU) in an External I/O Expansion Unit. The downlink card is identified by a
string which identifies the host path to the card. An uplink card is a FRU in the
I/O boat.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run these commands:
Required Privileges
Operands
platop
env, list
platadm
env, list, locator, poweroff, poweron
fieldeng
All operands
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-f
Forces command execution by ignoring warnings.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
System Administration
75
ioxadm(8)
OPERANDS
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-p
Parsable output. Suppresses headers in display output. Fields are
separated by single tabs.
-v
Specifies verbose output. Refer to specific operands for details.
The following operands are supported:
env [-elt] [target [sensors]]
76
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
ioxadm(8)
Displays a summary of an External I/O Expansion Unit or link card’s
environmental state.
■
-e
Displays electrical states: measured voltage, current, fan speed, switch
settings.
■
-l
Displays LED states.
■
-t
Displays thermal readings.
If no target is specified, env displays a list of all sensors for all External I/O
Expansion Units.
If target specifies a box_id, env displays a list of sensor readings for all frus in
the specified External I/O Expansion Unit and the attached downlink cards.
If target is in the form of box_id followed by fru, then only environmentals
from that FRU will be printed. If an optional value for sensors is specified,
then only those types of sensors are displayed. These options may be used
concurrently.
If target is in the form of a host path, only the downlink card information is
displayed. See EXAMPLE 2.
The results are listed in tabular format. Each FRU sensor is listed in the first
column. In the next column is the sensor name, such as T_AMBIENT for
ambient temperature, or V_12V_0V for the voltage reading of the 12V rail.
The third, fourth, and fifth columns display the sensor reading (Value), sensor
resolution (Res), and Units, respectively. See EXAMPLE 1.
Each FRU can have a variety of different sensors. When specifying multiple
values for sensors, use spaces to separate the values. Possible values for
sensors can be seen in the Sensor column of EXAMPLE 1. Units are given in
Celsius degrees, Volts, Amperes, SWITCH and RPM.
The sensors names are FRU-dependent and may change from FRU type to
FRU type and even among individual FRUs.
If the -v option is set, verbose output is displayed. In addition to the regular
output, the output also includes: the maximum and minimum values
supported by the sensors (Max and Min), along with the low and high
warning thresholds (Min Alarm and Max Alarm).
LED indicators do not support these fields.
(cont’d)
System Administration
77
ioxadm(8)
Displays a summary of an External I/O Expansion Unit or link card’s
environmental state.
■
-e
Displays electrical states: measured voltage, current, fan speed, switch
settings.
■
-l
Displays LED states.
■
-t
Displays thermal readings.
If no target is specified, env displays a list of all sensors for all External I/O
Expansion Units.
If target specifies a box_id, env displays a list of sensor readings for all frus in
the specified External I/O Expansion Unit and the attached downlink cards.
If target is in the form of box_id followed by fru, then only environmentals
from that FRU will be printed. If an optional value for sensors is specified,
then only those types of sensors are displayed. These options may be used
concurrently.
If target is in the form of a host path, only the downlink card information is
displayed. See EXAMPLE 2.
The results are listed in tabular format. Each FRU sensor is listed in the first
column. In the next column is the sensor name, such as T_AMBIENT for
ambient temperature, or V_12V_0V for the voltage reading of the 12V rail.
The third, fourth, and fifth columns display the sensor reading (Value), sensor
resolution (Res), and Units, respectively. See EXAMPLE 1.
Each FRU can have a variety of different sensors. When specifying multiple
values for sensors, use spaces to separate the values. Possible values for
sensors can be seen in the Sensor column of EXAMPLE 1. Units are given in
Celsius degrees, Volts, Amperes, SWITCH and RPM.
The sensors names are FRU-dependent and may change from FRU type to
FRU type and even among individual FRUs.
If the -v option is set, verbose output is displayed. In addition to the regular
output, the output also includes: the maximum and minimum values
supported by the sensors (Max and Min), along with the low and high
warning thresholds (Min Alarm and Max Alarm).
LED indicators do not support these fields.
(cont’d)
78
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
ioxadm(8)
Fields containing a dash (–) indicate an unsupported setting. For example,
there may be no minimum temperature alarm threshold.
led_type
Used with the setled operand, specifies a software-controlled FRU LED.
The following table indicates which LED states can be controlled using the
setled operand with the off, on, fast, and slow LED state settings. Y
(yes) indicates that the LED can be controlled, N (no) indicates that it cannot
be controlled.
LED
ACTIVE
LOCATE
SERVICE
RDY2RM
OVERTEMP
DCOK
POWER
DATA
MGMT
Name
Power/OK
Locate
Fault/Locate
Ready to remove
Overtemp
DC Power
AC Power
Data
Management
off
Y
Y
Y
Y
*
N
N
N
N
on
Y
N
Y
Y
*
N
N
N
N
fast
Y
Y
Y
Y
*
N
N
N
N
slow
Y
N
Y
Y
*
N
N
N
N
* The OVERTEMP LED and chassis ACTIVE LED may be set to each state.
However, the hardware frequently updates the LED state so changes to the
LED state may not be visible.
Note – Other LEDs are not under software control. A list of LEDs present in
the system can be displayed by using the env -l operand.
list [target]
Lists the External I/O Expansion Units under system management.
If no target is specified, list displays a list of External I/O Expansion Units,
one per line. Each line contains the unique identifier for that box and the
host-specific name(s) for its downlink card(s). See EXAMPLE 3.
If an External I/O Expansion Unit argument or downlink card path is
specified, the command displays a single line with the indicated FRU. If a host
path is specified, only the downlink card information is displayed. See
EXAMPLE 4 and EXAMPLE 6.
If the verbose option is set [-v], the output includes detailed FRU
information. See EXAMPLE 5.
locator [on |off] [target]
System Administration
79
ioxadm(8)
Sets or queries the state of the locator indicator (LED).
Without options, locator reports the current state of the LED on the
specified FRU.
If no target is specified, locator returns the current state of all locator LEDs.
A target argument is required when using the option fields:
on
Turns the LED on.
off
Turns the LED off.
The chassis locator is a white LED. If a FRU is specified, the FRU yellow
service LED is used along with the chassis (locator) LED.
Only one FRU can have a location indicator enabled at a time in an External
I/O Expansion Unit chassis. Turning off the chassis (locator) LED will also
turn off the blinking (service) FRU LED.
poweroff target
Powers down the given FRU and lights appropriate LEDs to indicate the FRU
is ready to remove. Must be used with the -f option. Be aware that using -f
can crash the domain.
Do not remove both power supply units (PSUs) in the same External I/O
Expansion Unit. If both PSUs are powered down in this way, then the
External I/O Expansion Unit cannot be turned back on from the command
line. It must be powered on physically.
Note – When a power supply is powered off, the LEDs and fan may still run
since they receive power from both supplies.
poweron target
Restores full power to an I/O boat or reenables output from the power
supply (PS) that has previously been marked ready-to-remove. When a PSU
is newly installed and the power switch is in the on position, or a boat is
connected to a powered link card, they automatically power themselves on.
However, this command can be used to power a PSU or I/O boat back on that
previously had been powered down for removal as long as the power switch
is in the on position.
reset target
80
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
ioxadm(8)
Reinitializes FRU components used to monitor External I/O Expansion Unit
environmentals. If a boat or link card is specified, the bridge controllers in
the link cards are reset and re-initialized. If a box is specified, the fan
controller and demux in the box are reset and re-initialized along with all
bridge controllers associated with the External I/O Expansion Unit.
setled [on|off|slow|fast] target led_type
Sets LED state:
off
Off.
on
On.
fast
Fast blink.
slow
Slow blink.
Refer to the entry for led_type in this section for detailed information about
LED types.
target
System Administration
81
ioxadm(8)
Specifies the target device which can be a downlink card in a host slot, an
External I/O Expansion Unit, or a FRU in an External I/O Expansion Unit.
The downlink card is identified by the hostpath to the card.
hostpath is platform dependent and indicates the path to the slot on the
host system which contains the downlink card. On SPARC Enterprise
M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 servers, the hostpath has the following
format:
IOU#0-PCI#0 IO Board 0, PCI-E slot0
The External I/O Expansion Unit (box_id) is identified by serial number.
Use iox@nnnn, where nnnn represents the last four digits of the box serial
number.
Some commands affect only a single component of an External I/O
Expansion Unit system. For example, individual boats and power supplies
may be turned on and turned off independently.
A FRU in an External I/O Expansion Unit (fru) is identified as:
iox@nnnn/iob0 – I/O boat in the left tray (rear view)
iox@nnnn/iob1 – I/O boat in the right tray (rear view)
iox@nnnn/iob0/link – Uplink card in boat 0
iox@nnnn/iob1/link – Uplink card in boat 1
iox@nnnn/ps0 – Power supply in the left bay (front view)
iox@nnnn/ps1 – Power supply in the right bay (front view)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying Temperature, Voltage, Current, and Fanspeed Sensor Readings
XSCF> ioxadm env -te iox@A3B5
82
Location
Sensor
Value
Res
Units
IOX@A3B5/PS0
T_AMBIENT
28.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/PS0
T_CHIP
28.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/PS0
T_HOTSPOT
31.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/PS0
SWITCH
On
-
IOX@A3B5/PS0
V_12V_ANODE
11.703
0.059
V
IOX@A3B5/PS0
V_12V_CATHODE
11.703
0.059
V
IOX@A3B5/PS0
V_ISHARE
0.632
0.040
V
IOX@A3B5/PS0
I_DC
2.316
0.289
A
IOX@A3B5/PS0
S_FAN_ACTUAL
3708.791
40.313
SWITCH
RPM
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
ioxadm(8)
IOX@A3B5/PS0
S_FAN_SET
4500.000
300.000
IOX@A3B5/PS1
T_AMBIENT
28.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/PS1
T_CHIP
29.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/PS1
T_HOTSPOT
31.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/PS1
SWITCH
On
-
IOX@A3B5/PS1
V_12V_ANODE
11.762
0.059
V
IOX@A3B5/PS1
V_12V_CATHODE
11.762
0.059
V
IOX@A3B5/PS1
V_ISHARE
0.672
0.040
V
IOX@A3B5/PS1
I_DC
5.211
0.289
A
IOX@A3B5/PS1
S_FAN_ACTUAL
4115.854
49.588
RPM
IOX@A3B5/PS1
S_FAN_SET
4500.000
300.000
RPM
IOX@A3B5/IOB0
T_CHIP
32.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/IOB0
T_HOTSPOT
35.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
T_CHIP
33.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
T_HOTSPOT
36.000
1.000
C
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
V_12_0V
12.052
0.005
V
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
V_12V_MAIN
12.000
0.400
V
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
V_1_0V
1.030
0.001
V
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
V_1_5V
1.496
0.001
V
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
V_3_3V
3.291
0.002
V
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
V_3_3AUX
3.308
0.002
V
IOX@A3B5/IOB1
I_DC
8.600
0.200
A
IOX@A3B5/IOB1/LINK
T_SIGCON0
45.000
40.000
C
IOX@A3B5/IOB1/LINK
T_SIGCON1
45.000
40.000
C
IOU#1-PCI#1
T_SIGCON0
45.000
40.000
C
IOU#1-PCI#1
T_SIGCON1
45.000
40.000
C
EXAMPLE 2
RPM
SWITCH
Display All Sensor Readings on a Link and Suppressing Headers
XSCF> ioxadm -p env iou#1-pci#1
IOU#1-PCI#1
T_SIGCON0 45.000
40.000 C
IOU#1-PCI#1
T_SIGCON1 45.000
40.000 C
IOU#1-PCI#1
DATA
On
-
LED
IOU#1-PCI#1
MGMT
Flash
-
LED
System Administration
83
ioxadm(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Display All External I/O Expansion Units or Downlink Card Paths
XSCF> ioxadm list
IOX
Link 0
IOX@0033
IOU#1-PCI#4
IOX@12B4
-
-
IOU#2-PCI#1
Link 1
IOU#1-PCI#1
IOU#1-PCI#2
In EXAMPLE 3, the list command is used to display the connections between
External I/O Expansion Units and downlink cards in the host. IOX@0033 (which
includes boats, uplink cards, and power supplies) is connected to the host through
two downlink cards. The Link 0 column shows which host downlink card is
attached to boat0. The Link 1 column shows which host downlink card is
attached to boat1. IOX@12B4 is connected to the host through one downlink card.
This card is connected to boat1. A dash (–) shows that there is no host link
connection to the box. It may have a boat and uplink card installed in the bay, or
the bay could be empty. If the boat is installed, either it is not connected to the host,
or the host downlink card slot is powered off.
EXAMPLE 4
Displaying a Single External I/O Expansion Unit
XSCF> ioxadm list iox@12B4
IOX
Link 0
Link 1
IOX@12B4
-
IOU#1-PCI#2
EXAMPLE 5
Displaying a Single External I/O Expansion Unit Using Verbose Output
XSCF> ioxadm -v list IOU#1-PCI#1
Location
Type
FW Ver Serial Num Part Num
IOX@X07A
IOX
2.1
XCX07A
CF005016937/5016937-03 On
IOX@X07A/PS0
A195
-
DD0579
CF003001701/3001701-04 On
IOX@X07A/PS1
A195
-
DD0588
CF003001701/3001701-04 On
IOX@X07A/IOB0
PCIE
-
XE00E5
CF005016939/5016939-05 On
IOX@X07A/IOB0/LINK CU
2.0
XF01HJ
CF005017040/5017040-04 On
IOU#0-PCI#3
2.0
XF01AD
CF005017040/5017040-03 On
EXAMPLE 6
84
CU
State
Displaying a Downlink Card Using Hostpath in Verbose Mode With Headers
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
ioxadm(8)
Suppressed
XSCF> ioxadm -p -v list IOU#0-PCI#2
IOU#0-PCI#2
EXAMPLE 7
OP
2.0
XF01A1
CF005017040/5017040-03
on
Powering On the Locator LED for Power Supply 0 in External I/O Expansion
Unit 12B4
XSCF> ioxadm locator on iox@12B4/ps0
EXAMPLE 8
Displaying Locator LED Status for the External I/O Expansion Unit
XSCF> ioxadm locator iox@12B4
Location
Sensor
Value
Resolution
Units
IOX@12B4
LOCATE
Fast
-
LED
IOX@12B4/PS0
SERVICE
Fast
-
LED
If the FRU service indicator is already on due to a detected fault condition, only the
box locator LED will be set to fast.
EXAMPLE 9
Enabling the Indicator for Power Supply 1 When Power Supply 1 Has a Fault
Indication
XSCF> ioxadm locator on iox@x031/ps1
XSCF> ioxadm locator
Location
Sensor
IOX@X031
LOCATE
Value Resolution Units
Fast
- LED
XSCF> ioxadm env -1 iox@x031/ps1 SERVICE
Location
Sensor
IOX@X031/PS1
SERVICE
Value Resolution Units
On
- LED
The External I/O Expansion Unit chassis white LED has an integrated push button.
The button can be used to toggle the state of the chassis white locator LED between
off and fast. If the push button is used to turn off the locator LED, fast blink FRU
service LEDs are cleared.
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
85
ioxadm(8)
86
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
man(1)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
man - display manual pages of specified XSCF shell command
man command_name ...
man -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
man(1) displays manual pages of specified XSCF shell command.
No privileges are required to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported;
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-h
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
command_name
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
■
If the relevant manual page is too long, the page is divided into pages that each
can fit on one screen. In such cases, the following key operations are available:
Key
Description
Enter
Displays the next line.
space
Displays the next page.
b
Goes back half a page.
q
Quits display of the page in the manual.
■
EXAMPLES
Specifies the command name whose manual page is displayed.
Multiple command_name can be specified by delimited the spaces.
If intro is specified for command_name, a list of XSCF shell commands is
displayed.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the manual page of the addboard(8) command.
XSCF> man addboard
EXAMPLE 2
Displays a list of XSCF shell commands.
XSCF> man intro
System Administration
87
man(1)
EXIT STATUS
88
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
moveboard(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
moveboard - move an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the current domain to
another
moveboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] [-c configure] -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...]
moveboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c assign -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...]
moveboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c reserve -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...]
moveboard -h
DESCRIPTION
The moveboard(8) command disconnects a XSB from the current domain and,
based on the domain component list (DCL), assigns it to, or configures it in, the
specified domain.
One of the following movement methods can be specified:
Privileges
configure
Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and
configures it into the specified destination domain configuration.
The incorporated XSB can be accessed from the operating system.
assign
Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and
assigns it to the specified destination domain configuration. The
assigned XSB is reserved for the specified domain and cannot be
configured in or assigned to other domains. The assigned system
board is configured in the domain by reboot the domain or
execution of the addboard(8) command with -c configure.
reserve
Reserves disconnection of the specified XSB from the domain
configuration of the move source, and reserves assignment of the
XSB to the domain configuration of the move destination. The
XSB is assigned to the domain configuration of the move
destination when the domain power of the move source is turned
off or rebooted. The XSB is subsequently incorporated when the
domain power of the move destination is turned on or rebooted.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm
Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Note – You must have the domainadm privileges for both of
source domain and destination domain to run moveboard(8)
command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
89
moveboard(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c assign
Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and
assigns it to the domain configuration of the move destination. If
the -c option is omitted, '-c configure' is used.
-c configure
Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and
configures it in the domain configuration of the move
destination. If the -c option is omitted, '-c configure' is used.
-c reserve
Reserves disconnection of an XSB from its current domain
configuration, and reserves assignment of the XSB to the domain
configuration of the move destination. If the -c option is
omitted, '-c configure' is used.
-d domain_id
Specifies the ID of the destination domain in which an XSB is to
be moved. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system
configuration.
-f
Forcibly detaches the specified XSB.
Note – If the -f option is used to forcibly remove the XSB from
the source domain, a serious problem may occur in a process
bound to CPU or process accessing a device. For this reason, use
of the -f option is not recommended in normal operation. If the
-f option must be specified, verify the statuses of the source
domain and job processes.
90
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-v
Specifies verbose output. If this option is specified with the -q
option, the -v option is ignored.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
moveboard(8)
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
xsb
Specifies the XSB number to be moved. Multiple xsb operands are
permitted, separated by spaces. The following xsb form is
accepted:
x–y
where:
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
An integer from 00–15.
y
An integer from 0–3.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
If '-c configure' is specified when either of the following conditions apply to
the domains, the XSB is configured in the domain configuration:
■
■
The operating systems of both the source and destination domains are
running.
■
The operating system of the destination domain is running even though the
source domain is powered off.
If '-c assign' is specified when either of the following conditions apply to the
domains, the XSB is assigned to the domain configuration:
■
The operating system of the source domain is running.
■
The source domain is powered off
■
If '-c reserve' is specified when either the domain power of the move source
has been turned off or the operating system is not running, the XSB is
immediately disconnected from the domain of the move source and assigned to
the domain of the move destination
■
Moving the XSB involves the following internal operations and therefore
command execution may take time.
■
EXAMPLES
x
■
Disconnecting the hardware resource of the system board from the operating
system
■
Running a hardware diagnosis on the system board when connecting it
See the setdcl(8) and showdcl(8) commands for DCL.
EXAMPLE 1
Disconnects XSB#00-0 from the current domain and attaches it to domain ID
1.
XSCF> moveboard -d 1 00-0
System Administration
91
moveboard(8)
EXAMPLE 2
Reserves assignment of the XSB#00-0 to the domain ID 1.
XSCF> moveboard -d 1 -c reserve 00-0
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
92
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), deleteboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8),
showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
nslookup(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
nslookup - refer to the DNS server for the host
nslookup hostname
nslookup -h
DESCRIPTION
nslookup(8) refers to the DNS server for the host.
The following information is displayed:
Privileges
Server
DNS server name
Address
IP address of DNS server
Name
Specified host name
Address
IP address of the host name
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
-h
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
hostname
EXAMPLES
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
EXAMPLE 1
Specifies the host name to be referred. A Fully Qualified Domain
Name (FQDN) or a short form of the name can be specified.
Displays the host whose host name is scf0-hostname0.
XSCF> nslookup scf0-hostname0
Server:
server.example.com
Address: xx.xx.xx.xx
Name:
scf0-hostname0.example.com
Address: xx.xx.xx.xx
System Administration
93
nslookup(8)
EXIT STATUS
94
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
password(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
password - manage user passwords and expiration settings
password [-e days| date|Never] [-i inactive] [-M maxdays] [-n mindays] [-w
warn] [ user]
password -h
DESCRIPTION
password (8) changes a user’s password and password expiration settings.
The password is specified in up to 32 characters. The following characters are valid:
1. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
2. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
3. 0123456789
4. !@#$%^&*[]{}()-+=‘~,></'’?;:[SPACE]
When invoked with one or more options, password will make changes to the
expiration settings of the account. See setpasswordpolicy(8) for a description of
default values.
When invoked without options, password prompts you to change the account
password.
When invoked without a user operand, password operates on the current user
account.
Caution – When you change the password for another user by using the user
operand, the system password policy is not enforced. The user operand is intended
only for creating a new user’s initial password or replacing a lost or forgotten
password for a user account. When changing another user’s password, be sure to
choose a password that conforms with the system password policy. You can display
the current password policy settings with the showpasswordpolicy(8) command.
Whether the user name is specified or not, the account must be local. password
returns an error if it is not local.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
None required
useradm
No privileges are required:
■
To change the password for the current user account
■
To use the -h option
Can run this command with or without any options or operand.
Can change the password for any account.
System Administration
95
password(8)
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported
-e days|date|Never
Sets the number of days, starting from today, during which
the XSCF account is enabled. Otherwise, it sets the date when
the account expires.
The date format can be yyyy-mm-dd.
Never (or its equivalent in the language of the system locale)
means an account will never expire. It is case insensitive.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-i inactive
Sets the number of days after a password expires until the
account is locked. This value is assigned to new user
accounts when they are created. The initial value is –1. A
value of –1 means that the account will not be locked after
the password expires. Valid values are integers with value of
–1 or greater.
-M maxdays
Sets the maximum number of days that a password is valid.
This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are
created. The initial value is 999999.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-n mindays
Sets the minimum number of days between password
changes. An initial value of zero for this field indicates that
you can change the password at any time.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are
created.
-w warn
Sets the default number of days before password expiration
at which to start warning the user. This value is assigned to
new user accounts when they are created. The initial value is
7.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
user
96
Specifies a valid user name.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
password(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Enabling Password Until February 2, 2008
XSCF> password -e 2008-02-02
EXAMPLE 2
Set Password Lock 10 Days After Password Expiration
XSCF> password -i 10
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setpasswordpolicy(8), showpasswordpolicy(8)
System Administration
97
password(8)
98
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
poweroff(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
poweroff - turn off the power to the specified domain
poweroff [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-M] -d domain_id
poweroff [ [-q] -{y|n}] -a [-M]
poweroff -h
DESCRIPTION
The poweroff(8) command turns off the power to the specified domain.
The command can turn off the power to the specified domain or to all domains.
After ordinary shutdown processing for the operating system is executed, the
power is turned off.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The following options are supported:
-a
Turns off the power to all domains. Only users who have the
platadm and fieldeng privileges can specify this option.
-d domain_id
Specifies the ID of the domain to be turned off. domain_id can be
0–23 depending on the system configuration.
-f
Uses XSCF to forcibly turn off the power to the specified domain.
This option is used together with the -d option.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
System Administration
99
poweroff(8)
■
If the operating system of the target domain is running, the poweroff(8)
command processing is equivalent to that of the shutdown(1M) command with
the "-i5" option specified.
■
A domain cannot be powered off while the operating system of the domain is
booting. Execute the poweroff(8) command again after the booting is
completed.
■
A domain cannot be powered off by the poweroff(8) command while the
operating system of the domain is running in single-user mode. Execute the
shutdown(1M) command in the domain.
■
When the poweroff(8) command is executed, power-off results for each of the
specified domains are displayed in the following format:
Powered off
The power was turned off normally.
Not Powering
off
An error occurred, and the power could not be turned off. An
error message is displayed with ‘Not Powering off.’
■
EXAMPLES
The showdomainstatus(8) command can be used to check whether the system
power is off.
EXAMPLE 1
Turns off power to all domains.
XSCF> poweroff -a
DomainIDs to power off:00,01,02,03
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Powering off
01:Powering off
02:Powering off
03:Powering off
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-off.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 2
Turns off power to domains with domain IDs 0.
XSCF> poweroff -d 0
DomainIDs to power off:00
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Powering off
100
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
poweroff(8)
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-off.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 3
Turns off power to domains with domain IDs 1. An error occurs because the
user has no control privilege.
XSCF> poweroff -d 1
DomainIDs to power off:01
Continue? [y|n]:y
01:Not powering off:Permission denied.
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-off.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 4
Forcibly turns off power to domains with domain IDs 0.
XSCF> poweroff -f -d 0
DomainIDs to power off:00
The -f option will cause domains to be immediately resets.
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Powering off
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-off.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 5
Turns off power to domains with domain IDs 2. Automatically replies with
'y' to the prompt.
XSCF> poweroff -y -d 2
DomainIDs to power off:02
Continue? [y|n]:y
02:Powering off
System Administration
101
poweroff(8)
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-off.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 6
Turns off power to domains with domain IDs 2. Automatically replies with
'y' without displaying the prompt.
XSCF> poweroff -q -y -d 2
EXAMPLE 7
Cancels the poweroff(8) command execution that is in progress.
XSCF>poweroff -d 0
DomainIDs to power off:00
Continue? [y|n]:n
EXAMPLE 8
Cancels the poweroff(8) command execution that is in progress. Automatically replies with 'n' to the prompt.
XSCF>poweroff -n -d 3
DomainIDs to power off:03
Continue? [y|n]:n
EXAMPLE 9
Cancels the poweroff(8) command execution that is in progress. Automatically replies with 'n' without displaying the prompt.
XSCF>poweroff -q -n -d 3
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
102
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
poweron(8), reset(8), showdomainstatus(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
poweron(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
poweron - turn on the power to the specified domain
poweron [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-M] -d domain_id
poweron [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-M] -a
poweron -h
DESCRIPTION
The poweron(8) command turns on the power to the specified domain.
The command can turn on the power to the specified domain or to all domains.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The following options are supported:
-a
Turns on the power to every domain that has been completely set
up. Only users who have the platadm or fieldeng privileges
can specify this option. The "domain that has been completely set
up" means a domain that has been completely set up with the
setdcl(8) and addboard(8) commands.
-d domain_id
Specifies the ID of the domain to be turned on. domain_id can be
0–23 depending on the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
System Administration
103
poweron(8)
■
When the poweron(8) command is executed, power-on results for each of the
specified domains are displayed in the following format:
Powering on
The power was turned on normally.
Not Powering on An error occurred, and the power could not be turned on. An
error message is displayed with Not Powering on.
■
EXAMPLES
The showdomainstatus(8) command can be used to check whether the system
power is on.
EXAMPLE 1
Turns on power to all domains.
XSCF> poweron -a
DomainIDs to power on:00,01,02,03
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Powering on
01:Powering on
02:Powering on
03:Powering on
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-on.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 2
Turns on power to domains with domain IDs 0.
XSCF> poweron -d 0
DomainIDs to power on:00
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Powering on
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-on.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 3
104
Turns on power to domains with domain IDs 0. Automatically replies with 'y'
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
poweron(8)
to the prompt.
XSCF> poweron -y -d 0
DomainIDs to power on:00
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Powering on
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to power-on.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
XSCF>
EXAMPLE 4
Turns on power to domains with domain IDs 1. Automatically replies with 'y'
without displaying the prompt.
XSCF> poweron -q -y -d 1
EXAMPLE 5
Cancels the poweron(8) command execution that is in progress.
XSCF> poweron -d 1
DomainIDs to power on:01
Continue? [y|n]:n
EXAMPLE 6
Cancels the poweron(8) command execution that is in progress. Automatically replies with 'n' to the prompt.
XSCF> poweron -n -d 1
DomainIDs to power on:01
Continue? [y|n]:n
EXAMPLE 7
Cancels the poweron(8) command execution that is in progress. Automatically replies with 'n' without displaying the prompt.
XSCF> poweron -q -n -d 1
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
105
poweron(8)
SEE ALSO
106
poweroff(8), reset(8), showdomainstatus(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
prtfru(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
prtfru - display FRUID data on the system and External I/O Expansion Unit
prtfru [-c] [-l] [-M] [-x] [ container]
prtfru -h
DESCRIPTION
prtfru is used to obtain FRUID (Field-Replaceable Unit Identifier) data from the
system. Its output is a tree structure, echoing the path in the FRU tree to each
container. When a container is found, the data from that container is printed in a
tree structure as well.
prtfru without any arguments prints the FRU hierarchy and all of the FRUID
container data. prtfru prints to the screen. Output can be redirected to a file.
Note – FRU information from the domains is not available using this command.
Privileges
You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c
Prints only the containers and their data. This option does not print
the FRU tree hierarchy.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-l
Prints only the FRU tree hierarchy. This option does not print the
container data.
-x
Prints in XML format with a system identifier (SYSTEM) of
prtfrureg.dtd.
The following operands are supported:
container
The name of the particular hardware that holds data, in the FRU
hierarchy. Either the name or path/name of a container is
displayed in the -l option. The container operand must be in
upper case and is applicable to the External I/O Expansion Unit
FRUs.
System Administration
107
prtfru(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying FRU Tree Hierarchy
XSCF> prtfru -l
...
/frutree
/frutree/chassis (fru)
/frutree/chassis/SYS?Label=SYS
/frutree/chassis/SYS?Label=SYS/led-location (fru)
/frutree/chassis/SYS?Label=SYS/key-location (fru)
/frutree/chassis/SC?Label=SC
/frutree/chassis/SC?Label=SC/system-controller (container)
/frutree/chassis/MB?Label=MB
/frutree/chassis/MB?Label=MB/system-board (container)
/frutree/chassis/MB?Label=MB/system-board/BAT?Label=BAT
/frutree/chassis/MB?Label=MB/system-board/BAT?Label=BAT/battery (fru)
/frutree/chassis/FT0?Label=FT0
/frutree/chassis/FT0?Label=FT0/F0?Label=F0
/frutree/chassis/FT0?Label=FT0/F0?Label=F0/fan (fru)
/frutree/chassis/HDD0?Label=HDD0
/frutree/chassis/HDD0?Label=HDD0/disk (fru)
/frutree/chassis/DVD?Label=DVD
/frutree/chassis/SCC?Label=SCC
/frutree/chassis/SCC?Label=SCC/scc (fru)
/frutree/chassis/PCI0?Label=PCI0
/frutree/chassis/PCI1?Label=PCI1
/frutree/chassis/SCSIBP?Label=SCSIBP
/frutree/chassis/SCSIBP?Label=SCSIBP/system-board (container)
/frutree/chassis/PS0?Label=PS0
/frutree/chassis/PS0?Label=PS0/power-supply (container)
/frutree/chassis/C0?Label=C0
/frutree/chassis/C0?Label=C0/system-board/P0?Label=P0/cpu/B1?Label=B1/
bank/D0?Label=D0/mem-module (container)
108
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
prtfru(8)
EXAMPLE 2
Displaying System-Board FRU ID Data
XSCF> prtfru -c system-board
/frutree/chassis/MB?Label=MB/system-board (container)
SEGMENT: SD
/ManR
/ManR/UNIX_Timestamp32: Thu Oct
9 17:45:34 PDT 2003
/ManR/Fru_Description: ASSY,A42,MOTHERBOARD
/ManR/Manufacture_Loc: Toronto, Ontario, Canada
/ManR/Sun_Part_No: 5016344
/ManR/Sun_Serial_No: 008778
/ManR/Vendor_Name: Celestica
/ManR/Initial_HW_Dash_Level: 08
/ManR/Initial_HW_Rev_Level: 50
/ManR/Fru_Shortname: A42_MB
/SpecPartNo: 885-0060-10
EXAMPLE 3
Displaying System-Board FRU ID Data
XSCF> prtfru -l system-board
/frutree/chassis/MB?Label=MB/system-board (container)
EXAMPLE 4
Displaying Power Supply FRU ID Data
XSCF> prtfru -l power-supply
/frutree/chassis/PS0?Label=PS0/power-supply (container)
EXAMPLE 5
Displaying Memory Module FRU ID Data
XSCF> prtfru -l mem-module
/frutree/chassis/C0?Label=C0/system-board/P0?Label=P0/cpu/B0?Label=B0/
bank/D0?Label=D0/mem-module (container)
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
109
prtfru(8)
SEE ALSO
110
ioxadm(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
rebootxscf(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
rebootxscf - reset the XSCF
rebootxscf [ [-q] -{y|n}]
rebootxscf -h
DESCRIPTION
The rebootxscf(8) command resets the XSCF.
In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, both of the active XSCF and the
standby XSCF will be reset.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privilege to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
When you cancel the XSCF reset using the setdate(8) which commands reset
XSCF automatically, even if you perform this command, the information that is set
is not applied in XSCF.
EXAMPLE 1
Resets the XSCF.
XSCF> rebootxscf
The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n]:y
EXAMPLE 2
Resets the XSCF. Automatically replies with 'y' to the prompt.
XSCF> rebootxscf -y
The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n]:y
EXAMPLE 3
Resets the XSCF. Automatically replies with 'y' without displaying the
prompt.
XSCF> rebootxscf -q -y
System Administration
111
rebootxscf(8)
EXAMPLE 4
Cancels the rebootxscf(8) command execution that is in progress.
XSCF> rebootxscf
The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n]:n
XSCF>
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
112
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
applynetwork(8), setdate(8), sethttps(8), setssh(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
replacefru(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
replacefru - replace a field replaceable unit (FRU)
replacefru
replacefru -h
DESCRIPTION
The replacefru(8) command replaces a FRU. The command allows the user to
select, confirm, and replace the FRU interactively using menus.
The following FRUs can be replaced using the replacefru(8) command.
Privileges
■
CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU)
■
I/O unit (IOU)
■
FAN unit (FANU)
■
Power supply unit (PSU)
■
XSCF unit (XSCFU)
You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported.
-h
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
Displays usage statement.
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), addfru(8), deleteboard(8), deletefru(8), setupfru(8),
showdcl(8), showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8), showhardconf(8), testsb(8),
unlockmaintenance(8)
System Administration
113
replacefru(8)
114
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
reset(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
reset - reset the specified domain
reset [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id level
reset -h
DESCRIPTION
Note – Since the reset(8) command forcibly resets the system, this command may
cause a failure in a hard disk drive or other components. Use this command only
for the purpose of recovery, such as if the operating system hangs, and for other
limited purposes.
The reset(8) command resets the specified domain.
The following three levels of resetting can be specified:
Privileges
por
Resets the domain system.
panic
Instructs the domain operating system to generate a panic. The
command is ignored if it is issued during power-off or shutdown.
xir
Resets the domain CPU.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Specifies only one ID of the domain to be reset. domain_id can be
0–23 depending on the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
System Administration
115
reset(8)
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
level
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Specifies the level of resetting. One of the following can be
specified. This operand cannot be omitted.
por
Resets the domain system.
request
Instructs the domain operating system to
generate a panic.
xir
Resets the domain CPU.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
The showdomainstatus(8) command can be used to check whether the domain
has been reset.
■
If the reset(8) command is executed under either of the following conditions,
processing is stopped before the operating system is started:
■
The Mode switch on the operator panel is set to Service mode
■
The Auto boot function has been disabled by the setdomainmode (8) command
EXAMPLE 1
Causes a panic in domain ID 0.
XSCF> reset -d 0 panic
DomainID to panic:00
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Panicked
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to reset.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 2
Resets the CPU in domain ID 0. Automatically answers 'y' to all prompts.
XSCF> reset -y -d 0 xir
DomainID to reset:00
Continue? [y|n]:y
00:Reset
116
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
reset(8)
*Note*
This command only issues the instruction to reset.
The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".
EXAMPLE 3
Resets domain ID 0. Suppresses prompts, and automatically answers 'y' to all
prompts.
XSCF> reset -q -y -d 0 por
EXAMPLE 4
Cancels the reset command execution that is in progress.
XSCF> reset -d 0 panic
DomainID to panic:00
Continue? [y|n]:n
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
poweroff(8), poweron(8), setdomainmode(8), showdomainstatus(8)
System Administration
117
reset(8)
118
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
resetdateoffset(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
resetdateoffset - reset the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain
resetdateoffset
resetdateoffset -h
DESCRIPTION
The resetdateoffset(8) command resets the time subtraction between XSCF and
the domain, which stored in XSCF.
Usually, the time of the domain is synchronized with the time of XSCF. When the
time of the domain changed by using a command such as the date(1M) which
prepared in the operating system of domain, the time subtraction between the time
of XSCF and the changed time of domain will be stored in XSCF. The stored time
subtraction remains after the domain reboot or after the XSCF reset by using a
command such as the rebootxscf(8), with the result that the time subtraction
between XSCF and the domain remains stored.
The resetdateoffset(8) command resets the every time subtraction between
XSCF and each domain, which stored in XSCF. As a result, the time of domain after
startup will be set to the same time as XSCF.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Displays usage statement.
The resetdateoffset(8) command needs to be executed in the system power-off
status.
EXAMPLE 1
Resets the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain.
XSCF> resetdateoffset
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
119
resetdateoffset(8)
120
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
sendbreak(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
sendbreak - send a break signal to the specified domain
sendbreak -d domain_id
sendbreak [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id
sendbreak -h
DESCRIPTION
The sendbreak(8) command sends a break signal to the specified domain.
When a break signal is sent from the domain console to the domain operating
system, control is transferred from the operating system to OpenBoot PROM and
the OpenBoot PROM prompt "ok>" is displayed.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm
Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Specifies only one ID of the domain to which to send the break
signal. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system
configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
console(8), showconsolepath(8)
System Administration
121
sendbreak(8)
122
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setaltitude(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setaltitude - set the altitude of the system or whether or not the air filter installed
setaltitude -s key=value
setaltitude -h
DESCRIPTION
The setaltitude(8) command sets the altitude of the system or whether or not
the air filter installed.
Whether or not the air filter installed can be specified on the midrange servers only.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-s key=value
The item to be set is specified by key. The following value can be
specified:
altitude
Sets the altitude of the system.
filter
Sets whether or not to install the air filter.
You can specify this on the midrange server
only.
When you specified altitude as key, specify the altitude of the
system in value in units of meters (m). An integer equal to or
greater than 0 can be specified, and the specified value is
rounded up to the nearest hundred meters. The default value is 0
meters.
When you specified filter as key, either of the following can be
specified for value:
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
installed
Air filter is installed.
uninstalled
Air filter is not installed.
■
If the altitude of the system is set, any abnormality in the intake air temperature
can be detected quickly. If the altitude of the system is unknown, set a high
value. However, even if no altitude is set for the system, any abnormality in
temperatures such as the CPU temperature can still be detected, so the system
would not be damaged by a fatal error.
■
To apply the specified configuration, execute the rebootxscf(8) command and
reset XSCF.
System Administration
123
setaltitude(8)
EXAMPLES
■
The command does not accept negative numbers. If the system is below sea-level
use altitude=0.
■
When you specified either of the altitude of the system or whether or not the air
filter installed, the current settings are listed. The setting of the air filter is
displayed only when it is set to installed.
■
When the showaltitude(8) command is executed, the current settings are
displayed.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets the altitude of the system to 1000 m.
XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=1000
1000m
EXAMPLE 2
Sets the altitude of the system to 200 m. The specified value is rounded up to
the nearest hundred meters.
XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=157
200m
EXAMPLE 3
Sets the altitude of the system to 1000 m, on a midrange server in case of the
air filter is installed.
XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=1000
1000m
Filter is installed.
EXAMPLE 4
Sets the air filter not installed, on a midrange server.
XSCF> setaltitude -s filter=uninstalled
1000m
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
124
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showaltitude(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setarchiving(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setarchiving - configure the log archiving functionality
setarchiving [-k host-key] [-l audit-limit,non-audit-limit] [-p password|-r] [-t
user@host:directory] [-v] [-y|-n]
setarchiving enable|disable
setarchiving -h
DESCRIPTION
setarchiving(8) manages the log archiving configuration. Persistent storage
space on the Service Processor is limited. Some logs may grow to the point where
old log entries must be overwritten or deleted. Log archiving allows the user to set
up the Service Processor to automatically archive its log data on a remote host.
Note – You must set up the archive host correctly prior to enabling the log
archiving feature. (See EXAMPLE 1.) If you attempt to enable archiving while the
configuration is invalid (for example, if the specified archive host does not exist),
setarchiving exits with an error message. setarchiving exits with an error
message if you request invalid configuration changes while archiving is enabled.
Note – setarchiving(8) requires at least one option or operand.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
125
setarchiving(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
-k host-key
Sets the public key that XSCF uses to verify the
identity of the host. Possible values for the host-key are
shown here:
none
This literal value specifies that a public key should not
be used to authenticate the archive host. If an archive
host public key was previously configured, it is deleted.
download
This literal value specifies that setarchiving
should download the public host key from the archive
host using the SSH protocol. If the -t option is used,
setarchiving downloads the key from the host
specified in the argument to -t. Otherwise,
setarchiving downloads the key from the current
archive host. Next, setarchiving displays the key’s
md5 fingerprint and prompts you for confirmation of
the identity of the host to continue. If you accept the
key, it is saved and used for server authentication. If
you reject the key, setarchiving exists without
changing the configuration.
public-key
The specified public key is stored and used for server
authentication. The host-key argument should be the
complete public-key for the archive host, beginning
with the key type.
Note – The public-key should be enclosed in quotes to
ensure that the shell treats it as a single word.
126
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setarchiving(8)
-l audit-limit,non-audit-limit Sets the space limits for log archives in megabytes.
The option argument must consist of two values
separated by a comma.
The audit-limit value specifies the archive space limit
for audit logs. It must be either 0 (zero), unlimited
or an integer in the range of 500–50000. If you do not
use the -l option to modify the value of audit-limit,
the initial archive space limit for audit logs is
unlimited.
The non-audit-limit value specifies the archive space
limit for all other logs, in megabytes. It must be an
integer in the range of 500–50000. If unset, the initial
value for non-audit-limit depends on the type of server.
Use the showarchiving(8) command to determine
the value for your server.
If either of the specified values is invalid, the
command displays an error and exits without making
any changes.
-n
Automatically answers no to all prompts. Prompts are
displayed.
-p password
Sets the password used for ssh login. This option is
provided to facilitate scripting. To change the
password interactively, use the -r option.
-r
Reads the password used for ssh login. The
setarchiving command displays a prompt and
reads the new password without echoing it to the
screen.
-t user@host:directory
Sets the archive target. The host field specifies the host
name or IP address of the archive host. The user field
specifies the user name for the ssh login to the
archive host. The directory field specifies the archive
directory on the archive host where the archives
should be stored. The directory field must not begin
with a tilde (~).
-v
Specifies verbose output. When this option is used in
conjunction with -k download, setarchiving
displays the downloaded public key in addition to its
md5 fingerprint.
-y
Automatically answers yes to all prompts. Prompts
are displayed.
System Administration
127
setarchiving(8)
OPERANDS
EXAMPLES
The following operands are supported:
enable
Activates the log archiving feature. Cannot be used with any
options.
disable
De-activates the log archiving feature. Cannot be used with any
options.
EXAMPLE 1
Setting the Archiving Target and Password
XSCF> setarchiving -t [email protected]:/home/jsmith/
logs -r
Enter ssh password for [email protected]:[]
EXAMPLE 2
Setting the Public Host Key
XSCF> setarchiving -k download
Downloading public host key from somehost.company.com....
Fingerprint: c3:75:f9:97:7d:dc:le:le:62:06:c1:6f:87:bc:e8:0d
Accept this public key (yes|no): yes
EXAMPLE 3
Setting the Space Limits for Archives
XSCF> setarchiving -l 10000,10000
EXAMPLE 4
Enabling Archiving
XSCF> setarchiving enable
Testing the archiving configuration...
Logs will be archived to somehost.company.com.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
128
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion. Configuration updated.
>0
An error occurred.
showarchiving(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setaudit(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setaudit - manage the system auditing functionality
setaudit enable|disable|archive|delete
setaudit [-p count|suspend] [ -m mailaddr] [-a users=enable|disable|default]
[-c classes= {enable|disable }]... [-e events=enable|disable ]... [-g
{enable|disable }] [-t percents]
setaudit -h
DESCRIPTION
setaudit(8) manages the collection of data on the use of system resources. Audit
data provides a record of security-related system events. This data can be used to
assign responsibility for actions that have taken place on the system. Auditing
generates records when specified events occur. Events that generate audit records
include:
– System startup and shutdown
– Login and logout
– Authentication actions
– Administrative actions
Privileges
You must have auditadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-a users=enable|disable|default
Sets the audit record generation policy for the specified users. users is a
comma-separated list of valid user names.
When set to enable or disable, audit record generation for the users is
turned on or off respectively. This setting overrides the global policy for the
specified user.
When set to default, the policy for the users is set to follow the global
policy. Use showaudit -g to display the global user audit record generation
policy.
-c classes = enable|disable
System Administration
129
setaudit(8)
Changes the audit record generation policy for the specified audit classes.
classes is a comma-separated list of audit classes. A class may be specified by
its numeric value or its name. The ACS_ prefix may be omitted. For example,
the class of audit-related events can be expressed as ACS_AUDIT, AUDIT or
16.
The following are valid classes:
all
Denotes all classes.
ACS_SYSTEM(1)
System-related events
ACS_WRITE(2)
Commands that can modify a state
ACS_READ(4)
Commands that read a current state
ACS_LOGIN(8)
Login-related events
ACS_AUDIT(16)
Audit-related events
ACS_DOMAIN(32)
Domain management–related events
ACS_USER(64)
User management–related events
ACS_PLATFORM(128)
Platform management–related events
ACS_MODES(256)
Mode-related events
This option may be specified multiple times. Multiple specification are
processed together with an -e options in the order listed. See EXAMPLE 1.
When set to enable or disable, audit record generation for the classes is
turned on or off respectively. This setting overrides the global policy. When
set to default, the policy for the users is set to follow the global policy. Use
showaudit -g to display the global user audit record generation policy.
-e events = enable|disable
130
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setaudit(8)
Changes the audit record generation policy for the specified audit classes.
classes is a comma-separated list of audit classes. A class may be specified by
its numeric value or its name. The ACS_ prefix may be omitted. For example,
the class of audit-related events can be expressed as ACS_AUDIT, AUDIT or
16.
The following are valid classes:
all
Denotes all classes.
ACS_SYSTEM(1)
System-related events
ACS_WRITE(2)
Commands that can modify a state
ACS_READ(4)
Commands that read a current state
ACS_LOGIN(8)
Login-related events
ACS_AUDIT(16)
Audit-related events
ACS_DOMAIN(32)
Domain management–related events
ACS_USER(64)
User management–related events
ACS_PLATFORM(128)
Platform management–related events
ACS_MODES(256)
Mode-related events
This option may be specified multiple times. Multiple specification are
processed together with an -e options in the order listed. See EXAMPLE 1.
When set to enable or disable, audit record generation for the classes is
turned on or off respectively. This setting overrides the global policy. When
set to default, the policy for the users is set to follow the global policy. Use
showaudit -g to display the global user audit record generation policy.
-e events = enable|disable
System Administration
131
setaudit(8)
Changes the audit record generation policy for the specified audit events.
events is a comma-separated list of audit events. An event may be specified by
its numeric value or its name. The AEV_ prefix may be omitted. For example,
the event for SSH login can be expressed as AEV_LOGIN_SSH, LOGIN_SSH or
0.
See showaudit -e all for a list of valid events.
This option may be specified multiple times. Multiple specification are
processed together with an -c options in the order listed. See EXAMPLE 3.
When set to enable or disable, audit record generation for the events is
turned on or off respectively. This setting overrides the global policy. When
set to default, the policy for the users is set to follow the global policy. Use
showaudit -g to display the global user audit record generation policy.
-g enable|disable
Sets the global user audit record generation policy.
When set to disable, no audit record which can be attributed to any user
account is generated. These settings can be overridden on an individual user
basis using the -a option.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-m mailaddr
Sets the mail address to which email is sent when the local audit storage space
usage reaches a threshold (see option -t). Email addresses must be a valid
email address of the form [email protected]. Specifying none for mailaddr
turns off email notification.
-p suspend|count
Sets the policy to follow when the audit trail becomes full. The following are
valid values:
132
suspend
All processes which try to write to audit records will be
suspended until either space becomes available and
records can be written, or the policy is changed to count.
count
New audit records are dropped and a count is kept of
how many records are dropped.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setaudit(8)
-t percents
Sets thresholds at which to issue a warning about local audit storage usage.
percents is a comma-separated list of percentages of available space used. At
most two values may be set. For example, a value of 50, 75 would cause
warnings to be issued when 50% and 75%, respectively, of the available
storage for audit records is consumed. The default value is 80%.
Warnings are issued as a message to the console and optionally to an
administrator using email. See -m mailaddr.
OPERANDS
EXAMPLES
The following operands are supported:
archive
Notifies the log archiving facility to archive the current audit trail.
delete
Delete the portion of the local audit trail in the secondary
partition. This can be used to free space for new audit records if
the local audit trail becomes full. For more information on the
secondary partition, refer to the administration guide for your
server.
disable
Turns off the writing of audit records to the audit trail and
notifies the log archiving facility to archive the current audit trail.
enable
Turns on the writing of audit records to the audit trail.
EXAMPLE 1
Changing Classes Using Names
XSCF> setaudit -c LOGIN,AUDIT=disable -c ACS_READ=enable
Auditing for LOGIN and AUDIT classes has been disabled. Auditing for READ class
is enabled.
EXAMPLE 2
Changing Classes Using Numbers
XSCF> setaudit -c 8,16=disable -c 1=enable
Auditing for classes 8 (LOGIN) and 16 (AUDIT) has been disabled. Auditing for class
1 (SYSTEM) is enabled.
EXAMPLE 3
Changing Classes and Enabling an Event
XSCF> setaudit -c 1=enable -e 64=disable
Auditing is enabled for all of Class 1 (SYSTEM) except for event 64 (USER) is
disabled.
System Administration
133
setaudit(8)
EXAMPLE 4
Enabling Auditing
XSCF> setaudit enable
Turns on writing of the audit records for the audit trail.
EXAMPLE 5
Enabling Warnings
XSCF> setaudit -t 50,75
Warnings will be sent at 50% capacity and 75% capacity.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
134
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showaudit(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setautologout(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setautologout - set the session timeout time of the XSCF shell
setautologout -s timeout
setautologout -h
DESCRIPTION
The setautologout(8) command sets the session timeout time of the XSCF shell.
The default of the session timeout time is 10 minutes.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-s timeout
Specifies the session timeout time of the XSCF shell. Specify a
timeout time value in units of minutes for timeout. An integer
ranging from 1 to 255 can be specified.
The specified session timeout time becomes effective after the subsequent login.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets the session timeout time of the XSCF shell to 30 minutes.
XSCF> setautologout -s 30
30min
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showautologout(8)
System Administration
135
setautologout(8)
136
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setcod(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setcod - set up the Capacity on Demand (COD) resources used for domains
setcod
setcod [-v]
setcod [[-q] -{y|n}] [-v] headroom
setcod [-v] -d domain_id [ proc-rtus]
setcod -h
DESCRIPTION
setcod(8) sets up the COD resources to be used for domains. License keys must be
installed (see addcodlicense(8)) before COD boards in a domain can be utilized.
You can also enable headroom and reserve licenses for some domains with
setcod(8).
When no domain_id is specified, current values are displayed in the square brackets
([]) at the command prompt. If no value is specified for an operand, it retains its
current value.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Domain identifier. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on
the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-v
Specifies verbose output.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
System Administration
137
setcod(8)
OPERANDS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The following operands are supported:
headroom
Amount of headroom (processors) to be
enabled. Maximum value is 4.
proc-rtus
The number of Right To Use (RTUs)
licenses reserved for a domain. One RTU
license is required for each CPU.
If you run the setcod command without specifying any options, the command
prompts you for COD information.
You are asked to specify the amount of COD headroom to be used, and the number
of COD RTU licenses to be reserved for your domains. When you are prompted for
COD information, the maximum values allowed are displayed within parentheses
() and default values are displayed within brackets [].
setcod enables COD headroom (processors to be used on demand). Use the -d
domain_id to specify the number of domain COD RTU licenses to be reserved.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Setting COD CPU Headroom Quantity and Reserve Domain COD RTU Licenses
XSCF> setcod
PROC RTUs installed: 0
PROC Headroom Quantity (0 to disable, 4 MAX) [0]: 1
WARNING:Using headroom requires you to install license key(s) within 30
days. Do you agree? [y|n]: y
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 0 (1 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 1 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 2 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 3 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 4 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 5 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 6 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 7 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 8 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 9 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 10 (0 MAX) [0]:
138
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setcod(8)
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 11 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 12 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 13 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 14 (0 MAX) [0]:
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 15 (0 MAX) [0]:
EXAMPLE 2
Set the COD Headroom CPUs to 3
XSCF> setcod 3
WARNING: Using headroom requires you to install license key(s) within 30
days. Do you agree? [y|n]: y
After this command completes, you will see a message similar to this one in the
XSCF console:
codd 15:51:36: COD PROC Headroom changed to 3
EXAMPLE 3
Set the COD Headroom CPUs to 0
XSCF> setcod 0
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addcodlicense(8), showcod(8)
System Administration
139
setcod(8)
140
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setdate(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setdate - set the date and time of XSCF
setdate [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-u] -s date
setdate -h
DESCRIPTION
The setdate(8) command sets the date and time of XSCF.
If the local date and time are specified, they are set following conversion to
coordinated universal time (UTC).
After the command executed, XSCF will be reset automatically.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-s date
Sets date and time. date can be specified in either of the following
formats:
YYYY.MM.DD-hh:mm:ss
Specifies date in the format of
"year.month.dayhour:minute:second."
MMDDhhmmYYYY.ss
Specifies data in the format
"MonthDayHourMinuteYear.
second."
-u
Specifies time in UTC. When omitted, the local time is specified.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the setting automatically
reflected to the standby XSCF. When there is a defect on the standby XSCF, it
leads to an error and the setting will be reflected to the active XSCF only.
■
If the XSCF is used as an NTP server, change the XSCF time, and synchronize the
domain times with the XSCF time. The XSCF time is applied to a domain during
either of the following operations:
System Administration
141
setdate(8)
EXAMPLES
■
The ntpdate(1M) command is executed in the domain.
■
Rebooting the domain
■
The setdate(8) command needs to be executed in the system power-off status.
■
In case an NTP server set to XSCF, the time set by the setdate(8) command
becomes invalid. Whether an NTP server set to XSCF or not can be checked by
using the showntp(8) command.
■
To check the currently set XSCF date and time, execute the showdate(8)
command.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets "January 27 16:59:00 2006" of the local time (JST) as the current time.
XSCF> setdate -s 012716592006.00
Fri Jan 27 16:59:00 JST 2006
The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y
Fri Jan 27 16:59:00 JST 2006
XSCF>
The reset continues after this point.
EXAMPLE 2
Sets "January 27 07:59:00 2006" of UTC as the current time.
XSCF> setdate -u -s 012707592006.00
Fri Jan 27 07:59:00 UTC 2006
The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y
Fri Jan 27 07:59:00 UTC 2006
XSCF>
The reset continues after this point.
EXAMPLE 3
Sets "January 27 16:59:00 2006" of the local time (JST) as the current time. Automatically replies with 'y' to the prompt.
XSCF> setdate -y -s 012716592006.00
Fri Jan 27 16:59:00 JST 2006
The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y
Fri Jan 27 16:59:00 JST 2006
XSCF>
The reset continues after this point.
EXAMPLE 4
142
Sets "January 27 16:59:00 2006" of the local time (JST) as the current time. Au-
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setdate(8)
tomatically replies with 'y' without displaying the prompt.
XSCF> setdate -q -y -s 012716592006.00
XSCF>
The reset continues after this point.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setntp(8), settimezone(8), showdate(8), showntp(8), showtimezone(8)
System Administration
143
setdate(8)
144
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setdcl(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setdcl - set a domain component list (DCL)
setdcl -d domain_id -s
policy=value
setdcl -d domain_id -s option=value lsb [ lsb...]
setdcl -d domain_id -a lsb=xsb [ lsb=xsb...]
setdcl -d domain_id -r lsb [ lsb...]
setdcl -h
DESCRIPTION
The setdcl(8) command sets a domain component list (DCL).
A DCL is hardware resource information that can be set for a domain or the logical
system boards (LSBs) that are components of a domain.
An LSB is a board unit recognized by an operating system in a domain. Up to 16
boards can be registered in each domain, and they are represented by integer
numbers ranging from 0 to 15.
An extended system board (XSB) is a board unit that can be used in the system and
is one partition of a partitioned physical system board (PSB). An XSB is represented
by x-y, a combination of a PSB number and the number of one partition of the
partitioned PSB (x is an integer ranging from 00 to 15, and y is an integer ranging
from 0 to 3).
The setdcl(8) command associates an XSB with an LSB that can be recognized by
an operating system in the domain, and its settings enable the operating system in
the domain to use hardware resources on the associated XSB.
The setdcl(8) command can set the following types of DCL information:
For the domain:
■
Degradation range applicable for an error detected during an initial diagnosis of
hardware (policy)
For the LSB:
■
XSB number of the XSB to be associated with an LSB (lsb, xsb)
The XSB with the specified XSB number is associated with an LSB.
■
Using memory mounted on an LSB (no-mem)
The user can specify whether an operating system in the domain can use
memory mounted on an LSB.
■
Using I/O devices mounted on an LSB (no-io)
The user can specify whether an operating system in the domain can use I/O
devices, such as a PCI card, mounted on an LSB.
System Administration
145
setdcl(8)
■
Whether to set a priority for the specified LSB as a floating board, relative to
other boards (float)
The user can specify whether to set a priority for the specified LSB as a floating
board, relative to other boards. A floating board is used for dynamic
reconfiguration (DR) for purposes such as changing the domain configuration,
while minimizing effect of DR on the operating system.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a lsb=xsb
Specifies an XSB number to be associated with an LSB number in
the domain. The following form can be accepted:
lsb=xsb
lsb
Specifies an LSB number. An integer ranging
from 0 to 15 can be specified.
xsb
Specifies an XSB number. The following xsb
form is accepted:
x-y
x: An integer from 00–15.
y: An integer from 0–3.
lsb and xsb can be specified with an equal sign (=) as a delimiter.
The space character must not be inserted immediately before and
after "=." lsb=xsb can be repeated multiple times by using a space
character as a delimiter.
If the same pair of an LSB number and XSB number is
duplicated, an error occurs. Also, if an XSB number has already
been set for the specified lsb, an error occurs.
If the specified xsb has already been set for another LSB, the
existing setting is canceled and the specified xsb is set for the
specified lsb.
146
-d domain_id
Specifies the domain ID to be set. An integer ranging from 0 to 23
can be specified for domain_id, depending on the system
configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setdcl(8)
-r
Clears the XSB number associated with an LSB number in the
specified domain.
-s option=value
Makes settings regarding hardware resources of the XSB
associated with an LSB. An item to be set is specified for option,
and a value corresponding to option is specified for value. option
and value are specified only once in a format using an equal sign
(=) to delimit the specified values. The space character must not
be inserted immediately before and after "=".
One of the following can be specified for option:
policy
Degradation range applicable for a detected
error during an initial diagnosis of hardware.
no-mem
Whether to omit the use of memory on a
domain
no-io
Whether to omit the use of I/O devices on a
domain
float
Whether to set a priority for the board as a
floating board, relative to other boards
If policy is specified for option, either of the following can be
specified for value:
fru
Degrades the target part for an error detected
by a diagnosis.
xsb
Degrades the target XSB for an error detected
by a diagnosis.
system
Degrades the target system for an error
detected by a diagnosis.
If no-mem is specified for option, either of the following can be
specified for value:
true
Omits the use of memory on a domain.
false
Does not omit the use of memory on a
domain (default).
System Administration
147
setdcl(8)
-r
Clears the XSB number associated with an LSB number in the
specified domain.
-s option=value
Makes settings regarding hardware resources of the XSB
associated with an LSB. An item to be set is specified for option,
and a value corresponding to option is specified for value. option
and value are specified only once in a format using an equal sign
(=) to delimit the specified values. The space character must not
be inserted immediately before and after "=".
One of the following can be specified for option:
policy
Degradation range applicable for a detected
error during an initial diagnosis of hardware.
no-mem
Whether to omit the use of memory on a
domain
no-io
Whether to omit the use of I/O devices on a
domain
float
Whether to set a priority for the board as a
floating board, relative to other boards
If policy is specified for option, either of the following can be
specified for value:
fru
Degrades the target part for an error detected
by a diagnosis.
xsb
Degrades the target XSB for an error detected
by a diagnosis.
system
Degrades the target system for an error
detected by a diagnosis.
If no-mem is specified for option, either of the following can be
specified for value:
148
true
Omits the use of memory on a domain.
false
Does not omit the use of memory on a
domain (default).
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setdcl(8)
If no-io is specified for option, either of the following can be
specified for value:
true
Omits the use of I/O devices on a domain.
false
Does not omit the use of I/O devices on a
domain (default).
If float is specified for option, either of the following can be
specified for value:
OPERANDS
EXAMPLES
Gives a higher priority regarding floating
boards.
false
Does not give a higher priority regarding
floating boards (default).
The following operands are supported:
lsb
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
true
Specifies the number of the LSB whose information is to be set.
Specify by using an integer ranging from 0 to 15. Multiple lsbs
can be specified by delimiting with spaces. Specifies unique lsb
within the domain. If the same lsb number is specified, an error
occurs.
■
If the XSB associated with the specified LSB has been configured in the domain
configuration, the information that is set for the LSB cannot be changed. Before
making such a change, unassign the XSB from the domain configuration by
executing the deleteboard(8) command, or re-configure it in another domain
configuration by executing the moveboard(8) command.
■
If the specified domain is running, the value of policy cannot be changed. To
change the value, first turn off power to the domain.
■
The currently set DCL information can be checked by using the showdcl(8)
command.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets XSB#00-0 for LSB#00 and XSB#00-1 for LSB#01 of domain ID 0.
XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -a 00=00-0 01=00-1
EXAMPLE 2
Sets no-mem=true for LSB#00 and #01 of domain ID 0.
XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -s no-mem=true 00 01
System Administration
149
setdcl(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Sets policy=system for domain ID 0.
XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -s policy=system
EXAMPLE 4
Clear the XSBs associated with LSB#00 and #01 of domain ID 0.
XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -r 00 01
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
150
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8),
showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setdomainmode(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setdomainmode - set the modes of operation for the specified domain
setdomainmode [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id -m function=mode
setdomainmode -h
DESCRIPTION
setdomainmode(8) sets the modes of operation for the specified domain.
The modes of operation for the specified domain include the following types:
Diagnostics
Level
OpenBoot PROM diagnostic levels. The default is standard.
Secure Mode
Whether to enable or disable the host watchdog and suppress
break signal reception. The default of the host watchdog is enable
and suppress break signal reception is enable.
Autoboot
Whether to enable or disable the auto boot function used at
domain startup. The default is enable.
CPU Mode
Way of determining the CPU operational mode mounted on the
domain. The CPU operational mode can be automatically
determined at domain startup, or manually set to the compatible
mode. The default is to let it automatically determined at domain
startup.
The CPU operational mode includes the following two types:
SPARC64 VII enhanced mode
Operates using the enhanced functions of SPARC64 VII processor.
This mode is set to the domain consists only of SPARC64 VII
processors and when the CPU operational mode determined
automatically.
SPARC64 VI compatible mode
All the mounted CPUs operate with the functions equivalent to the
SPARC64 VI processor. This mode can be set to a domain of any
CPU configuration.
If any of the modes of operation for the specified domain is set, the current settings
are listed.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
■
OpenBoot PROM diagnostic levels:
fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
System Administration
151
setdomainmode(8)
■
Host watchdog and suppress break signal reception, auto boot function, and
operational mode of CPU:
platadm
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm
Can run this command only for your managed domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
152
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Specifies the domain ID to be set. domain_id can be 0–23
depending on the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setdomainmode(8)
-m function=mode Sets the modes of operation and specifies its values. Use function
to set the modes of operation. One of the following can be
specified:
diag
Specifies the OpenBoot PROM diagnostic
level.
secure
Specifies whether to enable or disable the
host watchdog and suppress break signal
reception.
autoboot
Specifies whether to enable or disable the
Auto boot function.
cpumode
Sets the operational mode of CPU.
When diag is specified for function, any of the following can be
specified for mode:
Note – This function cannot be specified for the domain which is
powered on.
none
No diagnosis is performed.
min
Sets standard for the diagnostic level.
max
Sets maximum for the diagnostic level.
When secure is specified for function, one of the following can
be specified for mode. The setting will be reflected after domain
power on or restart.
on
Enables the host watchdog and suppress
break signal reception.
off
Disables the host watchdog and suppress
break signal reception.
When autoboot is specified for function, one of the following
can be specified for mode. The setting will be reflected after
domain power on or restart.
on
Enables the Auto boot function.
off
Disables the Auto boot function.
System Administration
153
setdomainmode(8)
-m function=mode Sets the modes of operation and specifies its values. Use function
to set the modes of operation. One of the following can be
specified:
diag
Specifies the OpenBoot PROM diagnostic
level.
secure
Specifies whether to enable or disable the
host watchdog and suppress break signal
reception.
autoboot
Specifies whether to enable or disable the
Auto boot function.
cpumode
Sets the operational mode of CPU.
When diag is specified for function, any of the following can be
specified for mode:
Note – This function cannot be specified for the domain which is
powered on.
none
No diagnosis is performed.
min
Sets standard for the diagnostic level.
max
Sets maximum for the diagnostic level.
When secure is specified for function, one of the following can
be specified for mode. The setting will be reflected after domain
power on or restart.
on
Enables the host watchdog and suppress
break signal reception.
off
Disables the host watchdog and suppress
break signal reception.
When autoboot is specified for function, one of the following
can be specified for mode. The setting will be reflected after
domain power on or restart.
154
on
Enables the Auto boot function.
off
Disables the Auto boot function.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setdomainmode(8)
(continued)
When cpumode is specified for function, one of the following can
be specified for mode:
Note – This function cannot be specified for the domain which is
powered on.
auto
Automatically determines the operational mode of CPU at domain
startup. Depending on the CPU configuration on the domain, any of
the following CPU operational mode is set:
■
Consists only of SPARC64 VII processors: SPARC64 VII
enhanced mode
■
SPARC64 VII and VI processors mixed: SPARC64 VI
compatible mode
■
Consists only of SPARC64 VI processors: SPARC64 VI
compatible mode
compatible
Regardless of the CPUs mounted, sets the operational mode of
CPU to the SPARC64 VI compatible mode.
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
■
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n"
to cancel the command.
■
The system board which can be added by Dynamic Reconfiguration (DR) is
decided by the CPU operational mode currently set to the domain, which is as
follows:
Domain CPU
configuration
Value of CPU
Mode
Current CPU operational mode CPU configuration of a system
board which can be added by
DR operation
SPARC64 VII
auto
SPARC64 VII enhanced
mode
SPARC64 VII
System Administration
155
setdomainmode(8)
Domain CPU
configuration
Value of CPU
Mode
Current CPU operational mode CPU configuration of a system
board which can be added by
DR operation
SPARC64 VII
compatible
SPARC64 VI compatible
mode
Any CPU configuration
SPARC64 VII/VI
auto or
compatible
SPARC64 VI compatible
mode
Any CPU configuration
SPARC64 VI
auto or
compatible
SPARC64 VI compatible
mode
Any CPU configuration
For details of the CPU operational mode and the DR operation, see the SPARC
Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers Dynamic Reconfiguration (DR)
User’s Guide.
■
To add the system board other than those above, you need to perform the
domain reconfiguration accompanied by the domain power off/on or reboot.
■
When the operational mode of CPU has been automatically determined, if a
situation as described below occurred, the CPU operational mode changes at the
domain restart, from the SPARC64 VI compatible mode to the SPARC64 VII
enhanced mode. In the SPARC64 VII enhanced mode, a system board mounted
with the SPARC64 VI processors cannot be added by DR operation.
■
When the SPARC64 VII and VI processors are mixed, after the restart due to
the SPARC64 VI processor failure, there is no SPARC64 VI processor on a
domain.
When the SPARC64 VI processors mounted, or planned to be mounted on the
domain, set the operational mode of CPU to the SPARC64 VI compatible mode.
156
■
To check the mode of CPUs which currently set to the domain, execute the
prtdiag(1M) command on Solaris OS. For the prtdiag(1M) command, see the
manual page of Solaris OS.
■
If the Mode switch of the operator panel is set to Service, the settings of the
modes of operation for the specified domain have the following values,
regardless of the settings of the setdomainmode(8) command:
■
OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level (Diagnostic Level), operational mode of
CPU (CPU Mode): operates as the setdomainmode(8) command setting
■
Host watchdog and suppress break signal reception (Secure Mode), auto
boot function (Autoboot): off
■
When the OpenBoot PROM environmental variable 'auto-boot?' has been set
to false, the auto boot function is disabled.
■
The diagnostics level of OpenBoot PROM is applied to the diag level of the
addboard(8) command and moveboard(8) command.
■
The settings of the current modes of operation for the specified domain can be
checked by using the showdomainmode(8) command.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setdomainmode(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
The setting of the diagnostic level for domain ID 0 is none.
XSCF> setdomainmode -d 0 -m diag=none
Diagnostic Level
:min
-> none
Secure Mode
:on
-> -
Autoboot
:on
-> -
CPU Mode
:auto
-> -
The specified modes will be changed.
Continue? [y|n]:y
configured.
Diagnostic Level
Secure Mode
:none
:on (host watchdog: available Break-signal:non-receive)
Autoboot
:on (autoboot:on)
CPU Mode
:auto
EXAMPLE 2
The Auto boot function is enabled for domain ID 0. Automatically answers 'y'
to all prompts.
XSCF> setdomainmode -y -d 0 -m autoboot=on
Diagnostic Level
:none
-> -
Secure Mode
:on
-> -
Autoboot
:off
-> on
CPU Mode
:auto
-> -
The specified modes will be changed.
Continue? [y|n]:y
configured.
Diagnostic Level
:none
Secure Mode
receive)
:on (host watchdog: available
Autoboot
:on (autoboot:on)
CPU Mode
:auto
Break-signal:non-
System Administration
157
setdomainmode(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Cancels the setdomainmode(8) command execution that is in progress.
XSCF> setdomainmode -d 0 -m diag=none
Diagnostic Level
:min
-> none
Secure Mode
:on
-> -
Autoboot
:on
-> -
CPU Mode
:auto
-> -
The specified modes will be changed.
Continue? [y|n]:n
EXAMPLE 4
The Auto boot function is enabled for domain ID 0. Suppresses prompts, and
automatically answers 'y' to all prompts
XSCF> setdomainmode -q -y -d 0 -m autoboot=on
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
158
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showdomainmode(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setdomparam(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setdomparam - forcibly rewrite OpenBoot PROM environment variables
setdomparam [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id use-nvramrc
setdomparam [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id security-mode
setdomparam [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id set-defaults
setdomparam -h
DESCRIPTION
The setdomparam(8) command rewrites OpenBoot PROM environment variables.
This command can rewrite variables of a specified domain or all the domains.
The following OpenBoot PROM environment variables can be specified.
use-nvramrc?
Whether to execute the contents of the NVRAM at the boot or
reboot of a domain.
security-mode? Firmware security level setting
set-defaults
Privileges
Whether to restore OpenBoot PROM environment variables to
the settings at the time of shipment from the factory
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm
Can run this command only for your managed domain.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:.
-d domain_id
Specifies a ID of the domain which OpenBoot PROM
environment variables are rewritten. domain_id can be 0–23
depending on the system configuration.
Note – The domain which is powered on cannot specify.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
System Administration
159
setdomparam(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
use-nvramrc
Sets false for the use-nvramrc? environment variable.
security-mode Sets none to the security-mode? environment variable.
set-defaults
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Restores the OpenBoot PROM environment variables to the
settings at the time of shipment from the factory
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to
cancel the command.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets false for the use-nvramrc? OpenBoot PROM environment variable of
domain ID 0.
XSCF> setdomrarm -d 0 use-nvramrc
DomainIDs of domains that will be affected:00,01
OpenBoot PROM variable use-nvram will be set to false.
Continue? [y|n]:y
EXAMPLE 2
Sets none for the security-mode OpenBoot PROM environment variable of
domain ID 0.
XSCF> setdomrarm -d 0 security-mode
DomainIDs of domains that will be affected:00,01
OpenBoot PROM variable security-mode will be set to none.
Continue? [y|n]:y
EXAMPLE 3
Initializes the OpenBoot PROM environment variables of the domain ID 0 to
the settings at the time of shipment from the factory.
XSCF> setdomrarm -d 0 set-defaults
DomainIDs of domains that will be affected:00
All OpenBoot PROM variable will be reset to original default values.
Continue? [y|n]:y
EXAMPLE 4
Initializes the OpenBoot PROM environment variables of the domain ID 1 to
the settings at the time of shipment from the factory. Automatically replies
with 'y' without displaying the prompt.
XSCF> setdomrarm -q -y -d 1 set-defaults
160
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setdomparam(8)
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
161
setdomparam(8)
162
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setdscp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setdscp - set the IP address assignments for the Domain to Service Processor
Communications Protocol (DSCP)
setdscp [-v]
setdscp [-f] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] -i address -m netmask
setdscp [-f] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] -s -i address
setdscp [-f] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id -i address
setdscp -h
DESCRIPTION
setdscp(8) assigns IP addresses to the DSCP links.
setdscp is intended for initial configuration only. Domains should not be powered
on when running this command.
Note – You are required to reboot the Service Processor after modifying the DSCP
IP address assignment using this command, and before the IP addresses you
specified are used.
You can specify a network address for use by all of the DSCP links using the -i
address and -m netmask arguments. In this mode of operation, the IP addresses used
by the Service Processor and each domain-specific DSCP link are automatically
selected from within the range of addresses indicated by the network address.
You can set the IP address of an individual, domain-specific DSCP link
independently of all other DSCP address settings using the -d domain_id and -i
address arguments.
You can set the IP address of the Service Processor independently of all other DSCP
address settings using the -s and -i address arguments.
If DSCP has been previously configured, the current settings are displayed. If they
are correct, they can be accepted by pressing the [Return] key.
An error occurs if you set the address of the Service Processor or a domain to a
value that either is out of range for a previously configured network address, or
conflicts with an address already assigned to another domain or the Service
Processor. You can override such errors by using the -f option.
Using the -f option with a conflicting IP address may cause misconfiguration. You
must resolve such conflicts for DSCP to operate properly.
With no arguments, setdscp enters an interactive mode that prompts you to enter
all of the DSCP IP address information sequentially. (The noninteractive method,
setting up the IP addresses of all domains using the -i and -m options, is
preferred.) After inputting all the requested settings, you can review the settings
and decide whether to commit them to the DSCP configuration database.
System Administration
163
setdscp(8)
Note – The -y and -n options can be used (with or without the -q option) when
running setdscp in interactive mode.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Domain identifier. Must be used with -i address option. domain_id
can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.
-f
Forces setdscp to ignore out of range and address conflict errors
and commits the new settings.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-i address
Specifies an IP address in the IPv4 dotted decimal format.
When used with -m netmask it specifies a network address for
all DSCP links in the system.
When used with -d domain_id it specifies an individual,
domain-specific IP address for use by DSCP.
When used with -s, it specifies the IP address used for the
Service Processor end of all DSCP links in the system.
EXAMPLES
164
-m netmask
Specifies a netmask address for all DSCP links in the system. Must
be used with -i address.
-n
Automatically answers n (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-s
Must be used with the -i address option. Specifies the Service
Processor end of all DSCP links in the system.
-v
Displays a detailed message. If this option is specified with the -q
option, the -v option is ignored.
-y
Automatically answers y (yes) to all prompts.
Caution – The IP addresses shown in the following examples are examples only.
Refer to the site planning guide for your server for information about valid IP
addresses for your network. Using invalid network IP addresses could, under
certain circumstances, make your system unbootable!
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setdscp(8)
EXAMPLE 1
Assigning All DSCP Addresses
XSCF> setdscp -y -i 10.1.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0
Commit these changes to the database? [y|n] : y
EXAMPLE 2
Assigning an Alternative IP address to Domain 1
XSCF> setdscp -d 1 -i 10.1.1.26
Commit these changes to the database? [y|n] : y
EXAMPLE 3
Specifying a Netmask Address With -q and -y Options
XSCF> setdscp -q -y -i 10.1.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0
EXAMPLE 4
Setting DSCP Addresses Using Interactive Mode
The default value displayed by each prompt in interactive mode matches the
previous configuration. This makes it possible to interactively review and modify
DSCP configuration. In this example you only input the network address portion
and then press ENTER to accept all subsequent settings.
XSCF>
setdscp
DSCP network
[0.0.0.0
] > 10.1.1.0
DSCP netmask
[255.0.0.0
] > 255.255.255.0
XSCF address
[10.1.1.1
] > [ENTER]
Domain #00 address
[10.1.1.2
] > [ENTER]
Domain #01 address
[10.1.1.3
] > [ENTER]
Domain #02 address
[10.1.1.4
] > [ENTER]
Domain #03 address
[10.1.1.5
] > [ENTER]
Domain #04 address
[10.1.1.6
] > [ENTER]
Domain #05 address
[10.1.1.7
] > [ENTER]
Domain #06 address
[10.1.1.8
] > [ENTER]
Domain #07 address
[10.1.1.9
] > [ENTER]
Domain #08 address
[10.1.1.10
] > [ENTER]
Domain #09 address
[10.1.1.11
] > [ENTER]
Domain #10 address
[10.1.1.12
] > [ENTER]
System Administration
165
setdscp(8)
Domain #11 address
[10.1.1.13
] > [ENTER]
Domain #12 address
[10.1.1.14
] > [ENTER]
Domain #13 address
[10.1.1.15
] > [ENTER]
Domain #14 address
[10.1.1.16
] > [ENTER]
Domain #15 address
[10.1.1.17
] > [ENTER]
Domain #16 address
[10.1.1.18
] > [ENTER]
Domain #17 address
[10.1.1.19
] > [ENTER]
Domain #18 address
[10.1.1.20
] > [ENTER]
Domain #19 address
[10.1.1.21
] > [ENTER]
Domain #20 address
[10.1.1.22
] > [ENTER]
Domain #21 address
[10.1.1.23
] > [ENTER]
Domain #22 address
[10.1.1.24
] > [ENTER]
Domain #23 address
[10.1.1.25
] > [ENTER]
Commit these changes to the database [y|n]? y
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
166
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showdscp(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setdualpowerfeed(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setdualpowerfeed - set dual power feed mode
setdualpowerfeed -s key
setdualpowerfeed -h
DESCRIPTION
The setdualpowerfeed(8) command specifies dual power feed mode in the
system.
The setdualpowerfeed(8) command is valid in a midrange server only. In a highend server, when the power cabinet for dual power feed connected, it automatically
configures the dual power feed mode.
To apply the specified configuration, execute the rebootxscf(8) command and
reset XSCF.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-s key
Sets dual power feed mode in the system. Either of the following
can be specified for key:
enable
Enables the dual power feed mode.
disable
Disables dual power feed mode.
■
Before rebooting the system, a message that dual power feed mode was changed
is displayed.
■
The state of the current dual power feed mode can be checked by using the
showdualpowerfeed(8) command.
EXAMPLE 1
Disables dual power feed mode in the system. Before rebooting the system, a
message is displayed.
XSCF> setdualpowerfeed -s disable
enable -> disable
NOTE: Dual power feed will be disabled the next time the platform is powered
on.
EXAMPLE 2
Enables dual power feed mode in the system. Before rebooting the system, a
System Administration
167
setdualpowerfeed(8)
message is displayed.
XSCF> setdualpowerfeed -s enable
disable -> enable
NOTE: Dual power feed will be enabled the next time the platform is powered
on.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
168
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showdualpowerfeed(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setemailreport(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setemailreport - set up the email report configuration data
setemailreport [-v] [-t]
setemailreport [-s variable= value]...
setemailreport -h
DESCRIPTION
setemailreport(8) sets up email reporting configuration data for remote
maintenance. Once the configuration data is set up, it is used by the fault
management daemon to send email reports as required.
If you run the setemailreport command without specifying any options, you
will be prompted to answer whether email reporting is to be enabled. If enabled,
you will be prompted to provided a list of email addresses.
Where:
-a
Add recipient
-d
Delete recipient
-r
Replace recipient (Default)
You can set up email reporting noninteractively by using the -s option.
After the email server and port have been set up using setsmtp(8), you can use
setemailreport -t to send a test email message.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) and for more information.
System Administration
169
setemailreport(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
-s variable=value
Configures email reporting.
Valid entries for variable are:
enable
recipient
Valid value entries for enable are:
yes
no
Valid value entries for recipient are:
Any valid company email account
EXAMPLES
-t
Sends test email.
-v
Specifies verbose output.
EXAMPLE 1
Enable Email Reporting Interactively
XSCF> setemailreport
Enable Email Reporting? [no]:yes
Email Recipient Address [[email protected]]:
Do you want to send a test mail now (Yes/No): no
EXAMPLE 2
Adding an Email Report Recipient Using -a
XSCF> setemailreport
Enable Email Reporting? [yes]:[RETURN]
Email Recipient Address[[email protected]]: -a [email protected]
EXAMPLE 3
Deleting an Email Report Recipient Using -d
XSCF> setemailreport
Enable Email Reporting? [yes]:[RETURN]
Email Recipient Address[[email protected]]: -d [email protected]
170
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setemailreport(8)
EXAMPLE 4
Enable Email Reporting Noninteractively
XSCF> setemailreport -s enable=yes -s
recipient=”[email protected], [email protected]”
EXAMPLE 5
Sending Test Email
XSCF> setemailreport -t
....Sending test email to [email protected]
[Email contents shown below]
Host Name: jupiter
Send Timestamp: 04-20-2006 16:31:45 PST
Mail Server: 10.4.1.1
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setsmtp(8), showemailreport(8)
System Administration
171
setemailreport(8)
172
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
sethostname(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
sethostname - set a host name and a DNS domain name for an XSCF unit
sethostname xscfu hostname
sethostname -d domainname
sethostname -h
DESCRIPTION
sethostname(8) command sets a host name and a DNS domain name for an XSCF
unit.
When the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the DNS domain name becomes
common to XSCF units. The host name can be specified for each XSCF unit.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
OPERANDS
The following options are supported:
-d domainname
Specifies a DNS domain name to be set for the XSCF unit. The
domainname is specified in up to 254 characters with the hostname
included, with label elements delimited by a period(.). If a
domain name exceeding 254 characters is specified, an error
occurs. A label element can contain alphanumeric characters and
hyphens (-). Each label element must always begin with an
alphabetic character and end with an alphanumeric character.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
The following operands are supported:
hostname
Specifies a host name to be set for the XSCF unit. The hostname is
specified in up to 64 characters, not in Fully Qualified Domain
Name (FQDN) but in an abbreviated form. If a host name
exceeding 64 characters is specified, an error occurs.
Alphanumeric character and hyphens (-) can be used. However, a
host name must always begin with an alphabetic character and
end with an alphanumeric character.
xscfu
Specifies the name of the XSCF unit to be set. The following
values can be specified, depending on the system configuration.
If no value is specified, an error occurs.
xscf#0
XSCF unit 0
xscf#1
XSCF unit 1 (when a duplicated
configuration is used)
System Administration
173
sethostname(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
■
To reflect the host name and the DNS domain name to XSCF, execute the
applynetwork(8) command. After reflected the information, use the
rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF to complete the setting.
■
To enable the set host name and DNS domain name, execute the
applynetwork(8) command and reset the XSCF.
■
The currently set host name and DNS domain name of the XSCF unit can be
checked by using the shownetwork(8) command.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets the host name scf0-hostname for XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> sethostname xscf#0 scf0-hostname
EXAMPLE 2
Sets the DNS domain name example.com for XSCF unit.
XSCF> sethostname -d example.com
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
174
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
applynetwork(8), rebootxscf(8), showhostname(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
sethttps(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
sethttps - start or stop the HTTPS service, which is used in the XSCF network. This
command also performs authentication-related settings
sethttps [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c enable
sethttps -c disable
sethttps -c gencsr country state | province locality organization organizationalunit
common e-mail
sethttps [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c genserverkey
sethttps -c importca
sethttps [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c selfsign country state | province locality organization
organizationalunit common e-mail
sethttps -h
DESCRIPTION
The sethttps(8) command starts or stops the HTTPS service, which is used in the
XSCF network. Also, this command performs authentication-related settings for
authentication used in the HTTPS service.
The following authentication-related items can be set:
■
Configuring the self-certification authority
■
Creating a self-signed web server certificate
■
Creating the private key of the web server
■
Creating a web server certificate signing request (CSR) to an external certification
authority
■
Importing a web server certificate signed by an external certification authority
XSCF does not support HTTP service. Only HTTPS service is supported.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
175
sethttps(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c {enable|disable} Specify whether to enable the HTTPS service. One of the
following values can be specified. If none of them is
specified, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
enable
Starts the HTTPS service.
disable
Stops the HTTPS service.
-c gencsr
Creates a CSR.
-c genserverkey
Creates the private key of the web server.
-c importca
Imports a web server certificate signed by the certification
authority to the XSCF.
-c selfsign
Configures the self-certification authority. Also, this
operand creates a self-signing web server certificate.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options
or operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
The following operands are supported:
common
Specifies common names such as the creator name and the host
name of a server.
country
Specifies a country name with a two-letter code such as JP or US.
e-mail
Specifies an E-mail address.
locality
Specifies a city name, etc.
organization
Specifies a company name, etc.
organizationalunit Specifies an organization such as a section or department.
state|province
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
176
Specifies the name of a state, province, etc.
■
When the HTTPS server is enabled or there is a private certificate authority, web
server certificate, or web server secret key, a prompt to confirm execution of the
command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the
command or "n" to cancel the command.
■
The CSR is overwritten.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
sethttps(8)
■
In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the setting automatically
reflected to the standby XSCF. When there's a defect on the standby XSCF, it
leads to an error.
■
When using an external certification authority, it leads to an error in the
following cases.
■
When the "-c gencsr" option or the "-c enable" option is executed, without
executing the "-c genserverkey" option.
Create the private key of the web server using the "-c genserverkey"
option.
■
When the "-c enable" option is executed, without executing the "-c
importca" option.
Import a web server certificate using the "-c importca" option.
■
When the web server certificate which imported by executing the "-c
importca" option does not correspond to the private key of the web server
which has been created by executing the "-c genserverkey" option.
Confirm the validity of the web server certificate.
EXAMPLES
■
The information which has been set will be reflected by using the
rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF.
■
The details of the current HTTPS service can be checked by using the
showhttps(8) command.
EXAMPLE 1
Starts the HTTPS service.
XSCF> sethttps -c enable
Continue? [y|n] :y
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the https settings.
EXAMPLE 2
Stops the HTTPS service.
XSCF> sethttps disable
EXAMPLE 3
Creates a CSR with the following settings: country: JP, state|province: Kanagawa, locality: Kawasaki, organization: Example, organizationalunit: development, common: scf-host, e-mail: [email protected]
XSCF> sethttps -c gencsr JP Kanagawa Kawasaki Example development
\ scf-host [email protected]
EXAMPLE 4
Creates the self-certification authority with the following settings, and creates
a self-signed web server certificate:country: JP, state|province: Kanagawa, locality: Kawasaki, organization: Example, organizationalunit: development, com-
System Administration
177
sethttps(8)
mon: scf-host, e-mail: [email protected]
XSCF> sethttps -c selfsign JP Kanagawa Kawasaki Example development
scf-host [email protected]
CA key and CA cert already exist. Do you still wish to update? [y|n] :y
Enter passphrase:
Verifying - Enter passphrase:
EXAMPLE 5
Creates the private key of the web server.
XSCF> sethttps -c genserverkey
Server key already exists. Do you still wish to update? [y|n] :y
Enter passphrase:
Verifying - Enter passphrase:
EXAMPLE 6
Creates the private key of the web server. Automatically replies with 'y' to the
prompt.
XSCF> sethttps -c genserverkey
Server key already exists. Do you still wish to update? [y|n] :y
Enter passphrase:
Verifying - Enter passphrase:
EXAMPLE 7
Creates the private key of the web server. Automatically replies with 'y' without displaying the prompt.
XSCF> sethttps -c genserverkey -q -y
Enter passphrase:
Verifying - Enter passphrase:
EXAMPLE 8
Imports the web server certificate. To exit, press the Enter key and then
press Ctrl+D.
XSCF> sethttps -c importca
Please import a certificate:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIIDdTCCAt6gAwIBAgIBATANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQQFADCBgTELMAkGA1UEBhMCamox
DjAMBgNVBAgTBXN0YXRlMREwDwYDVQQHEwhsb2NhbGl0eTEVMBMGA1UEChMMb3Jn
YW5pemF0aW9uMQ8wDQYDVQQLEwZvcmdhbmkxDzANBgNVBAMTBmNvbW1vbjEWMBQG
178
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
sethttps(8)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-----END CERTIFICATE-----
[Enter]
[Ctrl+D]
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showhttps(8)
System Administration
179
sethttps(8)
180
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setldap(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setldap - configure the Service Processor as a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) client
setldap {-b bind} {-B baseDN} {-c certchain} {-p } {-s servers} {-t user} -T
timeout
setldap -h
DESCRIPTION
setldap(8) allows you to configure the Service Processor as an LDAP client.
Note – The LDAP client supports passwords only in the CRYPT format; UNIX
Crypt or MD5. Therefore the passwords on the LDAP server must support it as
well. Refer to the administration guide for your server for more information.
Privileges
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-B baseDN
Specifies distinguished name for the search base. Maximum
character length is 128 characters.
-b bind
Sets the identity to use when binding to the LDAP server.
Maximum character length is 128 characters
-c certchain
Imports an LDAP server certificate chain from the remote file
specified in certchain. The certificate chain must be in PEM
format. Remote files are specified using the standard scp
syntax, that is, [user@]host:file., and imported using scp.
If the copy requires a user password you will be prompted for
it. Use of this option implicitly enables the use of TLS when
connecting to LDAP. This may be disabled by specifying
certchain as none. The certificate chain must be 64 Kbytes in
size or less, and it must be valid or it will be rejected.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-p
Sets a password to use when binding to the LDAP server. You
will be prompted for the password.
System Administration
181
setldap(8)
EXAMPLES
-s servers
Sets the primary and secondary LDAP servers and ports.
servers is a comma-separated list of server:port. Ports are
specified numerically and servers can be specified either by
name or IP address in the dotted decimal format. For example,
10.8.31.14.636,company:636. The first server in the list is
the primary. Server names must be resolvable. Maximum name
length is 128 characters.
-t user
Tests connections to all configured LDAP servers. Attempts to
retrieve the password data for the specified user from each
configured server and reports success or failure in each case.
-T timeout
Sets the maximum time allowed for an LDAP search before it
returns search results.
EXAMPLE 1
Configuring Bind Name
XSCF> setldap -b user -p
Password: <Enter password>
XSCF> showldap
user
Bind Name:
Base Distinguished Name: Not set
LDAP Search Timeout:
0
Bind Password:
Set
LDAP Servers:
None
CERTS:
None
EXAMPLE 2
Configuring Base Distinguished Name
XSCF> setldap -B
ou=people,dc=company,dc=com
XSCF> showldap
Bind Name:
user
Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com
182
LDAP Search Timeout:
0
Bind Password:
Set
LDAP Servers:
None
CERTS:
None
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setldap(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Setting the LDAP Timeout
XSCF> setldap -T 60
XSCF> showldap
Bind Name:
user
Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com
LDAP Search Timeout:
60
Bind Password:
Set
LDAP Servers:
None
CERTS:
None
EXAMPLE 4
Setting the LDAP Server
XSCF> setldap -s ldap://company.com,ldaps://company2.com
XSCF> showldap
Bind Name:
user
Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com
LDAP Search Timeout:
60
Bind Password:
Set
LDAP Servers:
ldap://company.com:389 ldaps://company2.com:636
CERTS:
None
EXAMPLE 5
Importing a Certificate
XSCF> setldap -c [email protected]:/path/to/cacert.pem
XSCF> showldap
Bind Name:
user
Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com
LDAP Search Timeout:
60
Bind Password:
Set
LDAP Servers:
ldap://company.com:389 ldaps://company2.com:636
CERTS:
cacert.pem
EXAMPLE 6
Testing the LDAP connection
XSCF> setldap -t jsmith
company.com:389 PASSED
System Administration
183
setldap(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
184
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showldap(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setlocale(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setlocale - set the default locale of the XSCF
setlocale -s locale
setlocale -h
DESCRIPTION
The setlocale(8) command sets the default locale of the XSCF.
The locale that can be set is English or Japanese.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-s locale
Specifies the default locale of the XSCF. Either of the following
can be specified for locale:
C
Sets the locale for English.
ja_JP.UTF-8
Sets the locale for Japanese.
■
The specified locale becomes effective after the subsequent login.
■
The currently set locale can be checked by using the showlocale(8) command.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets the XSCF default locale for English.
XSCF> setlocale -s C
C
EXAMPLE 2
Sets the XSCF default locale for Japanese.
XSCF> setlocale -s ja_JP.UTF-8
ja_JP.UTF-8
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showlocale(8)
System Administration
185
setlocale(8)
186
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setlocator(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setlocator - control the blinking of the CHECK LED on the operator panel
setlocator value
setlocator -h
DESCRIPTION
setlocator(8) command controls the blink state of the CHECK LED on the
operator panel.
The following states can be set:
Privileges
Start blinking
Makes the CHECK LED blink.
Stop blinking
Stops the blinking of the CHECK LED.
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
-h
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
value
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
Specifies the CHECK LED state. One of the following can be
specified:
blink
Starts the CHECK LED blinking.
reset
Stops the CHECK LED blinking.
The showlocator(8) command can be used to check the CHECK LED state.
EXAMPLE 1
Starts the CHECK LED blinking.
XSCF> setlocator blink
EXAMPLE 2
Stops the CHECK LED blinking.
XSCF> setlocator reset
System Administration
187
setlocator(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
188
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showlocator(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setlookup(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setlookup - enable or disable the use of the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) server for authentication and privilege lookup
setlookup -a
{local|ldap}
setlookup -p
{local|ldap}
setlookup -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
setlookup(8) sets whether authentication and privileges data are looked up in
LDAP or not.
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a
Sets the authentication lookup. Used with one of the
required operands ldap or local.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
-p
OPERANDS
EXAMPLES
Sets privileges lookup. Used with one of the required
operands ldap or local.
The following operands are supported:
ldap
Used with the -a and -p options. When set to ldap,
authentication or privileges are first looked up locally and then in
LDAP if not found locally.
local
Used with the -a and -p options. When set to local,
authentication or privileges are looked up only locally.
EXAMPLE 1
Enabling LDAP Lookup of Privilege Data
XSCF> setlookup -p ldap
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
189
setlookup(8)
SEE ALSO
190
showlookup(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setnameserver(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setnameserver - set the domain name system (DNS) servers used in the XSCF
network
setnameserver [-c add] address ...
setnameserver -c del address ...
setnameserver -c del -a
setnameserver -h
DESCRIPTION
setnameserver(8) command specifies the DNS servers used in the XSCF network.
Up to three DNS servers can be registered for XSCF. Any attempt to register four or
more DNS servers causes an error.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
OPERANDS
The following options are supported:
-a
Deletes all the DNS servers that are currently registered. This
option is used with the "-c del".
-c add
Adds the host with the specified IP address as a DNS server. This
option is used together with address. If the -c option is omitted,
"-c add" is assumed specified. When a DNS server is registered,
the existing setting is deleted, and overwriting is performed with
the specified address.
-c del
Deletes the host with the specified IP address from the DNS
servers that are set. If the -c option is omitted, "-c add" is
assumed specified.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
The following operand is supported:
address
Specifies the IP address of a DNS server to be added or deleted
using four sets of integers. Up to three addresses delimited by
the space can be specified. The following address form is
accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
System Administration
191
setnameserver(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
■
If multiple DNS servers are specified, names are solved in the order specified.
■
To reflect the DNS server name to XSCF, execute the applynetwork(8)
command. After reflected the information, use the rebootxscf(8) command to
reset XSCF to complete the setting.
■
The currently set DNS server can be checked by using the shownameserver(8)
command.
EXAMPLE 1
Adds the hosts with the IP addresses 192.168.1.2, 10.18.108.10, and 10.24.1.2
as DNS server. Names are solved in the order specified.
XSCF> setnameserver 192.168.1.2 10.18.108.10 10.24.1.2
EXAMPLE 2
Deletes the host with the IP address 10.18.108.10 from the DNS server.
XSCF> setnameserver -c del 10.18.108.10
EXAMPLE 3
Deletes all the DNS servers.
XSCF> setnameserver -c del -a
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
192
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
rebootxscf(8), shownameserver(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
setnetwork(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setnetwork - configure a network interface using by XSCF
setnetwork [-m addr] interface address
setnetwork -c {up | down} interface
setnetwork -h
DESCRIPTION
setnetwork(8) command configures a network interface using by XSCF.
The following settings can be made for the specified network interface:
■
Whether to enable or disable the network interface.
■
IP address
■
Netmask
An IP address and netmask become valid immediately after being set.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c {up|down}
Specifies whether to enable the specified network interface. One
of the following values can be specified. If none of them is
specified, an error occurs.
up
Enables the network interface.
down
Disables the network interface.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-m addr
Specifies a netmask. If the -m option is omitted, the netmask
corresponding to address is set. The following addr form is
accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
System Administration
193
setnetwork(8)
OPERANDS
194
The following operands are supported:
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setnetwork(8)
address
Specifies an IP address. The specified value is a set of four integer
values delimited by the period (.). The following address form is
accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx
interface
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
Specifies the network interface to be configured. One of the
following values can be specified:
■
For midrange server:
For XSCF unit 0:
xscf#0-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#0-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
xscf#0-if
Interface between XSCF units (Inter SCF
Network; ISN)
For abbreviation:
lan#0
an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#0
lan#1
an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#1
■
For high-end server:
For XSCF unit 0:
xscf#0-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#0-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
xscf#0-if
Interface between XSCF units (Inter SCF
Network; ISN)
For XSCF unit 1 (when a duplicated configuration is used):
xscf#1-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#1-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
xscf#1-if
ISN
For takeover IP address:
lan#0
takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#0
lan#1
takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#1
System Administration
195
setnetwork(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
■
When the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration in the high-end server, a
takeover IP address can be used without a need to determine whether XSCF has
been switched. By setting the LAN ports of the active XSCF unit as lan#0 and
lan#1, they can be accessed with the names lan#0 and lan#1. As default
values, lan#0 is set to xscf#0-lan#0 and lan#1 is set to xscf#0-lan#1.
■
In the midrange server, the value of the lan#0 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#0, and
the lan#1 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#1.
■
If you disable the network interface before executing the applynetwork(8)
command to save it to XSCF, all the configured network interfaces will be
cleared.
■
For XSCF-LAN#0 and XSCF-LAN#1, do not set the same subnet.
■
In the following cases, the setnetwork(8) command results in an error:
■
■
When specified the same IP address as DSCP
■
When specified a subnet which overlaps with DSCP
■
When specified a subnet which overlaps between XSCF#0-if or xscf#1-if and
the other interface
■
When specified the -c {up|down} option and ISN together
In case you specified the IP address and the netmask to the interfaces other than
ISN and when the ISN is not configured, the following default value will be set:
■
xscf#0-if:
IP address: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 255.255.255.0
■
xscf#1-if:
IP address: 192.168.1.2 Netmask: 255.255.255.0
EXAMPLES
■
The shownetwork(8) command can display current information on a network
interface configured for XSCF.
■
To reflect information on the specified network interface, execute the
applynetwork(8) command and reset XSCF.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets the IP address 192.168.10.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for XSCF-LAN#0
on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.10
EXAMPLE 2
Sets the IP address 192.168.10.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for XSCF-LAN#0
on XSCF unit 0 in the midrange system.
XSCF> setnetwork lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.10
196
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setnetwork(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Disables XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-lan#1 -c down
EXAMPLE 4
Sets the IP address 192.168.10.128 on ISN on the XSCF unit 0. By default,
255.255.255.0 is set for the netmask.
XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-if 192.168.10.128
EXAMPLE 5
Sets the IP address 192.168.11.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for XSCF-LAN#0
on XSCF unit 1.
XSCF> setnetwork xscf#1-lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.11.10
EXAMPLE 6
Sets the IP address 192.168.1.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for the takeover IP
address of XSCF-LAN#0.
XSCF> setnetwork lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.10
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
applynetwork(8), shownetwork(8)
System Administration
197
setnetwork(8)
198
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setntp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setntp - set the NTP information for XSCF
setntp [-c add] address ...
setntp -c del address ...
setntp -c del -a
setntp -c stratum -i stratum_no
setntp -h
DESCRIPTION
setntp(8) command sets the NTP information for XSCF.
The setntp(8) command can specify the following information:
■
In case XSCF is regarded as the NTP client:
The NTP servers which are used on the XSCF network. Up to three NTP servers
can be registered for the XSCF network. Any attempt to register four or more
servers causes an error.
■
In case XSCF is regarded as the NTP server:
The stratum value which has been set to XSCF.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a
Deletes all the NTP servers that are currently registered. This
option is used with the "-c del".
-c add
Adds the host with the specified address or the host as an NTP
server. This option is used together with address. If the -c option
is omitted, "-c add" is used. When an NTP server is registered,
the existing setting is deleted and overwriting is performed with
the specified address.
-c del
Deletes the host with the specified address or the host from the
NTP servers. If the -c option is omitted, "-c add" is assumed
specified.
-c stratum
Sets the stratum value in case you regard XSCF as an NTP server.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-i stratum_no
Specifies the stratum value. This option is used together with the
"-c stratum". An integer from 1 to 15 can be specified. If the
stratum value not specified, it is 5.
System Administration
199
setntp(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
address
Specifies the IP address or host name of an NTP server to be
added or deleted. Up to three IP addresses or XSCF host names
can be specified by delimited the spaces.
A specified IP address is a set of four integer values delimited by
the period(.). The following address form is accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
Do not use the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) format to
specify an XSCF host name, but specify only a host name. The
host name can be specified in the format that complies with RFC
1034.
If "-c add" is specified and address is omitted, an error occurs.
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
■
If multiple NTP servers are specified, the NTP server specified first has priority
over the others.
■
In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the setting automatically
reflected to the standby XSCF. When there's a defect on the standby XSCF, it
leads to an error.
■
To apply the specified configuration, execute the rebootxscf(8) command and
reset XSCF.
■
After resetting the XSCF, the time of XSCF will be synchronized with the time of
NTP server.
■
When an NTP server set to XSCF, the time of the domain may be changed. If
necessary, set the time of the domain.
■
The currently set NTP server can be checked by using the showntp(8) command.
EXAMPLE 1
Adds the three NTP servers with the addresses 192.168.1.2, 10.18.108.10, and
10.24.1.2.
XSCF> setntp 192.168.1.2 10.18.108.10 10.24.1.2
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.
EXAMPLE 2
Deletes the NTP server 10.18.108.10.
XSCF> setntp -c del 10.18.108.10
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.
200
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setntp(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Adds the two NTP servers ntp1.examples.com and ntp2.example.com.
XSCF> setntp ntp1.example.com ntp2.example.com
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.
EXAMPLE 4
Sets the stratum value to 7, when you regard XSCF as an NTP server.
XSCF> setntp -c stratum -i 7
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
rebootxscf(8), showntp(8)
System Administration
201
setntp(8)
202
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setpasswordpolicy(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setpasswordpolicy - manage the system password policy
setpasswordpolicy [-d dcredit] [ -e expiry] [-i inactive] [-k difok] [-l lcredit] [
-M maxdays] [-m minlen] [-n mindays] [-o ocredit] [-r remember] [-u ucredit] [-w
warn] [-y retry]
setpasswordpolicy -h
DESCRIPTION
setpasswordpolicy(8) allows an administrator to change the system password
policy. These policies are enforced by XSCF on the Service Processor. The new
password policy applies only to users added after the setpasswordpolicy command
is executed.
The following parameters control creation of new user accounts: expiry, inactive,
maxdays, mindays, and warn. When a user is created, the adduser(8) command uses
these parameters as the password expiration settings for the new account. The
password(8) command can be used to change the password expiration settings for
an existing account.
Privileges
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d dcredit
Sets maximum number of digits in a password. Each digit counts
as one credit. The minimum acceptable password length is
decreased by one for each digit in the password, up to dcredit
digits. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The
initial setting is 1.
-e expiry
Sets the number of days a new account will be valid before
expiring and becoming disabled. This value is assigned to new
user accounts when they are created. The initial value is 0. A zero
means that the account will not expire. Valid values are integers
with value of zero or greater.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-i inactive
Sets the number of days after a password expires until the account
is locked. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they
are created. The initial value is –1. A value of –1 means that the
account will not be locked after the password expires. Valid values
are integers with value of –1 or greater.
System Administration
203
setpasswordpolicy(8)
-k difok
Sets the minimum number of new characters (characters which
were not present in the old password) that a new password must
contain. The initial setting is 3.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-l lcredit
Sets the maximum credit for lower case letters in a password. The
minimum acceptable password length is decreased by one for each
digit in the password, up to lcredit digits.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The initial
setting is 1.
-M maxdays
Sets the maximum number of days that a password is valid. This
value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created.The
initial value is 999999.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-m minlen
Sets the minimum size for a new password.
Note – minlen cannot be set less than 6.
Valid values are integers with value of 6 or greater.
-n mindays
Sets the minimum number of days between password changes. An
initial value of zero for this field indicates that you can change the
password at any time.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-o ocredit
Sets the maximum credit for nonalphanumeric characters in a
password. The minimum acceptable password length is decreased
by one for each digit in the password, up to ocredit digits.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The initial
setting is 1.
-r remember
Sets the number of passwords remembered in the password
history.
The maximum valid value is 10. The initial setting is 3.
204
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setpasswordpolicy(8)
-k difok
Sets the minimum number of new characters (characters which
were not present in the old password) that a new password must
contain. The initial setting is 3.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-l lcredit
Sets the maximum credit for lower case letters in a password. The
minimum acceptable password length is decreased by one for each
digit in the password, up to lcredit digits.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The initial
setting is 1.
-M maxdays
Sets the maximum number of days that a password is valid. This
value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created.The
initial value is 999999.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-m minlen
Sets the minimum size for a new password.
Note – minlen cannot be set less than 6.
Valid values are integers with value of 6 or greater.
-n mindays
Sets the minimum number of days between password changes. An
initial value of zero for this field indicates that you can change the
password at any time.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-o ocredit
Sets the maximum credit for nonalphanumeric characters in a
password. The minimum acceptable password length is decreased
by one for each digit in the password, up to ocredit digits.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The initial
setting is 1.
-r remember
Sets the number of passwords remembered in the password
history.
The maximum valid value is 10. The initial setting is 3.
System Administration
205
setpasswordpolicy(8)
-u ucredit
Sets the maximum credit for uppercase letters in a password. The
minimum acceptable password length is decreased by one for each
digit in the password, up to ucredit digits.
The initial setting is 1.
-w warn
Sets the default number of days before password expiration at
which to start warning the user. This value is assigned to new user
accounts when they are created. The initial value is 7.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
-y retry
Sets the number of retries permitted when using the password
command to change the password for a user account. The initial
value is 3.
Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Setting the Minimum Size and Number of Passwords Remembered
XSCF> setpasswordpolicy -m 12 -r 5
EXAMPLE 2
Setting Minimum Password Length and Maximum Credits
XSCF> setpasswordpolicy -m 10 -d 1 -u 0 -l 0 -o 1
After running this command, the minimum password length for new passwords is
10 characters. A password of 9 characters is accepted if it contains at least one digit
or nonalphanumeric character. A password of 8 characters is accepted if it contains
a digit and a nonalphanumeric character.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
206
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
adduser(8), password(8), showpasswordpolicy(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setpowerupdelay(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setpowerupdelay - set the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system
startup
setpowerupdelay -c warmup -s time
setpowerupdelay -c wait -s time
setpowerupdelay -h
DESCRIPTION
The setpowerupdelay(8) command sets the warm-up time of the system and wait
time before system startup.
The wait time before system startup can be used to control the system startup time
so that the system is started only after air-conditioning makes the temperature of
the computer room suitable. If the system power has already been turned on and
the system is operating, the setting takes effect at the next startup.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-c warmup
Specifies the warm-up time.
-c wait
Specifies the wait time before system startup.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-s time
Specifies the warm-up time or wait time before system startup in
minutes. An integer ranging from 0 to 255 can be specified for
time.
■
The currently set warm-up time and wait time before system startup can be
checked by using the showpowerupdelay(8) command.
■
When the power is turned on from the operator panel, the wait time and warmup time that you set are ignored. If you have set these times and wish to observe
them at startup, perform the poweron(8) command.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets the warm-up time to 10 minutes.
XSCF> setpowerupdelay -c warmup -s 10
EXAMPLE 2
Sets the wait time before system startup to 20 minutes.
XSCF> setpowerupdelay -c wait -s 20
System Administration
207
setpowerupdelay(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
208
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showpowerupdelay(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setprivileges(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setprivileges - assign user privileges
setprivileges user [ privileges] [ domainprivilege@ domains]
setprivileges -h
DESCRIPTION
setprivileges(8) assigns privileges to an XSCF user. setprivileges modifies
only local privileges data. Multiple privileges are separated by one or more spaces.
There is a maximum of 100 users to whom privileges can be assigned. A list of
privileges can be found in the OPERANDS section.
The privileges domainop, domainmgr, and domainadm must be assigned to a
specific domain. Other privileges do not have this ability. Refer to the OPERANDS
section and EXAMPLE 1 for details.
If no privileges are specified, setprivileges deletes any local privilege data for
the specified user. Subsequently, the user’s privilege data is looked up in
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), if LDAP privilege lookup is
enabled.
If the none privilege is specified, the specified user does not have any privileges,
regardless of privilege data in LDAP.
Privileges
OPTIONS
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
The following option is supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
System Administration
209
setprivileges(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
domainprivilege@domains
Specifies domainadm, domainmgr, or domainop privileges for a specific
domain or domains.
The following are valid values for domainprivilege, each of which must be
used with @domains:
domainadm
Can perform all operations and view status on the
hardware assigned to the domains on which this
privilege is held (assign, unassign, power, and so on).
Can perform all operations on domains on which this
privilege is held. Can view all states of domains on
which this privilege is held.
domainmgr
Can reboot and power on and off all domains on which
this privilege is held. Can view all states of all hardware
assigned to the domains on which this privilege is held.
Can view all states of domains on which this privilege is
held.
domainop
Can view all states of all the hardware assigned to the
domains on which this privilege is held. Can view all
states of all domains on which this privilege is held.
domains
Specifies a domain or domains, using the appropriate
value for domainprivilege with the @ symbol and the
domains descriptor:
To specify a single domain, use the @ symbol followed
by a single domain number. Example: domainadm@3.
To specify a range of domains, use a dash
(–) to indicate to start and end of the domains in the
range, inclusive. Example: domainadm@3–4.
To specify multiple single domains and multiple domain
ranges, separate the domains or domain ranges with
commas. Do not repeat domains or cause them to
overlap or an error will result. Example: domainadm@1–
2,4.
privileges
210
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setprivileges(8)
The following are valid values for privileges:
auditadm
Can configure auditing. Can delete audit trail.
auditop
Can view all audit state and audit trail.
fieldeng
Can perform all operations reserved for field engineers
and authorized service personnel.
none
Cannot perform any operations on the Service Processor
that require privilege, even if privileges are set for the
user in LDAP. This privilege allows the administrator to
restrict access to such operations on the Service
Processor and domains.
platadm
Can perform all Service Processor configuration other
than the useradm and auditadm tasks. Can assign and
unassign hardware from domains, perform domain and
XSCF power operations and all operations on domain
hardware (assign, unassign, power, and so on). Can
perform Service Processor failover operations and view
all platform states.
platop
Can view all platform states but not perform any
modifications.
useradm
Can create, delete, disable, or enable user accounts. Can
change a user’s password and password properties (for
example, expiry). Can modify a user’s privileges.
user
Specifies a valid user name.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Setting Privileges for JSmith
XSCF> setprivileges jsmith platadm domainadm@1–4,6,9
EXAMPLE 2
Removing All Privileges for JSmith
XSCF> setprivileges jsmith none
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
211
setprivileges(8)
SEE ALSO
212
setpasswordpolicy(8), showuser(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setroute(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setroute - set routing information for an XSCF network interface
setroute -c {add | del} -n address [-m address] [-g address] interface
setroute -h
DESCRIPTION
setroute(8) command sets routing information for an XSCF network interface.
Up to eight routing information items can be registered for each network interface.
Any attempt to register more than eight items causes an error.
Privileges
You must have platadm privilege to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c {add|del}
-g address
Specifies a function for routing information. One of the following
values can be specified. If none of them is specified, an error
occurs.
add
Adds routing information.
del
Deletes routing information.
Specifies a gateway address used for routing. The specified value
of address is a set of four integer values delimited by the period
(.). If this option is omitted, the gateway address is not set.The
following address form is accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
System Administration
213
setroute(8)
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-m address
Specifies the netmask to which routing information is forwarded.
The specified value is a set of four integer values delimited by
the period (.). The following address form is accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
If the -m option is omitted and the -n option is used to specify
the network address (containing "0" in the default host address
which depends on the class), the following netmask value is set,
according to the class of the network address:
class
Mask value
A
255.0.0.0
B
255.255.0.0
C
255.255.255.0
If the -m option is omitted and the host address specified by the
-n option, netmask is not set.
If "0.0.0.0" specified by the -n option, netmask is invalid.
If specified with the "-c del" option, this option can't be omitted.
-n address
Specifies an IP address to which routing information is
forwarded. The specified value is a set of four integer values
delimited by the period (.). It is specified in the format shown
below. If this option is omitted, it is automatically set by XSCF.
The following address form is accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
If "0.0.0.0" is specified for address, the default routing information
can be set.
214
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setroute(8)
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
interface
Specifies the network interface to be set with routing
information. One of the following values can be specified:
■
For midrange server:
For XSCF unit 0:
xscf#0-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#0-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
For abbreviation:
lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
■
For high-end server:
For XSCF unit 0:
xscf#0-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#0-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
For XSCF unit 1 (when a duplicated configuration is used):
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
xscf#1-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#1-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
■
If the specified address is the same as the DSCP address, an error occurs.
■
For XSCF-LAN#0 and XSCF-LAN#1, do not set the routing to the same network
or the same host.
■
To reflect the routing information to XSCF, execute the applynetwork(8)
command. After reflected the information, use the rebootxscf(8) command to
reset XSCF to complete the setting.
■
The showroute(8) command can display the current routing information that is
set for the XSCF network.
EXAMPLE 1
Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for
XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0 xscf#0-lan#0
EXAMPLE 2
Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and gateway 192.168.1.1 for
System Administration
215
setroute(8)
XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.0 -g 192.168.1.1 xscf#0-lan#1
EXAMPLE 3
Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and default netmask
(255.255.255.0) for XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.0 xscf#0-lan#1
EXAMPLE 4
Deletes the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and default netmask
(255.255.255.0) from XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setroute -c del -n 192.168.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0 xscf#0-lan#1
EXAMPLE 5
Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1. 4 for XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.4 xscf#0-lan#1
EXAMPLE 6
Deletes the routing of destination 192.168.1. 4 from XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF
unit 0.
XSCF> setroute -c del -n 192.168.1.4 xscf#0-lan#1
EXAMPLE 7
Adds routing information for the default gateway 192.168.10.1 for XSCFLAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> setroute -c add -n 0.0.0.0 -g 192.168.10.1 xscf#0-lan#1
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
216
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
applynetwork(8), rebootxscf(8), showroute(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setshutdowndelay(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setshutdowndelay - set the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the
uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
setshutdowndelay -s time
setshutdowndelay -h
DESCRIPTION
The setshutdowndelay(8) command sets the wait time before the start of system
shutdown for when power interruption occurs in a system connected to the UPS.
The start of system shutdown can be delayed until the specified time. When power
recovery is reported from the UPS within the specified time, shutdown will not
occur.
If the setshutdowndelay(8) command is executed with no options, the wait time
currently set is displayed.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-s time
Specifies the wait time before the start of shutdown in units of
seconds. Specify an integer number ranging from 0 to 9999 for
time. The default value is 10 seconds.
The currently set wait time can be displayed by using the showshutdowndelay(8)
command.
EXAMPLE 1
Sets 600 seconds as the wait time before the start of shutdown.
XSCF> setshutdowndelay -s 600
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showshutdowndelay(8)
System Administration
217
setshutdowndelay(8)
218
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setsmtp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setsmtp - set up the SMTP settings
setsmtp [-v]
setsmtp [-s variable= value]...
setsmtp -h
DESCRIPTION
setsmtp(8) sets up the SMTP configuration values.
When used without options, you will be prompted to provide the name of the
SMTP email server to be used. You will also be prompted for the port and the
Reply-To address to be used on outgoing email. Make sure that a valid email
address is specified here. You can set up SMTP settings noninteractively using the
-s option.
After you have set up the email server and port have been set up using
setsmtp(8), you can use setemailreport(8) to set up email report configuration
data and send a test email message.
Privileges
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
219
setsmtp(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
-s variable=value
Sets SMTP.
Valid entries for variable are:
mailserver
port
auth
user
password
replyaddress
Where:
auth is the authentication mechanism.
user/password are the smtp mail server authentication.
Valid auth entries are:
none
pop
smtp-auth
Specifies verbose output.
-v
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Setting Up Mailserver and No Authentication in Noninteractive Mode
XSCF> setsmtp -s mailserver=10.4.1.1 -s auth=none
EXAMPLE 2
Setting Up Authentication in Noninteractive Mode
XSCF> setsmtp -s auth=pop -s user=jsmith -s password=******
EXAMPLE 3
Setting Up SMTP Authentication in Interactive Mode
XSCF> setsmtp
Mail Server [10.4.1.1]:
Port [25]:
220
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setsmtp(8)
Authentication Mechanism [none]: smtp-auth
User Name []: jsmith
Password []: ******
Reply Address [[email protected]]:
EXAMPLE 4
Setting Up Mailserver With Invalid Authentication Mechanism
XSCF> setsmtp
Mail Server [10.4.1.1]:
Port [25]:
Authentication Mechanism [none]: ?
Invalid value ’?’. Valid authentication mechanism are: none pop smtp-auth
Authentication Mechanism [none]:
Reply Address [[email protected]]:
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setemailreport(8), showsmtp(8)
System Administration
221
setsmtp(8)
222
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setsnmp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setsnmp - manage the SNMP agent
setsnmp enable [ mib_name]
setsnmp disable [ mib_name]
setsnmp addtraphost -t type -s community-string [-p trap-port] traphost
setsnmp remtraphost -t type traphost
setsnmp addv3traphost -u username -r authentication-protocol {-n engine_id|-i} [
-a authentication-password] [ -e encryption-password] [-p trap-port ] traphost
setsnmp remv3traphost -u username traphost
setsnmp enablev1v2c read-only-community-string
setsnmp disablev1v2c
setsnmp [-l system-location] [-c system-contact] [-d system-description] [-p agentport]
setsnmp -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
setsnmp(8) enables or disables the SNMP Agent, as well as configures the SNMP
agent settings.
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c system-contact
Specifies the system contact information for the agent.
-d system-description
Specifies the system description for the agent.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
-l system-location
Specifies the system location for the agent.
-p agent-port
Specifies the listening port for the agent. The default is
161.
-s community-string
Acts like a password to control access to the SNMP v1 and
v2 agents. It is a clear text string which can be intercepted.
For password encryption and no visibility, use
addv3traphost instead.
System Administration
223
setsnmp(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
addtraphost
Enables the SNMP agent to send the chosen type of trap to the
desired host. If no trap-port is provided, the default is 162. A
community string is mandatory.
addtraphost takes the following options and operand:
-p trap-port
ID of the trap port. Default value
is 162.
-s community-string
Acts like a password to control
access to the SNMP v1 and v2
agents. It is a clear text string
which can be intercepted. For
password encryption and no
visibility, use addv3traphost
instead.
-t type
Type of trap. Valid trap types are:
v1 = The agent will send SNMPv1 traps
v2 = The agent will send SNMPv2 traps
inform = The agent will send inform notifications
traphost
224
Host name of the trap host.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setsnmp(8)
addv3traphost Enables the SNMP agent to send SNMPv3 traps or informs to the
desired host. An authentication protocol must be chosen. Valid
protocols are:
MD5 = Uses the MD5 algorithm for authentication
SHA = Uses SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) for authentication
The encryption protocol used in all communication is DES (Data
Encryption Standard). If the password option is not used, you
will be prompted for a password. Passwords will be read but not
echoed to the screen. addv3traphost takes the following
options:
-a authentication-password
Sets the authentication password. Must be equal to or greater than 8
characters.
-e encryption-password
Sets the encryption password.
-i
Asks for an acknowledgment from the receiving host.
-n engine_id
Sets identifier of the local agent sending the trap. It can be the
engine ID of the local SNMP agent or not but it must match the
engine ID expected by the receiving host. Must start with “0x” and
should consist of even hexadecimal characters or you will get an
error.
-p trap-port
ID of the trap port. Default value is 162.
-r authentication-protocol
Sets the authentication protocol.
traphost
Host name of the trap host.
-u username
Specifies a valid user name.
System Administration
225
setsnmp(8)
disable
When used alone, stops the SNMP agent.
When used with the value ALL for the optional mib_name, stops
the SNMP agent.
When used with a value other than ALL for the optional
mib_name, removes support for the targeted MIB module. If
support remains for another MIB module, the SNMP agent
remains enabled. If support for both MIB modules is removed,
the SNMP agent is disabled and, therefore, stops. You can specify
only one value at a time for mib_name.
mib_name
Name of the MIB module to be disabled.
Valid MIB modules are:
SP_MIB = OPL-SP-MIB
FM_MIB = SUN-FM-MIB
ALL = All the MIB modules in this list.
disablev1v2c
Disables the SNMP agent from communicating using SNMPv1/
v2c. These versions provide insecure SNMP communication.
enable
When used alone, activates the SNMP agent with support for all
MIB modules.
When used with the value ALL for the optional mib_name,
activates the SNMP agent with support for all MIB modules.
When used with a value other than ALL for the optional
mib_name, adds support for the targeted MIB module and, if
necessary, activates the SNMP agent. You can specify only one
value at a time for mib_name.
mib_name
Name of the MIB module to be enabled.
Valid MIB modules are:
SP_MIB = OPL-SP-MIB
FM_MIB = SUN-FM-MIB
ALL = All the MIB modules in this list.
enablev1v2c
226
Enables the SNMP agent to communicate using SNMPv1/v2c.
These versions provide insecure SNMP communication, which is
why the agent runs SNMPv3 by default. This agent is read-only.
The only community string asked for is read-only.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setsnmp(8)
remtraphost
Disables the SNMP agent from sending the chosen type of trap to
the desired host.
-t type
Type of trap. Valid trap types are:
v1 = The agent will send SNMPv1 traps
v2 = The agent will send SNMPv2 traps
inform = The agent will send inform notifications
traphost
Host name of the trap host.
remv3traphost Disables the SNMP agent from sending SNMPv3 traps to the
desired host.
traphost
Host name of the trap host.
-u username
Specifies a valid user name.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Setting Up System Information
XSCF> setsnmp -l sandiego -c [email protected] -d ff1
EXAMPLE 2
Setting Up and SNMPv3 Trap Host With Password Options
XSCF> setsnmp addv3traphost -u jsmith -n 0x### -r SHA -a xxxxxxxx
-e yyyyyyyy fiche
EXAMPLE 3
Setting Up and SNMPv3 Trap Host without Password Options
XSCF> setsnmp addv3traphost -u bob -i -r SHA fiche
Authentication Password:
Encryption Password:
EXAMPLE 4
Starting the Agent
XSCF> setsnmp enable SP_MIB
System Administration
227
setsnmp(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
228
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showsnmp(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setsnmpusm(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setsnmpusm - specify the SNMPv3 agent’s User-based Security Model (USM)
configuration
setsnmpusm create -a authentication_protocol [-p authentication_password] [ -e
encyrption_password] user
setsnmpusm delete user
setsnmpusm clone -u clone_user user
setsnmpusm passwd [-c { auth|encrypt}] [ -o old_password] [ -n new_password]
user
setsnmpusm -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
setsnmpusm(8) modifies the SNMP Agent’s USM configuration.
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
System Administration
229
setsnmpusm(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
clone
230
Makes the supplied user known to the agent for subsequent
SNMP communication with the identical settings as the specified
clone_user.
-u clone_user
Specifies a valid user name of the user
settings to be cloned.
user
Specifies a different user name for the clone
of clone_user.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setsnmpusm(8)
create
Makes the supplied user known to the agent for subsequent
SNMP communication. When used without the -a or -p options,
create displays a prompt for passwords and reads them without
echoing them to the screen. The encryption protocol used in all
SNMP communication is Data Encryption Standard (DES). An
authentication protocol must be chosen for SNMP
communication. Possible values are MD5 Algorithm and Secure
Hash Algorithm (SHA).
user
Specifies a valid user name.
-a authentication_protocol
Specifies the authentication protocol.
-e encryption_password
Specifies the encryption password. Must be equal to or greater than
8 characters.
-p authentication_password
Specifies the authentication password. Must be equal to or greater
than 8 characters.
delete
Removes the supplied user making the user unknown to the
agent for subsequent SNMP communication.
user
passwd
Specifies a valid user name.
Changes the appropriate password for the specified user. The
changed password is either the authentication password or the
encrypted password, or both, if -c is not used. If -c is not used
then both passwords must be the same or an error is generated.
With no options, password displays a prompt for the passwords
and reads them without echoing them to the screen.
-c auth|encrypt
Specifies whether to change the
authentication password or the
encrypted password.
-n new_password
Specifies the new password. The
password must be equal to or
greater than 8 characters.
-o old_password
Specifies the old password.
user
Specifies a valid user name.
System Administration
231
setsnmpusm(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Adding a User With Password Options
XSCF> setsnmpusm create -a SHA -p xxxxxxxx -e yyyyyyyy jsmith
EXAMPLE 2
Adding a User Without Specifying Password Options
XSCF> setsnmpusm create -a SHA bob
Authetication Password:
Encryption Password:
EXAMPLE 3
Cloning a User
XSCF> setsnmpusm clone -u sue joe
Authentication Password:
Encryption Password:
EXAMPLE 4
Deleting a User
XSCF> setsnmpusm delete joe
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
232
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showsnmpusm(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setsnmpvacm(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setsnmpvacm - modify the SNMPv3 agent’s View-based Access Control Model
(VACM) configuration
setsnmpvacm creategroup -u username groupname
setsnmpvacm deletegroup -u username groupname
setsnmpvacm createview -s OID_subtree [-e] [-m
OID_Mask] viewname
setsnmpvacm deleteview -s OID_subtree viewname
setsnmpvacm createaccess -r read_viewname groupname
setsnmpvacm deleteaccess groupname
setsnmpvacm -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
setsnmpvacm(8) modifies the SNMP Agent’s VACM configuration. Using this
command requires a basic knowledge of SNMP.
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
System Administration
233
setsnmpvacm(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
createaccess
creategroup
createview
deleteaccess
Sets access to a MIB view for the specified group.
-r read_viewname
Specifies an SNMP Agent view.
groupname
Specifies a valid group name.
Sets up a group for the specified user for view access.
-u username
Specifies a valid user name.
groupname
Specifies a valid group name.
Sets up a view of the SNMP Agent exported MIB information.
View access is limited to read-only for this Agent. The view is
identified through a MIB OID subtree and can be limited to
specific portions of that subtree using the OID Mask.
-e
Specifies an excluded view. The default is an
included view.
-m OID_Mask
Specifies a valid OID subtree mask. By
default, the mask is ff (entire subtree).
-s OID_subtree
Specifies a MIB OID subtree. Values start at
.1 for the entire MIB tree.
viewname
Specifies a valid view name.
Removes access entry.
groupname
deletegroup
deleteview
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Specifies a valid group name.
Removes a group from use.
-u username
Specifies a valid user name.
groupname
Specifies a valid group name.
Removes this view from use.
-s OID_subtree
Specifies a MIB OID subtree. Values start at
.1 for the entire MIB tree.
viewname
Specifies a valid view name.
Create a Group
XSCF> setsnmpvacm creategroup -u jsmith admin
234
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setsnmpvacm(8)
EXAMPLE 2
Create a View of the Entire MIB
XSCF> setsnmpvacm createview -s .1 all_view
EXAMPLE 3
Create a View Where the Subtree Is Excluded
XSCF> setsnmpvacm createview -e -s .1.3.6.1.2.1.1 -m fe excl_view
EXAMPLE 4
Create Access
XSCF> setsnmpvacm createaccess -r all admin
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
showsnmpvacm(8)
System Administration
235
setsnmpvacm(8)
236
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setssh(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setssh - set the SSH service used in the XSCF network. Also, generate the host
public key, and register or delete the user public key, which are necessary for the
SSH service.
setssh [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c enable
setssh -c disable
setssh -c addpubkey [-u user_name]
setssh -c delpubkey {-a | -s line } [-u user_name]
setssh [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c genhostkey
setssh -h
DESCRIPTION
setssh(8) command starts or stops the SSH service used in the XSCF network.
Also, generates the host public key, and registers or deletes the user public key,
which are necessary for the SSH service.
If a host public key already exists when a new host public key is to be generated, an
update confirmation prompt about the existing key is displayed.
The user public key can be registered on each user account. Per user account,
multiple user public keys can be registered. Per user account, the user public keys
can be registered up to 1,023 characters including the linefeed.
Only SSH2 is supported for XSCF.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
■
To start or stop the SSH service, and to generate the host public key:
platadm
■
To register or delete the user public key of other user account:
useradm
■
To register or delete the user public key of the current login user account:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a
Deletes all registered user public keys. Should be specified
with "-c delpubkey."
-c addpubkey
Registers the user public key.
-c delpubkey
Deletes the user public key.
System Administration
237
setssh(8)
-c {enable|disable} Specifies whether to enable the SSH service. One of the
following values can be specified:
OPERANDS
238
Starts the SSH2 service.
disable
Stops the SSH2 service.
-c genhostkey
Generates a host public key for SSH2.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options
or operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-s line
Specifies the user public key number to delete. For line,
specify the number which displayed after the showssh -c
pubkey command executed. Should be specified with "-c
delpubkey."
-u user_name
Specifies the user account name to register or delete the
user public key. Should be specified with "-c addpubkey"
or "-c delpubkey." When the -u option omitted, the user
public key of the current login user account becomes the
target.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
The following operand is supported:
genhostkey
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
enable
Generates a host public key for SSH2.
■
When a host public key is created, a prompt to confirm execution of the
command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the
command or "n" to cancel the command.
■
The setssh(8) command can register one user public key at a time.
■
In time of setssh(8) command execution, finish the input of user public key by
pressing Enter and then pressing Ctrl+D (EOF).
■
In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the setting automatically
reflected to the standby XSCF. When there is a defect on the standby XSCF, it
leads to an error and the setting will be reflected to the active XSCF only.
■
The information which has been set will be reflected by using the
rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF.
■
The current SSH service settings can be checked by using the showssh(8)
command.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setssh(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Starts the SSH service.
XSCF> setssh -c enable
Continue? [y|n] :y
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.
EXAMPLE 2
Starts the SSH service. Automatically replies with 'y' to the prompt.
XSCF> setssh -y -c enable
Continue? [y|n] :y
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.
EXAMPLE 3
Starts the SSH service. Automatically replies with 'y' without displaying the
prompt.
XSCF> setssh -q -y -c enable
EXAMPLE 4
Stops the SSH service.
XSCF> setssh -c disable
EXAMPLE 5
Generates a host public key for SSH.
XSCF> setssh -c genhostkey
Host key create. Continue? [y|n] :y
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.
EXAMPLE 6
Generates a host public key for SSH. Automatically replies with 'y' to the
prompt.
XSCF> setssh -c genhostkey -y
Host key create. Continue? [y|n] :y
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.
EXAMPLE 7
Generates a host public key for SSH. Automatically replies with 'y' without
displaying the prompt.
XSCF> setssh -c genhostkey -q -y
EXAMPLE 8
Registers the user public key. Finish the input of public key by pressing En-
System Administration
239
setssh(8)
ter and then pressing Ctrl+D.
XSCF> setssh -c addpubkey
Please input a public key:
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid
QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/
FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK
P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected]
[Enter]
[Ctrl+D]
EXAMPLE 9
Registers the user public key by specifying the user name. Finish the input of
public key by pressing Enter and then pressing Ctrl+D.
XSCF> setssh -c addpubkey -u efgh
Please input a public key:
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid
QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/
FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK
P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected]
[Enter]
[Ctrl+D]
EXAMPLE 10
Specifies the public key number to delete the user public key.
XSCF> setssh -c delpubkey -s 1
1
ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid
QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/
FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK
P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected]
EXAMPLE 11
Deletes all user public keys.
XSCF> setssh -c delpubkey -a
240
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setssh(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
rebootxscf(8), showssh(8)
System Administration
241
setssh(8)
242
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
settelnet(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
settelnet - start or stop the Telnet service used in the XSCF network
settelnet -c {enable | disable}
settelnet -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
settelnet(8) command starts or stops the Telnet service used in the XSCF
network.
You must have platadm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c {enable|disable} Specify whether to start the Telnet service. One of the
following values can be specified. If none of them is
specified, an error occurs.
EXAMPLES
Starts the Telnet service.
disable
Stops the Telnet service.
Displays usage statement. When used with other options
or operands, an error occurs.
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
enable
■
In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the setting automatically
reflected to the standby XSCF. When there's a defect on the standby XSCF, it
leads to an error and the setting will be reflected to the active XSCF only.
■
In case you stop the Telnet service, it will be reflected by using the
rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF.
■
The current Telnet service state can be checked by using the showtelnet(8)
command.
EXAMPLE 1
Starts the Telnet service.
XSCF> settelnet -c enable
EXAMPLE 2
Stops the Telnet service.
XSCF> settelnet -c disable
Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the telnet settings.
System Administration
243
settelnet(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
244
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
rebootxscf(8), showtelnet(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
settimezone(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
settimezone - set the time zone and Daylight Saving Time of XSCF
settimezone -c settz -s timezone
settimezone -c settz -a [-M]
settimezone -c adddst -b std -o offset -d dst [-p offset] -f date [ /time] -t date
[ /time]
settimezone -c deldst -b std -o offset
settimezone -h
DESCRIPTION
The settimezone(8) command sets the time zone and Daylight Saving Time of
XSCF.
The time zone is pursuant to POSIX standard.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a
Lists the time zones that can be set.
-c settz
Sets the time zone which complies with POSIX standards.
-c adddst
Manually sets the time zone and Daylight Saving Time.
-c deldst
Deletes the time zone and Daylight Saving Time.
-b std
Specifies the abbreviations of time zone. For std, specify an
abbreviation of 3 letters or more. You can specify it in the format
which complies with RFC2822. In case specified in combination
with "-c adddst," it will be linked with the time zone to be set.
When specified in combination with "-c deldst," the link with
the time zone which has been set will be cancelled.
-d dst
Specifies the name of Daylight Saving Time. For dst, specify the
alphabets of 3 letters or more. You can specify it in the format
which complies with RFC2822.
System Administration
245
settimezone(8)
-f date [/time]
Specifies the starting time of Daylight Saving Time. You can
specify date in any of the following formats.
Mm.w.d
Mm: Specifies the month to start Daylight Saving Time. For m,
you can specify any integer from 1 to 12.
w: Specifies the week to start Daylight Saving Time. You can
specify the integer from 1 to 5, "1" for the first week and "5"
for the last week in the month.
d: Specifies the day of the week to start Daylight Saving Time.
You can specify the integer from 0 to 6, "0" for Sunday and "6"
for Saturday.
Jn
Jn: Specifies the sequential day in the year to start Daylight
Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for
January 1st. It does not count the leap-year day.
n
n: Specifies the sequential day in the year to start Daylight
Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for
January 1st. It counts the leap-year day.
In time, you specify the time. You can specify it in the following
format.
hh:mm:ss
246
Specifies the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. hh is
00–23, mm is 00–59, ss is 00–60. In case
omitted, "02:00:00."
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
settimezone(8)
-f date [/time]
Specifies the starting time of Daylight Saving Time. You can
specify date in any of the following formats.
Mm.w.d
Mm: Specifies the month to start Daylight Saving Time. For m,
you can specify any integer from 1 to 12.
w: Specifies the week to start Daylight Saving Time. You can
specify the integer from 1 to 5, "1" for the first week and "5"
for the last week in the month.
d: Specifies the day of the week to start Daylight Saving Time.
You can specify the integer from 0 to 6, "0" for Sunday and "6"
for Saturday.
Jn
Jn: Specifies the sequential day in the year to start Daylight
Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for
January 1st. It does not count the leap-year day.
n
n: Specifies the sequential day in the year to start Daylight
Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for
January 1st. It counts the leap-year day.
In time, you specify the time. You can specify it in the following
format.
hh:mm:ss
Specifies the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. hh is
00–23, mm is 00–59, ss is 00–60. In case
omitted, "02:00:00."
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
System Administration
247
settimezone(8)
-o offset
Specifies the offset of time zone and Greenwich mean time
(GMT). You can specify offset in the following format.
GMT{+|–}hh[:mm[:ss]]
248
GMT
Greenwich mean time
{+|–}
Specifies "–" to set the standard time to the
time which is ahead of GMT. (To adjust to the
local time east to Greenwich, the offset is a
negative value.)Specifies "+" to set the
standard time to the time which is behind the
GMT. (To adjust to the local tome west to
Greenwich, the offset is a positive value.)
hh[:mm[:ss]]
Specifies the offset time. hh is 00–23, mm is
00–59, ss is 00–59.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
settimezone(8)
-p offset
Specifies the offset of Daylight Saving Time and Greenwich mean
time (GMT). You can specify offset in the following format. In
case omitted, it is 1 hour before the specified time.
GMT{+|–}hh[:mm[:ss]]
-s timezone
GMT
Greenwich mean time
{+|–}
Specifies "–" to set the standard time to the
time which is ahead of GMT. (To adjust to the
local time east to Greenwich, the offset is a
negative value.)Specifies "+" to set the
standard time to the time which is behind the
GMT. (To adjust to the local tome west to
Greenwich, the offset is a positive value.)
hh[:mm[:ss]]
Specifies the offset time. hh is 00–23, mm is
00–59, ss is 00–59.
Specifies the time zone. One of the time zone displayed by the -a
option can be specified for timezone.
System Administration
249
settimezone(8)
-t date [/time]
Specifies the termination time of Daylight Saving Time. You can
specify date in any of the following formats.
Mm.w.d
Mm: Specifies the month to terminate Daylight Saving Time.
For m, you can specify any integer from 1 to 12.
w: Specifies the week to terminate Daylight Saving Time. You
can specify the integer from 1 to 5, "1" for the first week and
"5" for the last week in the month.
d: Specifies the day of the week to terminate Daylight Saving
Time. You can specify the integer from 0 to 6, "0" for Sunday
and "6" for Saturday.
Jn
Jn: Specifies the sequential day in the year to terminate
Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to
365, "1" for January 1st. It does not count the leap-year day.
n
n: Specifies the sequential day in the year to terminate
Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to
365, "1" for January 1st. It counts the leap-year day.
In time, you specify the time. You can specify it in the following
format.
hh:mm:ss
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
250
Specifies the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. hh is
00–23, mm is 00–59, ss is 00–60. In case
omitted, "02:00:00."
■
You cannot specify the years of validity for time zone and Daylight Saving Time.
In case the Daylight Saving Time is changed each year, you need to set anew by
using the settimezone(8) command.
■
The addition of the offset time to the standard time which has been set by the
settimezone(8) command comes to GMT.
■
The current time zone settings can be checked by using the showtimezone(8)
command.
■
To reflect the Daylight Saving Time information which modified by -c adddst
or -c deldst option, log out and then log in again.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
settimezone(8)
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Sets "Asia/Tokyo" as the time zone.
XSCF> settimezone -c settz -s Asia/Tokyo
Asia/Tokyo
EXAMPLE 2
Lists the time zones that can be set.
XSCF> settimezone -c settz -a
Africa/Abidjan
Africa/Accra
Africa/Addis_Ababa
Africa/Algiers
Africa/Asmera
Africa/Bamako
Africa/Bangui
.
.
EXAMPLE 3
Sets the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: abbreviation of time
zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving Time is
JDT, Daylight Saving Time is 1 hour ahead, and the time period is from the
last Monday of March 2:00 to the last Sunday of October 2:00.
XSCF> settimezone -c adddst -b JST -o GMT-9 -d JDT -f M3.5.0 -t
M10.5.0
JST-9JDT,M3.5.0,M10.5.0
EXAMPLE 4
Sets the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: abbreviation of time
zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving Time is
JDT, the offset of Daylight Saving Time from GMT is +10, and the time period
is from the first Sunday of April 0:00 to the first Sunday of September 0:00.
XSCF> settimezone -c adddst -b JST -o GMT-9 -d JDT -p GMT-10 -f
M4.1.0/00:00:00 -t M9.1.0/00:00:00
JST-9JDT-10,M4.1.0/00:00:00,M9.1.0/00:00:00
EXAMPLE 5
Deletes the Daylight Saving Time information of current settings.
XSCF> settimezone -c deldst -b JST -o GMT-9
System Administration
251
settimezone(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
252
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setdate(8), showdate(8), showtimezone(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setupfru(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setupfru - set up device hardware
setupfru [-m {y | n}] [-x {1 | 4}] device location
setupfru -h
DESCRIPTION
The setupfru(8) command makes hardware settings for the specified device.
Only a physical system board (PSB) can be specified as a device. After a PSB is
added, the following settings can be specified for PSB:
Privileges
XSB type
To use an added PSB in the system, hardware resources on
the PSB must be logically divided and reconfigured as
eXtended System Boards (XSBs). Two types of XSB are
used: Uni-XSB and Quad-XSB. The Uni-XSB is configured
with undivided PSB, and the Quad-XSB is configured with
one of divided PSB into four parts. Specify either the UniXSB configuration or Quad-XSB configuration for the PSB.
Memory mirror mode
In mirror mode, data is mirrored by dividing the memory
mounted on a PSB into two parts. Since the memory is
divided into two parts, the memory capacity is halved, but
data reliability increases. Specify whether to operate the
memory in mirror mode.
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-m {y|n}
Specifies whether to use the memory mounted on the XSB in
mirror mode. Specify this option when sb is specified for device.
Specify y to enable mirror mode; otherwise, specify n. If the -m
option is omitted, the previous setting is inherited.
-x {1|4}
Specifies whether to configure PSB as a Uni-XSB or Quad-XSB.
Specify this option when sb is specified for device. Specify 1 for
Uni-XSB or specify 4 for Quad-XSB. If the -x option is omitted,
the previous setting is inherited.
System Administration
253
setupfru(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
device
Specifies the device to be set up. Only the following device can be
specified:
sb
location
Specifies the location of the device.
sb
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
Integer from 0–15. Specify only one location.
■
In a high-end server, the Quad-XSB configuration cannot be set in memory
mirror mode.
■
To set up an already mounted PSB again, all XSBs comprising the target PSB
must have been disconnected from the domain configuration and placed under
the system board pool. See the deleteboard(8) command for information on
how to disconnect XSBs from the domain configuration.
■
The configuration of the PSB varies according to the system as shown below.
■
In a high-end server, the PSB consists of one CPU memory board and one I/O
unit in combination.
■
In a midrange server, the PSB consists of one CPU module and one memory
module logically divided into two on the motherboard, and one I/O module.
The current PSB settings can be checked by using the showfru(8) command.
■
EXAMPLES
Physical system board (PSB)
EXAMPLE 1
Configures PSB#00 as a Quad-XSB (with memory in non-mirror mode because the memory mirror mode setting is omitted).
XSCF> setupfru -x 4 sb 0
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
254
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), showboards(8),
showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
setupplatform(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
setupplatform - set up platform specific settings
setupplatform [-v]
setupplatform [-v] -p part [-p part]
setupplatform -h
DESCRIPTION
The setupplatform(8) command sets up platform specific settings. The command
leads an administrator through Service Processor installation tasks.
By default, setupplatform command walks through each of the available
settings. Individual settings may be selected using the -p option.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
■
To use the -p user option: usradm
■
To use the -p network, -p altitude, -p timezone options: platadm
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-p part
Specifies the setting you want to do. One of the following can be
specified for part:
-v
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
altitude
Configures the chassis altitude.
network
Configures the XSCF network, DSCP,
Domain Name Service, NTP, SSH, https, and
SMTP.
timezone
Sets the time zone for the XSCF. The time
zone is chosen from a list of time zones.
user
Creates a new local XSCF user account with
platadm, platop, and useradm privileges.
Specifies verbose output.
The available interfaces on the SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000 servers are xscf#0lan#0, xscf#0-lan#1, lan#0, lan#1. The available interfaces on the SPARC Enterprise
M8000/M9000 servers are the same but they also include the xscf#0-if, xscf#1-lan#0,
xscf#1-lan#1, and xscf#1-if.
In user setup, a new local user account can be created with a user supplied
password.
System Administration
255
setupplatform(8)
In network setup, the following items can be optionally configured:
EXAMPLES
■
XSCF Network Settings
■
Internal DSCP Network
■
Domain Name Service
■
Network Time Protocol
■
SSH
■
HTTPS Server
■
Email reports
EXAMPLE 1
Creating a New User.
XSCF> setupplatform -p user
Do you want to set up an account? [y|n]: y
Username: myadminuser
User id in range 100 to 65533 or leave blank to let the system
choose one:
Username: myadminuser
User id:
Are these settings correct? [y|n]: y
XSCF> adduser myadminuser
XSCF> setprivileges myadminuser useradm platadm platop
XSCF> password myadminuser
New XSCF password: [not echoed]
Retype new XSCF password: [not echoed]
EXAMPLE 2
Configuring the XSCF Network.
XSCF> setupplatform
Do you want to set up an account? [y|n]: n
Do you want to set up the XSCF network interfaces? [y|n]: y
Do you want to configure xscf#0-lan#0? [y|n]: y
xscf#0-lan#0 ip address? []: 192.168.1.4
xscf#0-lan#0 netmask? [255.255.255.0]: 255.255.254.0
xscf#0-lan#0 default gateway? []: 192.168.1.1
xscf#0-lan#0 ip address: 192.168.1.4
xscf#0-lan#0 netmask: 255.255.254.0
256
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setupplatform(8)
xscf#0-lan#0 default gateway: 192.168.1.1
Are these settings correct? [y|n]: y
XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-lan#0 -m 255.255.254.0 192.168.1.4
. . .
EXAMPLE 3
Enabling ssh.
XSCF> setupplatform -p network
Do you want to set up the XSCF network interfaces? [y|n]: n
Do you want to set up the DSCP network? [y|n]: n
Do you want to set up the domain name service? [y|n]: n
Do you want to set up the network time protocol? [y|n]: n
Do you want to set up ssh? [y|n]: y
Enable ssh service? [y|n]: y
XSCF> setssh -q -y -c enable
Do you want to set up https? [y|n]: n
. . .
EXAMPLE 4
Configuring the Altitude.
XSCF> setupplatform -p altitude
Do you want to set up the chassis altitude? [y|n]: y
Chassis altitude is already configured:
Chassis altitude in meters: 200
Continue setting up the chassis altitude? [y|n]: y
Chassis altitude in meters: 400
Chassis altitude in meters: 400
Is this setting correct? [y|n]: y
XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=400
400m
The specified altitude becomes valid when the circuit breakers of the system
are switched on again.
Do you want to reboot the XSCF now? [y|n]: n
XSCF>
System Administration
257
setupplatform(8)
EXAMPLE 5
Setting the Time Zone.
XSCF> setupplatform -p timezone
Do you want to set up the XSCF time zone? [y|n]: y
Chassis time zone is already configured:
XSCF time zone: US/Pacific
Continue setting up the XSCF time zone? [y|n]: y
0
Africa/Abidjan
1
Africa/Accra
2
Africa/Addis_Ababa
3
Africa/Algiers
4
Africa/Asmera
5
Africa/Bamako
6
Africa/Bangui
7
Africa/Banjul
8
Africa/Bissau
9
Africa/Blantyre
10
Africa/Brazzaville
11
Africa/Bujumbura
12
Africa/Cairo
13
Africa/Casablanca
14
Africa/Ceuta
15
Africa/Conakry
16
Africa/Dakar
17
Africa/Dar_es_Salaam
18
Africa/Djibouti
19
Africa/Douala
20
Africa/El_Aaiun
21
Africa/Freetown
22
Africa/Gaborone
Enter number to choose time zone or return for next set of time zones: 21
XSCF time zone: Africa/Freetown
Is this setting correct? [y|n]: y
258
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
setupplatform(8)
XSCF> setaltitude -c settz -s Africa/Freetown
Africa/Freetown
XSCF>
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
adduser(8), applynetwork(8), password(8), setaltitude(8), setdscp(8),
setemailreport(8), sethostname(8), sethttps(8), setnameserver(8),
setnetwork(8), setntp(8), setprivileges(8), setsmtp(8), setssh(8), setroute(8),
settimezone(8)
System Administration
259
setupplatform(8)
260
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showaltitude(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showaltitude - display the altitude of the system and whether the air filter installed
showaltitude
showaltitude -h
DESCRIPTION
The showaltitude(8) command displays the current settings for the altitude of
the system and whether the air filter installed.
Whether the air filter installed is displayed on the midrange servers only.
The displayed altitude value is a multiple of 100 meters.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
■
The air filter is displayed only when it is installed. If the filter is not installed
nothing is displayed.
■
The setaltitude(8) command sets the altitude of the system and whether or
not the air filter installed.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the altitude of the system, on a high-end server.
XSCF> showaltitude
1000m
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the altitude of the system and whether the air filter installed, on a
midrange server.
XSCF> showaltitude
1000m
Filter is installed.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setaltitude(8)
System Administration
261
showaltitude(8)
262
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showarchiving(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showarchiving - display log archiving configuration and status
showarchiving
showarchiving [-e] [-v]
showarchiving -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showarchiving(8) displays the status and configuration information for log
archiving on the Service Processor.
You must have platadm, platop or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-e
Displays information about the last ten archiving errors.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-v
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
Specifies verbose output.
If the -e option is not specified, showarchiving displays the following
information:
1. A list of archiving configuration data:
Archiving state
Log archiving is enabled or disabled.
Archive host
The host on which the logs are archived. Initial
value is Not configured. Possible values are
a host name or IPv4 address.
Archive directory
The directory on the archive host where the
archives are stored. Initial value is Not
configured.
System Administration
263
showarchiving(8)
Username for ssh login
User name which the Service Processor uses to
login to the archive host. Initial value is Not
configured.
Archive host public key
The public key which the Service Processor
uses to verify the identity of the archive host.
This field is not displayed unless the -v option
is specified.
Archive host fingerprint
The md5 fingerprint of the public key which
the Service Processor uses to verify the
identity of the archive host.
2. Time of the most recent attempt to connect to the archive host, and the outcome of that
attempt (success or failure):
Latest
communication
The completion time of the latest attempt to communicate
with the archive host.
Connection status
The outcome of the latest attempt to connect to the archive
host; successful (OK) or unsuccessful (FAILED).
3. Table of the status information for audit logs and non-audit logs:
Archive space
limit
The amount of space allocated for the archives.
Archive space used The amount of space currently consumed by the archives.
Total archiving
failures
A counter of failed archiving operations.
Unresolved
failures
A counter of failed archiving operations which the Service
Processor will continue to retry.
If the -e option is specified showarchiving displays the details of the last ten
archiving errors that occurred.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
XSCF>
Viewing Status and Configuration Data
showarchiving
*** Archiving Configuration ***
Archiving state ---------- Disabled
Archive host ------------- Not configured
Archive directory -------- Not configured
User name for ssh login -- Not configured
264
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showarchiving(8)
Archive host fingerprint - Server authentication disabled
*** Connection to Archive Host ***
Latest communication ----- None
Connection status -------- None
AUDIT LOGS
OTHER LOGS
----------
----------
Unlimited
2000 MB
Not monitored
Not monitored
Total archiving failures
0
0
Unresolved failures
0
0
Archive space limit
Archive space used
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF>
Displaying Archiving Error Information
showarchiving -e
No archiving errors have occurred.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setarchiving(8)
System Administration
265
showarchiving(8)
266
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showaudit(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showaudit - display the current auditing system state
showaudit
showaudit [all]
showaudit [-a
users] [-c classes] [-e events] [-g] [-m] [-p] [-s] [-t]
showaudit -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showaudit(8) displays the current state of system auditing. When invoked without
options showaudit displays whether the writing of audit records is enabled or
disabled.
You must have auditadm or auditop privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
267
showaudit(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a users
Displays the audit record generation policy for the specified users.
users is a comma-separated list of valid user names.
-c classes
Displays the audit record generation policy for the specified audit
classes. classes is a comma-separated list of audit classes. A class
may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The ACS_ prefix
may be omitted. For example, the class of audit related events can
be expressed as ACS_AUDIT, AUDIT or 16.
The following are valid classes:
-e events
all
Denotes all classes.
ACS_SYSTEM(1)
System-related events
ACS_WRITE(2)
Commands that can modify a state
ACS_READ(4)
Commands that read a current state
ACS_LOGIN(8)
Login-related events
ACS_AUDIT(16)
Audit-related events
ACS_DOMAIN(32)
Domain management–related
events
ACS_USER(64)
User management–related events
ACS_PLATFORM(128)
Platform management–related
events
ACS_MODES(256)
Mode-related events
Displays the audit record generation policy for the specified audit
events. events is a comma-separated list of audit events. An event
may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The AEV_ prefix
may be omitted. For example, the event for SSH login can be
expressed as AEV_LOGIN_SSH, LOGIN_SSH, or 0.
See showaudit -e all for a list of all valid events.
-g
Displays the global user audit record generation policy.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-m
268
Displays the address to which email is sent when the local audit
storage space usages reaches a threshold.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showaudit(8)
-p
Displays the policy to follow when the audit trail reaches full
capacity.
-s
Displays the following auditing states:
■
Free space remaining for local audit records
■
Number of audit records dropped (since the last boot) since the
audit trail reached full capacity.
The following operands are supported:
Displays the following information:
all
EXAMPLES
Space consumed by local audit records
Displays the thresholds at which to issue warning(s) about local
storage usage.
-t
OPERANDS
■
EXAMPLE 1
■
Whether the writing of audit trails is set to enable or
disable. This is the same display that is shown for
showaudit when invoked without any options.
■
All the information that would be displayed by invoking
showaudit with the options: -a, -c all, -e all, -g, -m, -p,
-s.
Displaying Auditing Status
XSCF> showaudit
Auditing: enabled
EXAMPLE 2
Displaying All Class Information For Login Auditing
XSCF> showaudit -c LOGIN
Events:
AEV_LOGIN_BUI
enabled
AEV_LOGIN_CONSOLE
enabled
AEV_LOGIN_SSH
enabled
AEV_LOGIN_TELNET
enabled
AEV_LOGOUT
enabled
AEV_AUTHENTICATE
enabled
System Administration
269
showaudit(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Displaying All Event Information
XSCF> showaudit -e all
Events:
AEV_AUDIT_START
enabled
AEV_AUDIT_STOP
enabled
AEV_ENTER_MODE
enabled
AEV_EXIT_MODE
enabled
AEV_LOGIN_BUI
enabled
AEV_LOGIN_CONSOLE
enabled
AEV_LOGIN_SSH
enabled
AEV_LOGIN_TELNET
enabled
AEV_LOGOUT
enabled
AEV_AUTHENTICATE
enabled
AEV_addboard
enabled
AEV_addcodlicense
enabled
AEV_addfru
enabled
[...]
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
270
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setaudit(8), viewaudit(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showautologout(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showautologout - display the session timeout time of the XSCF shell
showautologout
showautologout -h
DESCRIPTION
The showautologout(8) command displays the session timeout time of the XSCF
shell.
The session timeout time is displayed in units of minutes. If the session timeout
time has not been specified with the setautologout(8) command, a time of 10
minutes is set by default.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the session timeout time of the XSCF shell.
XSCF> showautologout
30min
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the session timeout time of the XSCF shell (the time is default).
XSCF> showautologout
10min
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setautologout(8)
System Administration
271
showautologout(8)
272
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showboards(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showboards - display information on an extended system board (XSB)
showboards [-v] -a [-c sp]
showboards [-v] -d domain_id [-c sp]
showboards [-v] xsb
showboards -h
DESCRIPTION
The showboards(8) command displays information on XSBs.
This command displays information on XSBs currently configured in or assigned to
a domain and information on all mounted XSBs. If a domain is specified, the
command displays only information defined with the corresponding domain
component list (DCL).
The following types of information are displayed:
XSB
XSB number. The format of the displayed number is as follows:
x–y
DID
LSB
x
An integer from 00–15.
y
An integer from 0–3.
Domain ID. One of the following is displayed:
00–23
Domain ID to which the XSB is assigned
SP
This is displayed if the XSB does not belong
to any domain but is located in the system
board pool.
Other
This is displayed if the XSB belongs to a
domain to which no user privilege has been
granted.
Logical system board (LSB) number defined for the domain. The
displayed number is an integer ranging from 0 to 15.
System Administration
273
showboards(8)
Assignment
Pwr
Conn
274
Domain assignment state of the XSB. Either of the following is
displayed:
Unavailable
The XSB cannot be used. The XSB may be
unrecognizable because it is not mounted, it
contains an error, it has been assigned to
another domain, or the settings of the
domain or system board are not complete.
Available
The XSB is registered on the domain
component list (DCL) and can be used. The
XSB may be located in the system board
pool.
Assigned
The XSB is reserved for or assigned to the
domain.
Power status of the XSB
n
Power is off.
y
Power is on.
Status of the XSB connection to the domain configuration
n
The XSB is not connected to the domain, or it
is located in the system board pool.
y
The XSB is connected to the domain.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showboards(8)
Assignment
Pwr
Conn
Domain assignment state of the XSB. Either of the following is
displayed:
Unavailable
The XSB cannot be used. The XSB may be
unrecognizable because it is not mounted, it
contains an error, it has been assigned to
another domain, or the settings of the
domain or system board are not complete.
Available
The XSB is registered on the domain
component list (DCL) and can be used. The
XSB may be located in the system board
pool.
Assigned
The XSB is reserved for or assigned to the
domain.
Power status of the XSB
n
Power is off.
y
Power is on.
Status of the XSB connection to the domain configuration
n
The XSB is not connected to the domain, or it
is located in the system board pool.
y
The XSB is connected to the domain.
System Administration
275
showboards(8)
Conf
Test
Fault
Incorporation state of XSB hardware resources into the operating
system
n
The resources are not connected to the
operating system.
y
The resources are incorporated in the
operating system.
Status of an initial diagnosis on an XSB
Unmount
The XSB cannot be recognized because it is
not mounted or because it has an error.
Unknown
Not performed.
Testing
The initial diagnosis is in progress.
Passed
The initial diagnosis ended normally.
Failed
Error (test=fail) detected by an initial
diagnosis. The XSB cannot be used or is in a
degraded state.
XSB degradation status
Normal
Normal
Degraded
Component in a degraded state. The XSB
can operate.
Faulted
An error occurred and the XSB cannot
operate.
When the -v option is specified, the following types of information are displayed
as XSB detail status information:
R
Dynamic reconfiguration(DR) involving the reservation state of
the XSB in the domain
*
Cod
276
DR processing is reserved. When the domain
is rebooted, the XSB is incorporated into or
disconnected from the domain, and the
domain configuration is changed.
Whether the XSB is a COD board
n
The XSB is not a COD board.
y
The XSB is a COD board.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showboards(8)
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, fieldeng
Can execute the command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop
Can execute the command only for accessible domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
OPERANDS
The following options are supported:
-a
Displays the state of XSBs configured in or assigned to a domain
and the state of all mounted XSBs.
-c sp
Displays the system boards located in the system board pool.
System boards in the system board pool do not belong to any
domain.
-d domain_id
Specifies the ID of the domain whose status of XSB is displayed.
Only information that is defined with the DCL of the specified
domain is displayed. An integer ranging from 0 to 23 can be
specified for domain_id, depending on the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-v
Displays detailed information on XSB.
The following operand is supported:
xsb
Specifies the XSB number to be displayed. The following xsb
form is accepted:
x–y
where:
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
x
An integer from 00–15.
y
An integer from 0–3.
Displays information on all mounted system boards.
XSCF> showboards -a
XSB
DID(LSB) Assignment
Pwr
Conn Conf Test
Fault
---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------
System Administration
277
showboards(8)
00-0 00(00)
Assigned
y
y
y
Passed
Normal
00-1 00(01)
Assigned
y
y
y
Passed
Normal
00-2 SP
Available
y
n
n
Passed
Normal
00-3 02(00)
Unavailable y
n
n
Unknown Normal
Displays detailed information on all mounted system boards.
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF> showboards -v -a
XSB
R DID(LSB) Assignment
Pwr
Conn Conf Test
Fault
COD
---- - -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------- --00-0
00(00)
Assigned
y
y
y
Passed
Normal
n
00-1 * 00(01)
Assigned
y
y
y
Passed
Normal
n
00-2
SP
Available
y
n
n
Passed
Normal
n
00-3
02(00)
Unavailable y
n
n
Unknown Normal
n
EXAMPLE 3
Displays information on XSB#00-0.
XSCF> showboards 00-0
XSB
DID(LSB) Assignment
Pwr
Conn Conf Test
Fault
---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------00-0 15(00)
EXAMPLE 4
Assigned
y
y
y
Passed
Normal
Displays detailed information on XSB#00-0.
XSCF> showboards -v 00-0
XSB
R DID(LSB) Assignment
Pwr
Conn Conf Test
Fault
COD
---- - -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------- --00-0 * 15(00)
EXAMPLE 5
Assigned
y
n
n
Passed
Normal
Displays system boards located in the system board pool.
XSCF> showboards -a -c sp
XSB
DID(LSB) Assignment
Pwr
Conn Conf Test
Fault
---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------
278
00-0 SP
Available
y
n
n
Passed
Normal
00-2 SP
Available
y
n
n
Passed
Normal
00-3 SP
Available
y
n
n
Passed
Normal
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
y
showboards(8)
EXAMPLE 6
Displays the system boards that are defined for domain ID 0 and located in
the system board pool.
XSCF> showboards -d 0 -c sp
XSB
DID(LSB) Assignment
Pwr
Conn Conf Test
Fault
---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------00-2 SP
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
Available
y
n
n
Passed
Normal
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), addcodlicense(8), deleteboard(8), deletecodlicense(8),
moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showcodlicense(8), showcodusage(8),
showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)
System Administration
279
showboards(8)
280
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showcod(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showcod - display Capacity on Demand (COD) configuration information
showcod [-v] [-d domain_id]
showcod -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showcod(8) displays the COD information which includes the headroom amount,
number of installed COD right-to-use (RTU) licenses, the number of COD RTU
licenses reserved for domains, and the Chassis Hostid. When used without
arguments it displays the current COD information.
You must have platadm, platop, domainadm, domainop, or domainmgr
privileges for the specified domain.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Domain identifier. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on
system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
Specifies verbose output.
-v
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying COD Information for All Domains on an OPL System
The output shown is what you would see if you had domainadm, domainop, or
domainmgr privileges for Domain 1.
XSCF>
showcod
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 1 : 0
EXAMPLE 2
Displaying All COD Information
The output shown is what you would see if you had platform privileges.
XSCF>
showcod
Chassis HostID : 81000001
PROC RTUs installed : 8
PROC Headroom Quantity : 0
System Administration
281
showcod(8)
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 0 : 4
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 1 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 2 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 3 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 4 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 5 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 6 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 7 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 8 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 9 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 10 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 11 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 12 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 13 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 14 : 0
PROC RTUs reserved for domain 15 : 0
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
282
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setcod(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showcodlicense(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showcodlicense - display the current Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use
(RTU) licenses stored in the COD license database
showcodlicense [-r] [-v]
showcodlicense -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showcodlicense(8) displays COD license information stored in the COD license
database. When used without options it displays the current licenses.
You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
-r
Displays the license information in the raw license-signature format,
as stored in the COD license database.
-v
Specifies verbose output. Displays both the formatted license
information and raw license-signature data.
The showcodlicense command displays the following COD information:
Description
Type of resource (processor).
Ver
Version number of the license, which is always set to 01.
Expiration
Expiration of the license.
Count
Number of right-to-use licenses granted for the given resource.
Status
GOOD, which indicates that the given resource is valid, or
EXPIRED, which indicates that the resource license is no longer
valid.
The following examples display the COD license information:
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying Formatted License Data
XSCF> showcodlicense -v
Description
Ver
Expiration
Count
Status
System Administration
283
showcodlicense(8)
----------PROC
---
-----------
-----
-------
01
NONE
16
GOOD
01:84000000:000000001:0301010100:16:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
EXAMPLE 2
Displaying Raw License Data
XSCF> showcodlicense -r
01:84000000:104:0301010100:3:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
284
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addcodlicense(8), deletecodlicense(8), showcodusage(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showcodusage(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showcodusage - display the current usage statistics for Capacity on Demand (COD)
resources
showcodusage [-v] [-M] [-p resource|domain|all ]
showcodusage -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showcodusage(8) shows current information about COD right-to-use (RTU)
licenses in use. By default, this command displays a summary of COD RTU licenses
used and installed, along with the current state of each resource. When used
without options, it displays the current usage.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, fieldeng:
Can run this command for all resources and domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop:
Can run this command for available resources only for those domains that you can
access.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-p domain
Displays the license usage for each domain. The statistics reported
include the number of COD RTU licenses used by the domain,
resources assigned to the domain, and COD RTU licenses reserved
for the domain.
-p resource Displays license usage by resource type.
-p all
Displays all COD usage information.
-v
Specifies verbose output. Displays all available COD usage
information, including COD RTU license use for both the system
and its domains.
System Administration
285
showcodusage(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The showcodusage -p resource command displays the following COD usage
information for the system:
Resource
Identifies the type of COD resources available (processors).
In Use
Specifies the number of COD CPUs currently used in the
system.
Installed
Specifies the number of COD CPUs installed in the system.
License
Specifies the number of COD RTU licenses installed.
Status
Specifies one of the following COD attributes:
OK
Indicates that there are sufficient licenses
for the COD CPUs in use. Also displays
the number of remaining COD resources
available and the number of any instant
access CPUs (headroom) available.
HEADROOM
The number of instant access COD CPUs
in use.
Violation
Indicates a COD RTU license violation
exists. Displays the number of COD CPUs
in use that exceeds the number of COD
RTU licenses available. This situation can
occur when you force the deletion of a
COD RTU license key from the COD RTU
license database, but the COD CPU
associated with the license key is still in
use.
The showcodusage -p domain command displays the following COD usage
information for each domain:
Domain/Resource Identifies COD RTU resource (processor) for each domain. An
Unused processor is a COD CPU that has not yet been
assigned to a domain.
In Use
286
Specifies the number of COD CPUs currently used in the
domain.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showcodusage(8)
EXAMPLES
Installed
Specifies the number of COD CPU resources installed in the
domain.
Reserved
Specifies the number of COD RTU licenses allocated to the
domain.
Status
Contains one of the following when the -v option is specified:
Licensed
The domain COD CPU has a COD RTU
license and is in use.
Unlicensed
A COD RTU license for the domain COD
CPU could not be obtained and it is not in
use.
Unused
The COD CPU is not in use.
Users with platform administrator privileges can view both resource and domain
usage summaries. Users with domain administrator privileges can view only the
domain usage summaries for which they have privileges, and a report of unused
licenses.
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying COD Usage by Resource
XSCF> showcodusage -p resource
Resource
In Use
Installed
Licensed
Status
--------
------
---------
--------
------
4
4
16
PROC
EXAMPLE 2
OK: 12 available
Displaying COD Usage by Domain
XSCF> showcodusage -p domains
Domain/Resource
In Use
Installed
Reserved
---------------
------
---------
--------
0 - PROC
4
4
0
1 - PROC
4
4
0
2 - PROC
4
4
0
3 - PROC
4
4
0
4 - PROC
0
0
0
Unused - PROC
0
0
12
EXAMPLE 3
Displaying COD Usage by Resource and Domain: M8000 Server With CMU00
System Administration
287
showcodusage(8)
Quad-XSB, CMU02 Uni-XSB
XSCF> showcodusage -v
Resource
In Use
Installed
Licensed
Status
--------
------
---------
--------
------
0
8
0
PROC
OK: 0 available Headroom: 2
Domain/Resource
In Use
Installed
Reserved
Status
---------------
------
---------
--------
------
0
8
0
0
1
0
- PROC
00-0 - PROC
CMU00-CPU0
00-1 - PROC
Unused
0
1
CMU00-CPU1
00-2 - PROC
Unused
0
1
CMU00-CPU2
00-3 - PROC
Unused
0
1
CMU00-CPU3
02-0 - PROC
288
Unused
0
4
CMU02-CPU0
Unused
CMU02-CPU1
Unused
CMU02-CPU2
Unused
CMU02-CPU3
Unused
1
- PROC
0
0
0
2
- PROC
0
0
0
3
- PROC
0
0
0
4
- PROC
0
0
0
5
- PROC
0
0
0
6
- PROC
0
0
0
7
- PROC
0
0
0
8
- PROC
0
0
0
9
- PROC
0
0
0
10 - PROC
0
0
0
11 - PROC
0
0
0
12 - PROC
0
0
0
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showcodusage(8)
13 - PROC
0
0
0
14 - PROC
0
0
0
15 - PROC
0
0
0
Unused - PROC
0
0
2
Displaying COD Usage by Resource and Domain: M5000 Server
EXAMPLE 4
XSCF> showcodusage -v
Resource
In Use
Installed
Licensed
Status
--------
------
---------
--------
------
0
4
0
PROC
Domain/Resource
In Use
Installed
Reserved
Status
---------------
------
---------
--------
------
0
- PROC
0
0
0
1
- PROC
0
0
0
2
- PROC
0
0
0
3
- PROC
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
4
Unused - PROC
00-0 - PROC
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
OK: 0 available
CPUM00-CPU0
Unused
CPUM00-CPU1
Unused
CPUM01-CPU0
Unused
CPUM01-CPU1
Unused
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addcodlicense(8), deletecodlicense(8), showcodlicense(8)
System Administration
289
showcodusage(8)
290
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showconsolepath(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showconsolepath - displays information on the domain console that is currently
connected
showconsolepath -a
showconsolepath -d domain_id
showconsolepath -h
DESCRIPTION
The showconsolepath(8) command displays information on the domain console
that is currently connected.
The following information can be displayed:
Privileges
User
User account of the XSCF connected to the domain console
DID
Domain ID
ro/rw
Domain console type
ro
Read-only console
rw
Writable console
escape
Escape mark specified for the console
Date
Date connected to the domain console
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop
Can run this command only for your accessible domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-a
Displays console information on all domains that can be
accessed.
-d domain_id
Specifies only one ID of the domain for which information is to
be displayed. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system
configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
System Administration
291
showconsolepath(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Only one writable console and one or more read-only consoles can be connected to
one domain.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays console information on all domains that can be accessed.
XSCF> showconsolepath -a
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
292
User
DID
ro/rw
escape
Date
nakagawa
00
rw
@
Fri Jul 29 21:23:34
hana
00
ro
#
Fri Jul 29 09:49:12
k-okano
00
ro
#
Fri Jul 29 18:21:50
yuuki
01
rw
|
Fri Jul 29 10:19:18
uchida
01
ro
*
Fri Jul 29 13:30:41
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
console(8), sendbreak(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showdate(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showdate - display the date and time of XSCF
showdate [-u]
showdate -h
DESCRIPTION
The showdate(8) command displays the date and time of XSCF.
If showdate(8) command is executed with no options, date and time currently set
is displayed.
If the local date and time are specified, they are set following conversion to
coordinated universal time (UTC).
After date and time are set, the prompt to confirm the reset of XSCF is displayed.
When XSCF is reset, the set date and time are reflected.
Changed date and time are reflected in the domain when either of the following
operations is performed:
Privileges
■
Rebooting the domain
■
The NTP time synchronization processing after the change of date and time of
XSCF with the date(8) command
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-u
Specifies time in coordinated universal time (UTC). When the -u
option is omitted, the local time is specified.
The setdate(8) command sets the XSCF date and time.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the current time as the local time (JST).
XSCF> showdate
Mon Jan 23 14:53:00 JST 2006
System Administration
293
showdate(8)
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the current time in UTC.
XSCF> showdate -u
Mon Jan 23 05:56:15 UTC 2006
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
294
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setdate(8), settimezone(8), showtimezone(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showdcl(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showdcl - display the current domain component list (DCL)
showdcl [-v] -a
showdcl [-v] -d domain_id [-l lsb...]
showdcl -h
DESCRIPTION
The showdcl(8) command displays the DCL that has been set by the setdcl(8)
command.
The DCL is hardware resource information that can be set for a domain or the
logical system boards (LSBs) that are components of a domain.
An LSB is a board unit recognized by an operating system in a domain. Up to 16
LSBs can be registered for each domain, and they are represented by integer
numbers ranging from 0 to 15.
An XSB is a board unit that can be used in the system and is one division of a
divided physical system board (PSB). An XSB is represented by x–y, a combination
of a PSB number and the number of one division of the divided PSB (x is an integer
ranging from 00 to 15, and y is an integer ranging from 0 to 3).
The showdcl(8) command can display the following information that is part of a
domain component list:
DID
Domain ID
System Administration
295
showdcl(8)
LSB
LSB number. The displayed number is an integer ranging from 00
to 15.
XSB
XSB number corresponding to the LSB. The displayed number
has the following format:
x–y
where:
Status
x
An integer from 00–15.
y
An integer from 0–3.
Domain status. One of the following status is displayed.
Additional information may be displayed.
Powered Off
Power is off.
Panic State
A panic occurred, and the domain is in the reset state.
Shutdown Started
The power-off process is starting.
Initialization Phase
OpenBoot PROM initialization is in progress.
OpenBoot Executing Completed
The system is in the OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state.
Booting/OpenBoot PROM prompt
The operating system is booting. Or due to the domain shutdown or
reset, the system is in the OpenBoot PROM running state or is
suspended in the OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state.
Running
The operating system is running.
296
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showdcl(8)
If the -v option is specified, the following information is added:
Cfg-policy
No-Mem
No-IO
Float
Privileges
Degradation range applicable for an error detected during an
initial diagnosis of hardware. Any of the following is displayed:
FRU
Degradation of a component (default)
XSB
Degradation of an XSB.
System
Degradation of a domain
Whether to omit the use of memory on a domain. Either of the
following is displayed:
True
Omits the use of memory on a domain.
False
Does not omits the use of memory on a
domain (default).
Whether to omit the use of I/O devices on a domain. Either of
the following is displayed:
True
Omits the use of I/O devices on a domain.
False
Does not omit the use of I/O devices on a
domain (default).
Whether to set a priority for the specified LSB as a floating board,
relative to other boards. Either of the following is displayed:
True
Gives a higher priority to the LSB to become
a floating board.
False
Does not give a higher priority regarding
floating boards (default).
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, fieldeng
Can execute the command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop
Can execute the command only for accessible domain.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
297
showdcl(8)
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:.
-a
Displays information that is set for all domains.
-d domain_id
Specifies the ID of the domain for which information is to be
displayed. The domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system
configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-l lsb
Specifies the LSB number whose information is to be displayed.
Specify an lsb value by using an integer ranging from 0 to 15.
Multiple locations can be specified by delimiting them with
spaces. If lsb is omitted, all the LSBs in the domain are targets.
-v
Also displays information on Cfg-policy, No-Mem, No-IO, and
Float in the DCL.
■
A system board for which the floating board priority is set to a low value is
difficult to use as a floating board. Accordingly, it is difficult for the system
board to affect the domain operation system.
■
The setdcl(8) command sets domain configuration information.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays detailed information on the DCL that is set for domain ID 0
XSCF> showdcl -d 0
DID
LSB
XSB
00
Status
Running
00
00-0
04
01-0
08
02-0
12
03-0
EXAMPLE 2
Displays details in the domain component list that is set for domain ID 0.
XSCF> showdcl -v -d 0
DID
LSB
XSB
00
298
Status
No-Mem
No-IO
Float
Running
00
00-0
01
-
02
-
Cfg-policy
FRU
False
False
False
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showdcl(8)
03
-
04
01-0
05
-
06
-
07
-
08
02-0
09
-
10
-
11
-
12
03-0
13
-
14
-
15
-
EXAMPLE 3
False
True
False
True
True
True
True
True
False
Displays details in the domain component lists that are set for all domains.
XSCF> showdcl -v -a
DID
LSB
XSB
00
Status
No-Mem
No-IO
Float
Running
00
00-0
01
-
02
-
03
-
04
01-0
05
-
06
-
07
-
08
02-0
09
-
10
-
11
-
12
03-0
13
-
14
-
Cfg-policy
FRU
False
False
False
False
True
False
True
True
True
True
True
False
System Administration
299
showdcl(8)
15
-
--------------------------------------------------------------01
Running (Waiting for OS Shutdown)
00
01-2
True
True
False
01
04-0
False
False
False
02
-
03
-
04
-
05
-
06
-
07
05-0
True
False
False
08
-
09
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
06-0
True
True
True
15
-
FRU
--------------------------------------------------------------:
:
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
300
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8),
showboards(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showdevices(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showdevices - display current information on an eXtended System Board (XSB)
showdevices [-v] [-p bydevice | byboard | query | force] xsb
showdevices [-v] [-p bydevice | byboard] -d domain_id
showdevices -h
DESCRIPTION
The showdevices(8) command displays the information of the physical devices
configured on XSB and their available resources of these devices.
The information of available resources can be obtained for the devices managed by
the operating system. The command can also display in advance whether the XSB
can be disconnected from the domain using the dynamic reconfiguration (DR)
function.
The following types of information are displayed:
Common:
DID
Domain ID
XSB
XSB number
CPU:
id
processor ID
state
status of processor
speed
CPU frequency (MHz)
ecache
CPU external cache size (MB)
MEMORY:
board mem
Size of memory mounted on the XSB (MB)
perm mem
Size of memory that mounted and cannot be relocated on the XSB
(MB)
base address
Physical address of memory mounted on the XSB
domain mem
Size of memory on the domain (MB)
System Administration
301
showdevices(8)
When memory is being disconnected, the following items are displayed:
target XSB
XSB number at the move destination
deleted mem
Size of memory which was already deleted (MB)
remaining mem Size of remaining memory to be deleted (MB)
I/O devices:
Privileges
device
Instance name of I/O device
resource
Managed resource name
usage
Description of the instance using resources
query
Results of an off-line inquiry about resources
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop
Can run this command only for your accessible domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
302
The following options are supported.
-d domain_id
Specifies the ID of the domain for which information is to be
displayed. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system
configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-p byboard
Displays results organized by XSB. The results can be further
summarized by device and displayed. If the -p option is omitted,
"-p bydevice" is used.
-p bydevice
Displays results organized by device type (CPU, memory, I/O,
etc.). If the -p option is omitted, "-p bydevice" is used.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showdevices(8)
OPERANDS
-p force
Predicts system resources deleted from the operating system
when a system board is forcibly disconnected by "deleteboard
-f" command. If the -p option is omitted, "-p bydevice" is
used.
-p query
Predicts system resources deleted from the operating system
when a system board is disconnected by deleteboard
command. If the -p option is omitted, "-p bydevice" is used.
-v
Displays information on all I/O devices, including those that are
not management targets. As information on the I/O devices that
are not management targets, however, only physical
configurations are displayed, and resources and use states are not
displayed.
The following operand is supported:
xsb
Specifies the XSB number for which information is to be
displayed. The following xsb form is accepted:
x–y
where:
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
x
An integer from 00–15.
y
An integer from 0–3.
Displays the information of the physical devices configured on the XSB#00-0
and their available resources.
XSCF> showdevices 00-0
CPU:
---DID XSB
id
state
speed
ecache
00
00-0 40
on-line
2048
4
00
00-0 41
on-line
2048
4
00
00-0 42
on-line
2048
4
00
00-0 43
on-line
2048
4
Memory:
-------
System Administration
303
showdevices(8)
board
perm
base
mem MB
domain target deleted remaining
DID XSB
mem MB
address
mem MB
00 00-0
2048
00
00-1
2048
0
0x0000038000000000
00
00-2
2048
0
00
00-3
2048
0
00 01-0
00
mem MB
1500
2048
0
0
0x0000034000000000
2048
0
0
0x0000030000000000
2048
0
0
2048
0 0x000002c000000000
2048
1024
0
2048
0
2048
0
0
0x0000028000000000
2048 03-0
mem MB
250
02-0
1290 0x000003c000000000
XSB
IO Devices:
---------DID XSB
device
resource
usage
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s0
mounted filesystem "/"
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1
dump device (swap)
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1
swap area
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s3
mounted filesystem "/var"
00
00-0
EXAMPLE 2
sd3
/var/run
mounted filesystem "/var/run"
Displays detail information of the physical devices and their available resources in domain ID 0.
XSCF> showdevices -v -d 0
CPU:
---DID XSB
304
id
state
speed
ecache
00
00-0 40
on-line
2048
4
00
00-0 41
on-line
2048
4
00
00-0 42
on-line
2048
4
00
00-0 43
on-line
2048
4
00
01-0 50
on-line
2048
4
00
01-0 51
on-line
2048
4
00
01-0 52
on-line
2048
4
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showdevices(8)
00
01-0 53
on-line
2048
4
Memory:
------board
perm
DID XSB
mem MB
00 00-0
2048
00
01-0
base
mem MB
domain target deleted remaining
address
mem MB
1290 0x000003c000000000
2048
0
0x000002c000000000
XSB
mem MB
mem MB
4096 00-1
250
1500
4096
IO Devices:
----------
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
DID XSB
device
resource
usage
00
00-0
sd0
00
00-0
sd1
00
00-0
sd2
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s0
mounted filesystem "/"
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1
dump device (swap)
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1
swap area
00
00-0
sd3
/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s3
mounted filesystem "/var"
00
00-0
00
00-0
sd4
00
00-0
sd5
00
00-0
sd6
sd3
/var/run
mounted filesystem "/var/run"
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8),
showboards(8), showdcl(8), showfru(8)
System Administration
305
showdevices(8)
306
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showdomainmode(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showdomainmode - display the modes of operation for the specified domain
showdomainmode -d domain_id
showdomainmode -h
DESCRIPTION
showdomainmode(8) command displays the modes of operation that is set for the
specified domain.
The following states are displayed:
Diagnostic Level
Secure Mode
Autoboot
CPU Mode
Displays the OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level. One of the
following is displayed:
none
None
min
Standard
max
Maximum
Displays the states of the host watchdog function and
function that suppresses break signal reception. One of the
following is displayed:
on
Enabled
off
Disabled
Displays the state of the auto boot function. One of the
following is displayed:
on
Enabled
off
Disabled
Way of determining the CPU operational mode mounted on
the domain. One of the following is displayed:
auto
Automatically determines at domain startup
compatible
Sets to the SPARC64 VI compatible mode regardless of the
CPUs mounted
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm
Can run this command only for your managed domains.
System Administration
307
showdomainmode(8)
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following operands are supported:
-d domain_id
Specifies the domain ID of the domain to be displayed. domain_id
can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
If the Mode switch of the operator panel is set to Service, the settings of the
modes of operation for the specified domain have the following values,
regardless of the domain mode displayed by the showdomainmode(8) command:
■
■
OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level (Diagnostic Level), CPU operational
mode (CPU Mode): operates as the showdomainmode(8) command display
■
Host watchdog and suppress break signal reception (Secure Mode), auto
boot function (Autoboot): off
■
When the OpenBoot PROM environmental variable 'auto-boot?' has been set
to false, the auto boot function is disabled.
■
The setdomainmode(8) command sets the modes of operation specified for a
domain.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the current state of the modes of operation set for domain ID 0.
XSCF> showdomainmode -d 0
Host-ID :0f010f10
Diagnostic Level :min
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
308
Secure Mode
:on
Autoboot
:on
CPU Mode
:auto
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setdomainmode(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showdomainstatus(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showdomainstatus - display the current domain component list (DCL)
showdomainstatus -d domain_id
showdomainstatus -a
showdomainstatus -h
DESCRIPTION
The showdomainstatus(8) command displays the current status of the specified
domain.
One of the following states is displayed for each domain. Additional information
may be displayed.
Powered Off
Power is off.
Panic State
A panic occurred, and the domain is in the reset state.
Shutdown Started
The power-off process is starting.
Initialization Phase
OpenBoot PROM initialization is in progress.
OpenBoot Execution Completed
The system is in the OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state.
Booting/OpenBoot PROM prompt
The operating system is booting. Or due to the domain shutdown or reset, the
system is in the OpenBoot PROM running state or is suspended in the
OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state.
Running
Operating system is running.
Domain is not defined.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng
System Administration
309
showdomainstatus(8)
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop
Can run this command only for your accessible domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported.
-a
Displays status information on all domains that can be accessed.
-d domain_id
Specifies only one ID of the domain to be displayed. domain_id
can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays status information on all domains.
XSCF> showdomainstatus -a
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
310
DID
Domain Status
00
Running
01
Running (Waiting for OS Shutdown)
02
Powered Off
03
Panic State
04
Shutdown Started
05
Booting/OpenBoot PROM prompt
06
Initialization Phase
07
OpenBoot Execution Completed
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
poweroff(8), poweron(8), reset(8), showdcl(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
showdscp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showdscp - display the IP addresses assigned to the Domain to Service Processor
Communications Protocol (DSCP)
showdscp
showdscp [-v] [-p]
showdscp [-v] [-p] -d
domain_id
showdscp [-v] [-p] -s
showdscp -h
DESCRIPTION
showdscp(8) displays the IP addresses assigned for DSCP usage, the IP addresses
for an individual domain, the Service Processor, or for the entire system. When
used without options, it displays current IP data.
When displaying IP addresses for all DSCP links in the system, the output is a
table. The table is sorted by numerical domain IDs.
When displaying IP addresses for a particular domain or just the Service Processor,
then the output is not a table but simply the IP address of the specified domain or
Service Processor.
The -p option can be used to generate parsable output that would then be suitable
for use in a script. Parsable displays of individual IP addresses exclude any
additional labels, and only an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal form is output. The
parsable version of tabular output includes only the values (no table headings are
included), and each column is separated by a single tab character.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
fieldeng, platadm, platop:
Can display any DSCP IP information.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop:
Can display individual IP addresses for domains for which you have privileges
only.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
311
showdscp(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Displays an individual domain’s IP address.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
EXAMPLES
-p
Generates parsable output.
-s
Displays the Service Processor’s IP address.
-v
Specifies verbose output. Prints additional information about
internal progress of the program’s operations to the screen.
Caution – The IP addresses shown in the following examples are examples only.
Refer to the site planning guide for your server for more information about valid IP
addresses for your network. Using invalid network IP addresses could, under
certain circumstances, make your system unbootable!
Displaying a Table of All DSCP IP Addresses
EXAMPLE 1
XSCF>
showdscp
DSCP Configuration
Network: 10.1.1.0
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
312
Location
Address
----------
---------
XSCF
10.1.1.1
Domain #00
10.1.1.2
Domain #01
10.1.1.3
Domain #02
10.1.1.4
Domain #03
10.1.1.5
Domain #04
10.1.1.6
Domain #05
10.1.1.7
Domain #06
10.1.1.8
Domain #07
10.1.1.9
Domain #08
10.1.1.10
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showdscp(8)
Domain #09
10.1.1.11
Domain #10
10.1.1.12
Domain #11
10.1.1.13
Domain #12
10.1.1.14
Domain #13
10.1.1.15
Domain #14
10.1.1.16
Domain #15
10.1.1.17
Domain #16
10.1.1.18
Domain #17
10.1.1.19
Domain #18
10.1.1.20
Domain #19
10.1.1.21
Domain #20
10.1.1.22
Domain #21
10.1.1.23
Domain #22
10.1.1.24
Domain #23
10.1.1.25
Displaying a Specific Domain’s IP Address
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF>
showdscp -d 1
Domain #01 Address: 10.1.1.3
Displaying a Specific Domain’s IP Address in a Parsable Form
EXAMPLE 3
XSCF>
showdscp -p -d 1
Domain[1] 10.1.1.3
Displaying All DSCP Address Information In a Parsable Form
EXAMPLE 4
XSCF>
showdscp -p
Network 10.1.1.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
XSCF
10.1.1.1
Domain[0]
10.1.1.2
Domain[1]
10.1.1.3
Domain[2]
10.1.1.4
Domain[3]
10.1.1.5
System Administration
313
showdscp(8)
Domain[4]
10.1.1.6
Domain[5]
10.1.1.7
Domain[6]
10.1.1.8
Domain[7]
10.1.1.9
Domain[8]
10.1.1.10
Domain[9]
10.1.1.11
...
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
314
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setdscp(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showdualpowerfeed(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showdualpowerfeed - display the current setting of dual power feed mode
showdualpowerfeed
showdualpowerfeed -h
DESCRIPTION
The showdualpowerfeed(8) command displays the current setting of dual power
feed mode in the system.
The showdualpowerfeed(8) command is valid in a midrange server only.
The dual power feed mode can be set by the setdualpowerfeed(8) command.
Also, before the dual power feed mode is changed by the setdualpowerfeed(8)
command, the values of changed settings are displayed.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays usage statement.
Displays the current setting of dual power feed mode in the system.
XSCF> showdualpowerfeed
Dual power feed is enabled.
EXAMPLE 2
Changes the dual power feed mode with the setdualpowerfeed(8) command and then displays the current state.
XSCF> showdualpowerfeed
enable -> disable
NOTE: Dual power feed will be disabled the next time the platform is powered
on.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setdualpowerfeed(8)
System Administration
315
showdualpowerfeed(8)
316
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showemailreport(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showemailreport - display the email report configuration data
showemailreport [-v ]
showemailreport -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showemailreport(8) displays the email reporting configuration data. When used
without options, it displays current email report configuration data.
You must have platadm, platop or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-v
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Specifies verbose output.
Emailreport information includes whether Emailreporting is enabled. If enabled, it
also includes the list of addresses.
EXAMPLE 1
XSCF>
Displaying Emailreport configuration
showemailreport
EMail Reporting: enabled
Email Recipient Address: [email protected], [email protected]
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setemailreport(8)
System Administration
317
showemailreport(8)
318
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showenvironment(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showenvironment - display the intake air temperature and humidity, temperature
sensor information, voltage sensor information, and fan rotation information about
the system
showenvironment [-M] [ type]
showenvironment -h
DESCRIPTION
showenvironment(8) command displays the information listed below.
The following types of the information are displayed:
Privileges
Environment
information
Intake temperature and humidity of the system (humidity only
for high-end server)
Temperature
information
Intake temperature of the system and exhaust temperature of
each component
Voltage
information
Voltage sensor value
Fan rotation
information
Fan rotational state and revolutions per unit of time
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
OPERANDS
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
The following operand is supported:
type
Specifies the one of the type of information to be displayed. The
following types can be specified. If this type setting is omitted,
intake temperature and humidity information about the system is
displayed:
temp
Displays temperature information.
volt
Displays voltage information.
Fan
Displays fan rotation information.
System Administration
319
showenvironment(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
For some systems, voltage margin is set for each entire system. In such a case, the
voltage margin is displayed along with the value of the voltage sensor.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the intake temperature and humidity of the system.
XSCF> showenvironment
Temperature:30.71C
Humidity:90.05%
EXAMPLE 2
Displays temperature information about the system and each component.
XSCF> showenvironment temp
Temperature:30.71C
CMU#0:30.71C
CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C
CMU#1:30.71C
CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C
CMU#2:30.71C
CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C
CMU#3:30.71C
CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C
CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C
320
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showenvironment(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Displays voltage information about each component.
XSCF> showenvironment volt
MBU_A
1.0V Power Supply Group:1.010V
1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V
CPUM#0-CHIP#0
1.0V Power Supply Group:1.000V
CPUM#1-CHIP#0
1.0V Power Supply Group:1.000V
MEMB#0
1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V
1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V
2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V
MEMB#1
1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V
1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V
2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V
MEMB#2
1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V
1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V
2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V
MEMB#3
1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V
1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V
2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V
IOU#0
1.0V Power Supply Group:1.020V
1.2V Power Supply Group:1.180V
1.5V Power Supply Group:1.500V
1.8V Power Supply Group:1.850V
2.5V Power Supply Group:2.510V
3.3V Power Supply Group:3.300V
5.0V Power Supply Group:5.000V
System Administration
321
showenvironment(8)
12V Power Supply Group:12.000V
-12V Power Supply Group:-12.000V
FANBP
3.3V Power Supply Group:3.300V
5.0V Power Supply Group:5.010V
12V Power Supply Group:12.020V
-12V Power Supply Group:-12.030V
EXAMPLE 4
Displays voltage information about each component when specified voltage
margin.
XSCF> showenvironment volt
margin:+10%
MBU_A
1.0V Power Supply Group:1.010V
1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V
:
:
EXAMPLE 5
Displays fan rotation information.
XSCF> showenvironment Fan
FAN_A#0:Low speed
FAN_A#0:
4101rpm
FAN_A#1:Low speed
FAN_A#1:
4101rpm
FAN_A#2:Low speed
FAN_A#2:
4177rpm
FAN_A#3:Low speed
FAN_A#3:
4101rpm
PSU#0
PSU#0:Low speed
PSU#0:
3879rpm
PSU#0:
3835rpm
PSU#1
322
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showenvironment(8)
PSU#1:Low speed
PSU#1:
3924rpm
PSU#1:
3970rpm
PSU#2
PSU#2:Low speed
PSU#2:
4218rpm
PSU#2:
4066rpm
PSU#3
PSU#3:Low speed
EXIT STATUS
PSU#3:
3835rpm
PSU#3:
3970rpm
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
323
showenvironment(8)
324
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showfru(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showfru - display the hardware settings of specified device
showfru device location
showfru -a device
showfru -h
DESCRIPTION
The showfru(8) command displays the hardware settings of specified device by the
setupfru(8) command.
The command can display the settings of the specified device or of all devices. Only
the physical system board (PSB) can be specified as a device.
The following settings are displayed:
Device
Specified device name. Only sb is displayed.
Location
Device location. If the device is "sb", the indicated location is an
integer ranging from 00 to 15.
XSB Mode
XSB mode set for the PSB. One of the following values is
displayed:
Uni
Uni-XSB
Quad
Quad-XSB
Memory Mirror Memory mirror mode set for the PSB. One of the following
Mode
values is displayed:
Privileges
yes
Memory mirror mode
no
Memory no-mirror mode
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-a
Displays the settings of all devices.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
System Administration
325
showfru(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
device
Specifies the device to display. Currently, only the following
device can be specified:
Physical system board (PSB)
sb
location
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Specifies the location of device. If the device is "sb", an integer
ranging from 00 to 15 can be specified.
The setupfru(8) command makes hardware settings for a device.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the settings of all PSBs.
XSCF> showfru -a sb
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
326
Device
Location
XSB Mode
Memory Mirror Mode
sb
00
Quad
no
sb
01
Uni
yes
sb
02
Quad
no
sb
03
Uni
no
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8),
showboards(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showhardconf(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showhardconf - display information about field replaceable unit (FRU) installed in
the system
showhardconf [-u] [-M]
showhardconf -h
DESCRIPTION
showhardconf(8) command displays information about each FRU.
The following information is displayed:
Privileges
■
Current configuration and status
■
Number of installed FRUs
■
Domain information
■
External I/O Expansion Unit information
■
Name properties of PCI cards
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng
Can run this command for all domains.
domainadm, domainmgr, domainop
Can run this command only for your accessible domains.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-u
Displays the number of FRUs installed in each unit. For CPU
modules, operating frequencies are displayed. For memory units,
the capacity of each memory unit is displayed. If this option is
omitted, the current configuration and status information
regarding FRUs and domain information are displayed.
System Administration
327
showhardconf(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
When the configuration and status information regarding FRUs and domain
information are displayed, for any failed or degraded unit, an asterisk (*)
indicating an abnormal unit is displayed along with any of the following states:
Status
Description
Faulted
The component is faulty and is not operating
Degraded
The component is operating. However, either an error has been
detected or the component is faulty. As a result, the component
might be operating with reduced functionality or performance.
Deconfigured
As a result of another component's faulted or degraded status,
the component is not operating. (The component itself is not
faulted or degraded.)
Maintenance
The component is under maintenance. A deletefru(8),
replacefru(8), or addfru(8) operation is currently underway
Normal
It is operating normally.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the information of the FRUs in SPARC Enterprise M5000.
XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC Enterprise M5000;
+ Serial:BE80601021; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ Power_Supply_System:Single; SCF-ID:XSCF#0;
+ System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On;
Domain#0 Domain_Status:Powered Off;
MBU_B Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000297
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B50X A2
;
+ Memory_Size:64 GB;
CPUM#0-CHIP#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L068
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0
;
+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16;
+ Core:2; Strand:2;
CPUM#0-CHIP#1 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L068
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0
+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16;
+ Core:2; Strand:2;
328
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
;
;
showhardconf(8)
:
CPUM#3-CHIP#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L066
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0
;
+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16;
+ Core:2; Strand:2;
CPUM#3-CHIP#1 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L066
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0
;
+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16;
+ Core:2; Strand:2;
MEMB#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:01068
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B54X A1
;
MEM#0A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123520;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#0B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123e25;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#1A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123722;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#1B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123b25;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#2A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123e20;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#2B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123822;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#3A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123724;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#3B Status:Normal;
System Administration
329
showhardconf(8)
:
CPUM#3-CHIP#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L066
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0
;
+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16;
+ Core:2; Strand:2;
CPUM#3-CHIP#1 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L066
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0
;
;
+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16;
+ Core:2; Strand:2;
MEMB#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:01068
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B54X A1
;
MEM#0A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123520;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#0B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123e25;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#1A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123722;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#1B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123b25;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#2A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123e20;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#2B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123822;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#3A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123724;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#3B Status:Normal;
330
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
showhardconf(8)
+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A
252b-04123b20;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
:
MEMB#7 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:01100
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B54X A1
;
MEM#0A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d016910;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#0B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d016911;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#1A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d016a14;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#1B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d017e22;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#2A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d016a13;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#2B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d016417;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#3A Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d017617;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
MEM#3B Status:Normal;
+ Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A
356d-0d016b12;
+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
DDC_A#0 Status:Normal;
DDC_A#1 Status:Normal;
DDC_A#2 Status:Normal;
DDC_A#3 Status:Normal;
System Administration
331
showhardconf(8)
DDC_B#0 Status:Normal;
DDC_B#1 Status:Normal;
IOU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000395
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0483 0040 /541-0483-00-40
;
DDC_A#0 Status:Normal;
DDCR Status:Normal;
DDC_B#0 Status:Normal;
PCI#2 Status:Normal; Name_Property:; Card_Type:DownLink;
+ Ver:21h; Serial:XF01NW; Type:Optic;
+ Connection:IOX@X0DF/IOB0;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04
*
/501-7040-04;
IOX@X0DF Status:Faulted; Serial:XCX0DF;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0314 05
/501-6937-05;
IOB0 Status:Normal; Serial:XX00KA; Type:PCI-X;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0316 03
/501-6938-05;
LINK Status:Normal; Ver:21h; Serial:1F0090; Type:Optic;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04
/501-7040-04;
PS0 Status:Normal; Serial:LL0807;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02
/300-2001-02;
PS1 Status:Normal; Serial:LL0381;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02
/300-2001-02;
PCI#4 Status:Normal; Name_Property:; Card_Type:DownLink;
+ Ver:17h; Serial:XF01LM; Type:Optic;
+ Connection:IOX@X07P/IOB1;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04
*
/501-7040-04;
IOX@X07P Status:Faulted; Serial:XCX07P;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0314 05
/501-6937-03;
IOB1 Status:Normal; Serial:XE00F9; Type:PCI-Express;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0507 03
/501-6939-05;
LINK Status:Normal; Ver:17h; Serial:XF01N0; Type:Optic;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04
/501-7040-04;
PS0 Status:Normal; Serial:LL1097;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02
332
/300-2001-02;
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
showhardconf(8)
PS1 Status:Normal; Serial:LL1121;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02
/300-2001-02;
IOU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:78670000376 ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B55X A4
;
DDC_A#0 Status:Normal;
DDCR Status:Normal;
DDC_B#0 Status:Normal;
XSCFU Status:Normal,Active; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000262
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B56X A0
;
OPNL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000087
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA00629-D061 A0
PSU#0 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-ASTECB10
;
;
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02;
+ Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V;
PSU#1 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-ASTECB18
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02;
+ Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V;
PSU#2 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-DELTAB19
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02;
+ Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V;
PSU#3 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-ASTECB09
;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02;
+ Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V;
FANBP_C Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000053
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06629-D051 001AA
;
;
FAN_A#0 Status:Normal;
FAN_A#1 Status:Normal;
FAN_A#2 Status:Normal;
FAN_A#3 Status:Normal;
System Administration
333
showhardconf(8)
Displays the number of installed FRUs in SPARC Enterprise M9000.
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF> showhardconf -u
SPARC Enterprise M9000; Memory_Size:432 GB;
+-----------------------------------+------------+
|
FRU
|
Quantity
|
+-----------------------------------+------------+
| CMU
|
CPUM
|
9
|
|
36
|
|
Freq:2.277 GHz;
|
(
30)
|
|
Freq:2.376 GHz;
|
(
6)
|
|
MEM
|
224
|
|
Type:1B; Size:1 GB;
|
(
16)
|
|
Type:2B; Size:2 GB;
|
( 208)
|
| IOU
|
9
|
| IOBOX
|
1
|
|
IOB
|
2
|
|
PSU
|
2
|
| XSCFU_B
|
2
|
| XSCFU_C
|
2
|
| XBU_B
|
16
|
| CLKU_B
|
4
|
| OPNL
|
1
|
| PSU
|
30
|
| FANBP_A
|
2
|
| FANBP_B
|
2
|
|
|
32
|
| SWBP
|
2
|
| MEDBP
|
2
|
FAN_A
+-----------------------------------+------------+
EXIT STATUS
334
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
showhostname(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showhostname - display the current host name for the XSCF unit
showhostname {-a | xscfu}
showhostname -h
DESCRIPTION
showhostname(8) command displays the current host name for the XSCF unit.
The host name is displayed in Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) format.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
OPERANDS
The following options are supported:
-a
Displays the current host names for all XSCF units. If an XSCF
unit name is specified with the -a option, the XSCF unit name is
ignored.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
The following operand is supported:
xscfu
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Specifies the XSCF unit name to be displayed. One of the
following values can be specified. If xscfu is specified with the -a
option, xscfu is ignored.
xscf#0
XSCF unit 0
xscf#1
XSCF unit 1 (when a duplicated
configuration is used)
■
In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, a defect occurred on standby
XSCF unit shows a message.
■
The sethostname(8) command sets a host name for an XSCF unit.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the current host names for all XSCF units.
XSCF> showhostname -a
xscf#0: scf0-hostname.example.com
xscf#1: scf1-hostname.example.com
System Administration
335
showhostname(8)
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the host name for XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> showhostname xscf#0
xscf#0: scf0-hostname.example.com
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
336
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
sethostname(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showhttps(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showhttps - display the status of the HTTPS service set for the XSCF network
showhttps
showhttps -h
DESCRIPTION
The showhttps(8) command displays the status of the HTTPS service currently set
for the XSCF network.
With this command, whether the HTTPS service is operating and the installation
status of the information that is necessary for authentication can be checked. If it is
installed, the installation date is also displayed.
The following states are displayed:
Privileges
HTTPS Status
Indicates whether the HTTPS service is operating
Server key
Indicates whether the private key of the web server has been
installed
CA key
Indicates whether the private key of the certification authority
has been installed
CA cert
Indicates whether the certificate of the certification authority has
been installed
CSR
The certificate of the web server
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Displays usage statement.
The sethttps(8) command make settings for the HTTPS service in the XSCF
network.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the status of the HTTPS service.
XSCF> showhttps
HTTPS status: enabled
Server key: installed in Apr 24 12:34:56 JST 2006
CA key: installed in Apr 24 12:00:34 JST 200
System Administration
337
showhttps(8)
CA cert: installed in Apr 24 12:00:34 JST 200
CSR:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----MIIBwjCCASsCAQAwgYExCzAJBgNVBAYTAmpqMQ4wDAYDVQQIEwVzdGF0ZTERMA8G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-----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
338
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
sethttps(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showldap(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showldap - display the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
configuration for the Service Processor
showldap
showldap [-c ]
showldap -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showldap(8) displays the Service Processor LDAP configuration. When invoked
without options, showldap displays all LDAP configuration except for the
certificate chain and the password used when binding to the LDAP server.
You must have useradm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c
Displays the LDAP server certification chain.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying All LDAP Configuration Data
XSCF> showldap
Bind Name: user
Base Distinguishing Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com
LDAP Search Timeout: 60
Bind password: Set
LDAP Servers: ldap://company.com:389
CERTS: None
EXAMPLE 2
Displaying All LDAP Configuration Data
XSCF> showldap -c
There are no certificates configured.
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
339
showldap(8)
SEE ALSO
340
setldap(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showlocale(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showlocale - display the current setting for the XSCF locale
showlocale
showlocale -h
DESCRIPTION
The showlocale(8) command displays the current setting for the XSCF locale.
Either of the following is displayed:
Privileges
C
English
ja_JP.UTF-8
Japanese
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The setlocale(8) command sets a locale for the XSCF.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the current setting for the XSCF locale (when English is set).
XSCF> showlocale
C
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the current setting for the XSCF locale (when Japanese is set).
XSCF> showlocale
ja_JP.UTF-8
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setlocale(8)
System Administration
341
showlocale(8)
342
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
showlocator(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showlocator - display the state of the CHECK LED on the operator panel
showlocator
showlocator -h
DESCRIPTION
showlocator(8) command displays the blink state of the CHECK LED on the
operator panel.
The one of the following state is displayed:
Privileges
Off
Indicates normal operation, which means either the circuit
breaker is off or power is not being supplied.
Blinking
Indicates that the unit is a maintenance target.
On
Indicates that an error was detected in the main unit.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The setlocator(8) command can be used to specify the blink state of the CHECK
LED.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the CHECK LED state.
XSCF> showlocator
Locator LED status:Blinking
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setlocator(8)
System Administration
343
showlocator(8)
344
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlogs(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showlogs - display the specified log
showlogs [-t time [-T time] | -p timestamp] [-v | -V | -S] [-r] [-M] error
showlogs [-t time [-T time] | -p timestamp] [-v] [-r] [-M] event
showlogs [-t time [-T time]] [-r] [-M] {power | env}
showlogs [-r] [-M] monitor
showlogs -d domain_id [-t time [-T time]] [-r] [-M] {console | ipl | panic}
showlogs -h
DESCRIPTION
The showlogs(8) command displays the specified log.
Log data is displayed in the order of timestamps, starting from the oldest data by
default. Depending on the target for the log collection, the following logs can be
specified:
For Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
For domain
Privileges
■
Error log (sometimes includes scan log)
■
Power log
■
Event log
■
Temperature and humidity record
■
Monitoring message log
■
Console message log
■
Panic message log
■
IPL message log
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
■
Error log, Event log, Temperature and humidity record, and Monitor message
log:
platadm, platop, fieldeng
■
Power log:
platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, fieldeng
■
Scan log:
fieldeng
■
Console message log, Panic message log, and IPL message log:
platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
345
showlogs(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-d domain_id
Specifies the number of a domain to be displayed. This option
can be specified for domain specific log. domain_id can be 0–23
depending on the system configuration.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-p timestamp
Specifies a timestamp in a log when one log is to be displayed.
This option can be specified for an error log or event log.
timestamp is specified in one of the following formats:
yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm:ss
The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day,
hour:minute:second’ format.
mm/dd/yy,hh:mm:ss
The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year,
hour:minute:second’ format.
Monddhh:mm:ssyyyy
The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day,
hour:minute:second, year’ format.
346
-r
Displays a log in the order of timestamps, starting from the latest
timestamp. By default, the display of log data in the order of
timestamps starts from the oldest data.
-S
Displays a scan log attached to an error log. Only a user having
the fieldeng privilege can specify this operand. This cannot be
specified together with the-v option or -V option.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlogs(8)
-t time
Specifies the start date and time of the display range for log data.
It is specified in one of the following formats:
yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm
The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day, hour:minute’
format.
mm/dd/yy,hh:mm
The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year, hour:minute’
format.
Monddhh:mmyyyy
The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day, hour:minute,
year’ format.
yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm:ss
The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day,
hour:minute:second’ format.
mm/dd/yy,hh:mm:ss
The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year,
hour:minute:second’ format.
Monddhh:mm:ssyyyy
The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day,
hour:minute:second, year’ format.
Even if the -r option is specified together with this option, the
specified -t and -T options are not reversed.
System Administration
347
showlogs(8)
-T time
Specifies the end date and time of the display range for log data.
It is specified in one of the following formats:
yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm
The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day, hour:minute’
format.
mm/dd/yy,hh:mm
The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year, hour:minute’
format.
Monddhh:mmyyyy
The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day, hour:minute,
year’ format.
yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm:ss
The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day,
hour:minute:second’ format.
mm/dd/yy,hh:mm:ss
The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year,
hour:minute:second’ format.
Monddhh:mm:ssyyyy
The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day,
hour:minute:second, year’ format.
Even if the -r option is specified together with this option, the
specified -t and -T options are not reversed. The -T option
cannot be used for the monitoring message log.
348
-v
Displays a log in detail. Details of Diagnostic Codes UUID and
MSG-ID, which are used by the fmadm(8) and fmdump(8)
commands, are also displayed in addition to the items normally
displayed. This option cannot be specified together with the -S
or -V option. This option can be specified for an error log or
event log.
-V
Displays a log in greater detail. If detailed log information on
machine administration and OBP console log information have
already been collected, they are also displayed in addition to the
information displayed by the -v option. This option cannot be
specified together with the -S or the -v option. This option can
be specified for an error log.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlogs(8)
OPERANDS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
The following operands are supported:
error
Displays the error log. (sometimes includes scan log)
power
Displays the power log.
event
Displays the event log.
env
Displays the temperature and humidity record.
monitor
Displays the monitoring message log.
console
Displays the console message log.
panic
Displays the panic message log.
ipl
Displays the IPL message log.
Logs are displayed in the following formats:
■
Error log
Default
Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Status: Alarm
Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxOccurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,*
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Case where the -v option is specified
Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Status: Alarm
Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,*
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Diagnostic Code:
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID:FMD-8000-11
System Administration
349
showlogs(8)
Case where the -V option is specified
Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Status: Alarm
Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,*
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Diagnostic Code:
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID:FMD-8000-11
Diagnostic Messages:
:
:
Case where the -S option is specified
Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Status: Alarm
Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,*
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Diagnostic Code:
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID:FMD-8000-11
Detail log: SCAN MINOR RC 2K
0000: xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
0010: xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
:
:
350
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlogs(8)
Date:
Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second
time-zone year)
The displayed time is the local time.
Code:
Error code
Data is displayed in 16-byte format.
Occurred:
Date (Month Day Hour: Minute: Second TimeZone Year) when
an error occurred.
This date is displayed as the local time.
Status:
Error status
Either of the following is displayed:
FRU:
Warning
Partial degradation of the unit or warning
about the FRU
Alarm
FRU failure or error
Suspected faulty unit
The suspected faulty units that are displayed and delimited by a
comma (,) are the units most likely and second most likely to be
faulty. If there are three suspected faulty units, asterisk (*) is
displayed next to the unit third most likely to be faulty. Display
of more than two suspected faulty units depends on whether
more than two suspected faulty units are detected.
Msg:
Error description
Diagnostic
Code:
Detailed error code
UUID:
Abbreviation for Universal Unique Identifier
The displayed code is a hexadecimal number.
This is a globally unique ID that is a 32-digit hexadecimal
number.
MSG-ID:
Unique message ID
Diagnostic
Messages:
Detailed message
Detail log:
Scan log code
If the log has a detailed message, it is displayed.
This code is displayed when the log includes a scan log.
Address: Displayed in hexadecimal notation.
System Administration
351
showlogs(8)
■
Power log
Date
Event
Cause
DID
Mar 30 17:25:31 JST 2005
System Power Off
Power Failure
Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005
System Power On
AC Restored
--
Locked
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Domain Power On
Panel
00
Locked
Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005
Domain Power Off
Operator
--
Switch
10
Service
Service
:
:
Date:
Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second
time-zone year)
The displayed time is the local time.
Event:
Power status
One of the following states is displayed:
352
Domain Power On
The domain power is on.
Domain Power Off
The domain power is off.
System Power On
The main unit power is on.
System Power Off
The main unit power is off.
SCF Reset
XSCF is in the reset state.
Domain Reset
XSCF is in the reset state.
XIR
XSCF is in the reset state.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlogs(8)
Factor that caused this Status
Cause:
One of the following factors is displayed:
Self Reset, Power On, System Reset, Panel, Scheduled,
RCI, AC Restored, Operator, Poweron Restart, Power
Failure, SW Request, Alarm, Fatal, Panic
Domain ID
DID:
domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.
Status of the mode switch of the operator panel
Switch:
One of the following states are displayed:
■
Locked
Normal operation mode
Service
Service mode
Event log
Default
Date
Message
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
System power on
Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005
System power off
:
:
Case where the -v option is specified
Date
Message
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
System power on
Switch= Service RCIaddr=000105ff
Code=xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
System Administration
353
showlogs(8)
Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second
time-zone year)
Date:
The displayed time is the local time.
Message:
Event message
Switch:
Status of the mode switch of the operator panel
One of the following states are displayed:
RCIaddr:
Locked
Normal operation mode
Service
Service mode
Remote Cabinet Interface (RCI) address
If RCI is supported, the RCI address is displayed as an eight-digit
hexadecimal number.
Detailed event information
Code:
The displayed information is in hexadecimal format
■
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY RECORD
Date
Temperature
Humidity
Power
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
32.56(C)
60.20%
System Power On
Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005
32.56(C)
60.25%
System Power Off
:
:
Date:
Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second
time-zone year)
The displayed time is the local time.
354
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlogs(8)
Temperature:
Intake air temperature
Decimal numbers are displayed to two decimal places. The unit
is degree Celsius ( C).
Humidity:
Humidity
The displayed numbers are percentages (%). However, nothing is
displayed for the midrange server.
Power state of the main unit
Power:
Either of the following states is displayed:
■
System Power ON
The main unit power is on.
System Power OFF
The main unit power is off.
Monitoring message log
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
monitor message
Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005
monitor message
:
Each line of display has a date and time paired with a monitoring message. The
time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day
hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time.
■
Console message log
DomainID: 00
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
console message
Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005
console message
:
[First line]
DomainID:
Domain ID
domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.
[Second and subsequent lines]
Each line of display has a date and time paired with a console message.
The time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day
hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time.
System Administration
355
showlogs(8)
■
Panic message log
<<panic>>
Date: Mar 30 18:45:31 JST 2005
DomainID: 00
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
panic message
Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005
panic message
:
[Second line]
Panic occurrence date and time (month day hour:minute:second
time-zone year)
Date:
The displayed time is the local time.
DomainID:
Domain ID
domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.
[Third and subsequent lines]
Each line of display has a date and time paired with a panic message.
The time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day
hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time.
■
IPL message log
<<ipl>>
Date: Mar 30 18:45:31 JST 2005
DomainID: 00
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
ipl message
Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005
ipl message
:
[Second line]
Date:
IPL date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone
year)
The displayed time is the local time.
DomainID:
Domain ID
domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.
[Third and subsequent lines]
356
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlogs(8)
Each line of display has a date and time paired with an IPL message.
The time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day
hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays an error log.
XSCF> showlogs error
Date: Mar 30 12:45:31 JST 2005
Status: Alarm
Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0
Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: IOU#0/PCI#3
Msg: offline(vendor=FUJITSU, product=MAJ3182MC)
Date: Mar 30 15:45:31 JST 2005
Status: Warning
Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0
Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Status: Alarm
Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0
Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,*
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
EXAMPLE 2
Displays an error log in detail for the times of the specified timestamp (-v).
XSCF> showlogs error -p Mar3012:45:312005 -v
Date: Mar 30 12:45:31 JST 2005
Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0
Status: Alarm
Component: IOU#0/PCI#3
Msg: offline(vendor=FUJITSU, product=MAJ3182MC)
Diagnostic Code:
00112233 44556677 8899aabb
00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff
00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff
UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11
EXAMPLE 3
Displays an error log in greater detail for the times of the specified
System Administration
357
showlogs(8)
timestamp (-V).
XSCF> showlogs error -p Mar3012:45:312005 -V
Date: Mar 30 12:45:31 JST 2005
Status: Alarm
Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0
Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005
FRU: IOU#0/PCI#3
Msg: offline(vendor=FUJITSU, product=MAJ3182MC)
Diagnostic Code:
00112233 44556677 8899aabb
00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff
00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff
UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11
Diagnostic Messages
Jul 11 16:17:42 plato10 root: [ID 702911 user.error] WARNING: /
pci@83,4000/scsi@2/sd@0,0 (sd47):
Jul 11 16:17:42 plato10 root: [ID 702911 user.error]
giving up
EXAMPLE 4
incomplete write-
Displays a power log.
XSCF> showlogs power
Date
Event
Cause
DID
Mar 30 17:25:31 JST 2005
System Power Off
Power Failure
Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005
System Power On
AC Restored
--
Locked
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Domain Power Off
Operator
00
Locked
Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005
Domain Power On
EXAMPLE 5
Operator
--
Switch
00
Service
Service
Displays a power log in the order of timestamps, starting from the latest
timestamp.
XSCF> showlogs power
Date
358
Event
Cause
DID
Switch
Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005
Domain Power On Operator
00
Service
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Domain Power Off Operator
00
Locked
Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005
System Power On AC Restored
--
Locked
Mar 30 17:25:31 JST 2005
System Power Off Power Failure --
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
Service
showlogs(8)
EXAMPLE 6
Displays the specified range of a power log.
XSCF> showlogs power -t Mar3017:302005 -T Mar3017:492005
Date
Event
Cause
DID
Switch
Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005
System Power On
AC Restored
--
Locked
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Domain Power Off
Operator
00
Locked
EXAMPLE 7
Displays the specified range of a power log. The log is displayed in the order
of timestamps, starting from the latest timestamp.
XSCF> showlogs power -t Mar3017:302005 -T Mar3017:492005 -r
Date
Event
Cause
DID
Switch
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Domain Power Off
Operator
00
Locked
Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005
System Power On
AC Restored
--
Locked
EXAMPLE 8
Displays the specified date of a power log. Data with this date or later in the
log is displayed.
XSCF> showlogs power -t Mar3017:302005
Date
Event
Cause
DID
Switch
Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005
System Power On
AC Restored
--
Locked
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Domain Power Off
Panel
00
Locked
Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005
Domain Power On
Operator
00
Service
EXAMPLE 9
Displays a console message log of the domain ID 0.
XSCF> showlogs console -d 00
DomainID:00
Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005
Executing last command: boot
Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005
disk@0,0:a File and args:
Boot device: /pci@83,4000/FJSV,ulsa@2,1/
Mar 30 17:55:32 JST 2005
SunOS Release 5.10 Version Generic 64-bit
Note: The codes or messages shown here may differ from those actually displayed.
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
359
showlogs(8)
360
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showlookup(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showlookup - display the configuration for authentication and privileges lookup
showlookup
showlookup -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showlookup(8) displays configuration settings for authentication and privileges.
You must have useradm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying Settings for Authentication and Privileges
XSCF> showlookup
Privileges lookup:Local only
Authentication lookup: Local and LDAP
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setlookup(8)
System Administration
361
showlookup(8)
362
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showmonitorlog(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showmonitorlog - display the contents of monitoring messages in real time
showmonitorlog
showmonitorlog -h
DESCRIPTION
The showmonitorlog(8) command displays the contents of monitoring messages
in real time.
When the showmonitorlog(8) command is executed, the XSCF shell is occupied
for the display of monitoring messages. When a monitoring message is registered,
the contents of the message are displayed.
To stop the real-time display, press the Ctrl + C key combination.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the contents of a monitoring message in real time.
XSCF> showmonitorlog
Apr 13 12:32:16 XXXXX Alarm: /CMU#1,/CMU#0/DDC#0:ANALYZE:SC-IOU I/F fatal
error 0x00000000;
:
:
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
363
showmonitorlog(8)
364
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
shownameserver(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
shownameserver - display the registered domain name system (DNS) servers
specified on the XSCF network
shownameserver
shownameserver -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
shownameserver(8) command displays the registered DNS servers in the XSCF
network.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The setnameserver(8) command sets the DNS servers used in the XSCF network.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the DNS servers currently set for the XSCF network. The following
example shows that three DNS servers have been set:
XSCF> shownameserver
nameserver 192.168.1.2
nameserver 10.18.108.10
nameserver 10.24.1.2
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the DNS servers currently set for the XSCF network. The following
example shows that no DNS server is set:
XSCF> shownameserver
---
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setnameserver(8)
System Administration
365
shownameserver(8)
366
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
shownetwork(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
shownetwork - display information of network interfaces for XSCF
shownetwork [-M] {-a | -i | interface}
shownetwork -h
DESCRIPTION
shownetwork(8) command displays current information of network interfaces for
XSCF.
Information on the specified network interface or all the network interfaces can be
displayed. The following information is displayed:
Privileges
xscf#x-y
XSCF network interface name
HWaddr
MAC address (hexadecimal notation)
inet addr
IP address
Bcast
Broadcast
Mask
Netmask
UP/DOWN
Whether the network interface is enabled
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a
Displays information for all XSCF network interfaces.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
System Administration
367
shownetwork(8)
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
interface
Specifies the network interface whose information is to be
displayed. One of the following values can be specified,
depending on the system configuration. If this operand is
specified with the -a option, the operand is ignored.
■
For midrange server:
For XSCF unit 0 :
xscf#0-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#0-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
xscf#0-if
Interface between XSCF units (Inter SCF
Network; ISN)
For abbreviation:
lan#0
an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#0
lan#1
an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#1
■
For high-end server:
For XSCF unit 0 :
xscf#0-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#0-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
xscf#0-if
Interface between XSCF units (Inter SCF
Network; ISN)
For XSCF unit 1 (when a duplicated configuration is used):
xscf#1-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#1-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
xscf#1-if
ISN
For takeover IP address:
368
lan#0
takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#0
lan#1
takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#1
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
shownetwork(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
■
When the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration in the high-end server, a
takeover IP address can be used without a need to determine whether XSCF has
been switched. By setting the LAN ports of the active XSCF unit as lan#0 and
lan#1, they can be accessed with the names lan#0 and lan#1. As default
values, lan#0 is set to xscf#0-lan#0 and lan#1 is set to xscf#0-lan#1.
■
In the midrange server, the value of the lan#0 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#0, and
the lan#1 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#1.
■
When the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration in the high-end server and
when the takeover IP address has been disabled by setnetwork(8) command,
nothing will be displayed even though the takeover IP address is specified by the
shownetwork(8) command.
■
The setnetwork(8) command configures a network interface used by the XSCF.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> shownetwork xscf#0-lan#1
xscf#0-lan#1
Link encap:Ethernet
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56
inet addr:192.168.10.11
Bcast: 192.168.10.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask:255.255.255.0
Metric:1
RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:20241827 (19.3 MiB)
TX bytes:2089769 (1.9 MiB)
Base address:0x1000
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the information for XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0 in the midrange
server.
XSCF> shownetwork lan#1
xscf#0-lan#1
Link encap:Ethernet
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56
inet addr:192.168.10.11
Bcast: 192.168.10.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask:255.255.255.0
Metric:1
RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
System Administration
369
shownetwork(8)
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:20241827 (19.3 MiB)
TX bytes:2089769 (1.9 MiB)
Base address:0x1000
EXAMPLE 3
Displays the information for ISN on the XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> shownetwork xscf#0-if
xscf#0-if
Link encap:Ethernet
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56
inet addr:192.168.10.128 Bcast: 192.168.10.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask:255.255.255.0
Metric:1
RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:(0.0 B)
TX bytes:17010 (16.6 KiB)
Base address:0x1000
EXAMPLE 4
Displays the information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF Unit 0.
XSCF> shownetwork xscf#0-lan#0
xscf#0-lan#0
Link encap:Ethernet
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56
inet addr:192.168.11.10
Bcast:192.168.11.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask 255.255.255.0
Metric:1
RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:14541827 (13.8 MiB)
TX bytes:1459769 (1.3 MiB)
Base address:0x1000
EXAMPLE 5
Displays the information for the takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#0.
XSCF> shownetwork lan#0
lan#0
370
Link encap:Ethernet
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
shownetwork(8)
inet addr:192.168.1.10
Bcast:192.168.1.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask:255.255.255.0
Metric:1
Base address:0xe000
EXAMPLE 6
Displays the current settings of XSCF network.
XSCF> shownetwork -i
Active Internet connections (without servers)
Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address
tcp
EXAMPLE 7
0
Foreign Address
0 xx.xx.xx.xx:telnet
xxxx:1617
State
ESTABLISHED
Displays the information for XSCF unit 0 and XSCF unit 1 in the high-end
server.
XSCF> shownetwork -a
xscf#0-lan#0
Link encap:Ethernet
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56
inet addr: 192.168.11.10
Bcast: 192.168.11.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask:255.255.255.0
Metric:1
RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:12241827 (11.3 MiB)
TX bytes:1189769 (0.9 MiB)
Base address:0x1000
xscf#0-lan#1
Link encap:Ethernet
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:57
inet addr:192.168.10.11
Bcast: 192.168.10.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask:255.255.255.0
Metric:1
RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:20241827 (19.3 MiB)
TX bytes:2089769 (1.9 MiB)
Base address:0x1000
System Administration
371
shownetwork(8)
xscf#0-if
Link encap:Ethernet
inet addr:192.168.10.128
HWaddr 00:00:00:00:00:00
Bcast:192.168.10.255
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST
MTU:1500
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Metric:1
RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:0 (0.0 B)
TX bytes:17010 (16.6 KiB)
Base address:0x1000
xscf#1-lan#0
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:59
inet addr:192.168.10.12
Mask:255.255.255.0
xscf#1-lan#1
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:60
xscf#1-if
HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:61
XSCF>
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
372
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
applynetwork(8), setnetwork(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
shownotice(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
shownotice - display copyright and license information for the eXtended System
Control Facility (XSCF) Control Package (XCP)
shownotice [-c {copyright|license}]
shownotice -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
The shownotice(8) command displays by page the copyright and, if available,
license files for the XCP. When used without an option, shownotice displays
copyright information and any available license information. You can display only
the copyright or the license file by specifying the -c option.
No privileges are required to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c {copyright|license}
Specifies for display by page either the copyright file or the license file for the
XCP.
copyright
Specifies for display only the copyright file.
license
Specifies for display only the license file, if a license file is available for your
platform. If the license file for your platform is not available for the
shownotice command, the license argument is not supported.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an
error occurs.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Display Only Copyright Information
XSCF> shownotice -c copyright
[Copyright text displays.]
EXAMPLE 2
Display Copyright and License Information
XSCF> shownotice
[Copyright text displays.]
[License text displays (if available).]
System Administration
373
shownotice(8)
374
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showntp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showntp - display the NTP information which currently set for XSCF
showntp {-l | -a | address | -s}
showntp -h
DESCRIPTION
The showntp(8) command displays the NTP information which currently set for
XSCF.
The showntp(8) command can display the following information:
Privileges
■
NTP servers which have been registered to the XSCF network
■
Status of synchronization with the NTP servers
■
Stratum value which has been set to XSCF
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
OPERANDS
The following options are supported:
-a
Displays all the NTP servers currently set for the XSCF network.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-l
Displays whether synchronization with an NTP server is being
maintained.
-s
Displays the stratum value which has been set to XSCF.
The following operand is supported:
address
Specifies the IP address of an NTP server to be displayed. A
specified IP address is a set of four integer values delimited by
the period (.). If the -a option is specified, the operand is
ignored. The following address form is accepted:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
where:
xxx
An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can
be used to specify the integer.
System Administration
375
showntp(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The setntp(8) command sets the NTP servers used in the XSCF network.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays all NTP servers being currently set.
XSCF> showntp -a
server ntp1.example.com prefer # [1] ntp server name
server ntp2.example.com # [2] ntp server name
EXAMPLE 2
Confirms synchronization with an NTP server and displays the results.
XSCF> showntp -l
remote
refid
st t when poll reach
delay
offset
jitter
========================================================================
*192.168.0.27
192.168.1.56
2 u
27
64
377
12.929
-2.756
1.993
+192.168.0.57
192.168.1.86
2 u
32
64
377
13.030
2.184
94.421
LOCAL(0)
5 l
44
64
377
0.000
0.000
0.008
127.127.1.0
EXAMPLE 3
Displays the stratum value which has been set to XSCF.
XSCF> showntp -s
stratum : 5
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
376
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setntp(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
showpasswordpolicy(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showpasswordpolicy - display the current password settings
showpasswordpolicy
showpasswordpolicy -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showpasswordpolicy(8) displays the password policy settings. These include
default password expiration settings for new accounts, pam_cracklib parameters,
and the number of passwords to keep in password history for each user.
You must have useradm privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying Password Policy Settings
XSCF> showpasswordpolicy
Mindays:
0
Maxdays:
99999
Warn:
7
Inactive: -1
Expiry:
0
Retry:
3
Difok:
10
Minlen:
9
Dcredit:
1
Ucredit:
1
Lcredit:
1
Ocredit:
1
Remember: 3
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
377
showpasswordpolicy(8)
SEE ALSO
378
setpasswordpolicy(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showpowerupdelay(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showpowerupdelay - display the current settings for the warm-up time of the
system and wait time before system startup
showpowerupdelay
showpowerupdelay -h
DESCRIPTION
The showpowerupdelay(8) command displays the current settings for the warmup time of the system and wait time before system startup.
The following settings are displayed:
Privileges
warmup time
Warm-up time
wait time
Wait time before system startup
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
Displays usage statement.
The setpowerupdelay(8) command sets the warm-up time of the system and a
wait time before system startup.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system startup.
warmup time : 10 minute(s)
wait time
: 20 minute(s)
XSCF> showpowerupdelay
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setpowerupdelay(8)
System Administration
379
showpowerupdelay(8)
380
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showresult(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showresult - display the exit status of the most recently executed command
showresult
showresult -h
DESCRIPTION
showresult(8) command displays the exit status of the most recently executed.
showresult(8) is convenient for a remote control program to confirm whether the
most recently executed command is successfully completed.
Privileges
No privileges are required to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays usage statement.
display the exit status of setupfru(8).
XSCF> setupfru -x 1 sb 0
XSCF> showresult
0
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
381
showresult(8)
382
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showroute(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showroute - display routing information for an XSCF network interface
showroute [-M] [-n] {-a | interface}
showroute -h
DESCRIPTION
showroute(8) command displays the current routing information for an XSCF
network interface.
Routing information for the specified network interface or all the network interfaces
can be displayed. The following information is displayed:
Destination
Destination IP address
Gateway
Gateway address
Netmask
Netmask address
Flags
Flag which indicates the status of specified routing
Interface
Privileges
U
route is up
H
target is host
G
use gateway
R
reinstate route for dynamic routing
C
cache entry
!
reject route
XSCF network interface name
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a
Displays routing information that is set for all XSCF network
interfaces.
System Administration
383
showroute(8)
OPERANDS
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-n
Displays IP address without the name resolution of host name.
The following operand is supported:
interface
Specifies the network interface whose information is to be
displayed. One of the following values can be specified,
depending on the system configuration. If this operand is
specified with the -a option, the operand is ignored.
For XSCF unit 0:
xscf#0-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#0-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
For XSCF unit 1 (when a duplicated configuration is used):
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
xscf#1-lan#0
XSCF-LAN#0
xscf#1-lan#1
XSCF-LAN#1
The setroute(8) command sets routing information for the XSCF network.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays routing information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0.
XSCF> showroute xscf#0-lan#0
Destination
Netmask
Flags Interface
server1.example *
255.255.255.0
U
xscf#0-lan#0
default
0.0.0.0
UG
xscf#0-lan#0
EXAMPLE 2
Gateway
192.168.10.1
Displays routing information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0 without the
name resolution of host name.
XSCF> showroute -n xscf#0-lan#0
384
Destination
Gateway
Netmask
Flags Interface
192.168.10.0
*
255.255.255.0
U
xscf#0-lan#0
default
192.168.10.1
0.0.0.0
UG
xscf#0-lan#0
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showroute(8)
EXAMPLE 3
Displays all routing information for XSCF unit 0 and XSCF unit 1 in the highend server.
XSCF> showroute -a
Kernel IP routing table
Destination
Gateway
Netmask
Flags Interface
192.168.10.0
*
255.255.255.0
U
xscf#0-lan#0
default
192.168.10.1
0.0.0.0
UG
xscf#0-lan#0
Destination
Gateway
Netmask
Interface
default
192.168.10.1
0.0.0.0
xscf#1-lan#0
XSCF>
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setroute(8)
System Administration
385
showroute(8)
386
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
showshutdowndelay(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showshutdowndelay - display the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the
uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
showshutdowndelay
showshutdowndelay -h
DESCRIPTION
The showshutdowndelay(8) command displays the wait time before the start of
system shutdown for when power interruption occurs in a system connected to the
UPS.
The time set by the setshutdowndelay(8) command is displayed. The default
time set is 10 seconds.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays usage statement.
Displays the wait time before the start of shutdown.
XSCF> showshutdowndelay
UPS shutdown wait time : 600 second(s)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setshutdowndelay(8)
System Administration
387
showshutdowndelay(8)
388
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showsmtp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showsmtp - display the SMTP configuration information
showsmtp
showsmtp [ -v ]
showsmtp -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showsmtp(8) displays the SMTP configuration. When used without options, it
displays current SMTP configuration data.
You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
When used with other options or operands, an error
occurs.
Specifies verbose output.
-v
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
SMTP information includes the Mail Server and Reply addresses.
Displaying SMTP configuration
EXAMPLE 1
XSCF>
showsmtp
Mail Server: 10.4.1.1
Port: 25
Authentication Mechanism: smtp-auth
User Name: jsmith
Password: ********
Reply Address: [email protected]
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setsmtp(8)
System Administration
389
showsmtp(8)
390
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showsnmp(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showsnmp - display the configuration information and current status of the SNMP
agent
showsnmp
showsnmp -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showsnmp(8) displays the configuration and information and current status of the
SNMP agent. This includes: agent status, port, system location, contact and
description, traphosts, SNMP version, and any enabled MIB modules.
You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
XSCF>
Displaying SNMP Information for a System That Has Not Been Set Up
showsnmp
Agent Status:
Disabled
Agent Port:
161
System Location:
Unknown
System Contact:
Unknown
System Description: Unknown
Trap Hosts: None
SNMP V1/V2c: None
Enabled MIB Modules: None
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF>
Displaying SNMP Information for a Disabled System Set Up With SNMPv3
Trap Host
showsnmp
Agent Status:
Disabled
Agent Port:
161
System Administration
391
showsnmp(8)
System Location:
SanDiego
System Contact:
[email protected]
System Description: FF1
Trap Hosts:
Hostname
Port
Type
Community String
Username
Auth Protocol
--------
----
----
----------------
--------
--------------
host1
162
v3
n/a
jsmith
SHA
SNMP V1/V2c: None
Enabled MIB Modules: None
Displaying SNMP Information for a Enabled System Set Up With SNMPv1/
v2c Trap Host
EXAMPLE 3
XSCF>
showsnmp
Agent Status:
Enabled
Agent Port:
161
System Location:
SanDiego
System Contact:
[email protected]
System Description: FF1
Trap Hosts:
Hostname
Port
Type
Community String
Username
Auth Protocol
--------
----
----
----------------
--------
--------------
host1
162
v1
public
jsmith
SHA
host2
162
v2c
public
n/a
n/a
host3
162
v3
n/a
bob
SHA
SNMP V1/V2c:
Status:
392
Enabled
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showsnmp(8)
Community String: public
Enabled MIB Modules:
SP_MIB
FM_MIB
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setsnmp(8)
System Administration
393
showsnmp(8)
394
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showsnmpusm(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showsnmpusm - display the current User-based Security Model (USM) information
for the SNMP agent
showsnmpusm
showsnmpusm -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showsnmpusm(8) displays the current USM information for the SNMP agent.
You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
XSCF>
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
Displaying SNMP Information for a System
EXAMPLE 1
showsnmpusm
Username
Auth Protocol
--------
--------------
jsmith
SHA
sue
MD5
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setsnmpusm(8)
System Administration
395
showsnmpusm(8)
396
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showsnmpvacm(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showsnmpvacm - display the current View-based Access Control Access (VACM)
information for the SNMP agent
showsnmpvacm
showsnmpvacm -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showsnmpvacm(8) displays the current VACM information for the SNMP agent.
You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
Displaying SNMP Information for a System
EXAMPLE 1
XSCF>
showsnmpvacm
Groups:
Groupname
Username
---------
--------
admin
jsmith, bob
Views:
View
Subtree
Mask
Type
----
-------
----
----
all_view
.1
ff
include
Access:
EXIT STATUS
View
Group
----
-----
all_view
admin
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
397
showsnmpvacm(8)
SEE ALSO
398
setsnmpvacm(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showssh(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showssh - display the status, host public keys, fingerprint, or user public keys of the
SSH service configured for the XSCF network
showssh [-c hostkey] [-M]
showssh -c pubkey [-u user_name] [-M]
showssh -h
DESCRIPTION
showssh(8) command displays the status, host public keys, fingerprint, or user
public keys of the SSH service configured for the XSCF network.
The following information is displayed:
SSH status
Validity of the SSH service
RSA key
Host public key in RSA format
DSA key
Host public key in DSA format
Fingerprint
Host public key in fingerprint format
When specified the display of user public key, the user public key number, which
automatically numbered by system, and the user public key are displayed.
Only SSH2 is supported for XSCF.
Privileges
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
■
To display the user public key of other user account:
useradm
■
To display the information other than above:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-c hostkey
Displays a host public key. If the -c option is omitted, "-c
hostkey" is assumed specified.
-c pubkey
Displays the user public key. If the -c option is omitted, "-c
hostkey" is assumed specified
System Administration
399
showssh(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-u user_name
Specify the user account name to display the user public key.
Should be specified with "-c pubkey." When the -u option
omitted, the user public key of the current login user account will
be displayed.
■
You can specify the automatically-numbered user public key number to delete
the user public key by setssh(8) command.
■
The setssh(8) command makes settings for the HTTPS service in the XSCF
network.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the information of host public keys.
XSCF> showssh
SSH status: enabled
RSA key:
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAt0IG3wfpQnGr51znS9XtzwHcBBb/
UU0LN08SilUXE6j+
avlxdY7AFqBf1wGxLF+Tx5pTa6HuZ8o8yUBbDZVJAAAAFQCfKPxarV+/5qzK4A43Qaigkqu/
6QAAAIBM
LQl22G8pwibESrh5JmOhSxpLzl3P26ksI8qPr+7BxmjLR0k=
Fingerprint:
1024 e4:35:6a:45:b4:f7:e8:ce:b0:b9:82:80:2e:73:33:c4 /etc/ssh/
ssh_host_rsa_key.pub
DSA key:
ssh-dss
AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAJSy4GxD7Tk4fxFvyW1D0NUDqZQPY3PuY2IG7QC4BQ1kewDnblB8
/
JEqI+8pnfbWzmOWU37KHL19OEYNAv6v+WZT6RElU5Pyb8F16uq96L8QDMswFlICMZgrn+ilJN
Str6r8
KDJfwOQMmK0eeDFj2mL40NOvaLQ83+rRwW6Ny/yF1Rgv6PUpUqRLw4VeRb+uOfmPRpe6/
kb4z++lOhtp
WI9bay6CK0nrFRok+z54ez7BrDFBQVuNZx9PyEFezJG9ziEYVUag/23LIAiLxxBmW9pqa/
WxC21Ja4RQ
VN3009kmVwAAAIAON1LR/
9Jdd7yyG18+Ue7eBBJHrCA0pkSzvfzzFFj5XUzQBdabh5p5Rwz+1vriawFI
400
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showssh(8)
ZI9j2uhM/3HQdrvYSVBEdMjaasF9hB6T/
uFwP8yqtJf6Y9GdjBAhWuH8F13pX4BtvK9IeldqCscnOuu0
e2rlUoI6GICMr64FL0YYBSwfbwLIz6PSA/yKQe23dwfkSfcwQZNq/
5pThGPi3tob5Qev2KCK2OyEDMCA
OvVlMhqHuPNpX+hE19nPdBFGzQ==
Fingerprint:
1024 9e:39:8e:cb:8a:99:ff:b4:45:12:04:2d:39:d3:28:15 /etc/ssh/
ssh_host_dsa_key.pub
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the user public key of the current login user account.
XSCF> showssh -c pubkey
Public key:
1 ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid
QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/
FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK
P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected]
2 ssh-rsa
CSqGSIb3DQEJARYHZWUubWFpbDCBnzANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEA
nkPntf+TjYtyKlNYFbO/YavFpUzkYTLHdt0Fbz/
tZmGd3e6Jn34A2W9EC7D9hjLsj+kAP41Al6wFwGO7
KP3H4iImX0Uysjl9Hyk4jLBU51sw8JqvT2utTjltV5mFPKL6bDcAgY9=efgh@example.com
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setssh(8)
System Administration
401
showssh(8)
402
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showstatus(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showstatus - display the degraded Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
showstatus [-M]
showstatus -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
showstatus(8) command displays information about degraded units that are
among the FRUs composing the system.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
Displays the information concerning the units failed or degraded and the units on
the next upper layer, among the FRUs composing the system. An asterisk (*)
indicating abnormal unit is displayed along with any of the following the "Status:":
Status
Description
Faulted
The component is faulty and is not operating.
Degraded
The component is operating. However, either an error has been
detected or the component is faulty. As a result, the component
might be operating with reduced functionality or performance.
Deconfigured
As a result of another component's faulted or degraded status,
the component is not operating. (The component itself is not
faulted or degraded.)
Maintenance
The component is under maintenance. A deletefru(8),
replacefru(8), or addfru(8) operation is currently underway.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the degraded units. In this example, a CPU module and memory
module in a CPU memory unit are degraded because of an error.
XSCF> showstatus
System Administration
403
showstatus(8)
CMU#0;
*
CPUM#0-CHIP#0 Status:Faulted;
*
MEM#00A Status:Faulted;
Displays the degraded units. In this example, a memory module on a memory
board is degraded because of an error.
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF> showstatus
MBU_B;
MEMB#0;
*
MEM#0A Status:Faulted;
EXAMPLE 3
Displays the degraded units. In this example, a CPU memory unit and memory module on a motherboard unit are degraded because of an error.
XSCF> showstatus
MBU_B Status:Normal;
*
MEMB#1 Status:Deconfigured;
*
MEM#3B Status:Deconfigured;
EXAMPLE 4
Displays the degraded units. In this example, a CPU memory unit is degraded because a crossbar unit is degraded.
XSCF> showstatus
MBU_B Status:Normal;
*
*
EXIT STATUS
404
CPUM#1-CHIP#1 Status:Deconfigured;
XBU_B#0 Status:Degraded;
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showtelnet(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showtelnet - display the current status of the Telnet service for the XSCF network
showtelnet
showtelnet -h
DESCRIPTION
showtelnet(8) command displays the current status of the Telnet service for the
XSCF network.
One of the following states is displayed:
Privileges
enable
The Telnet service is enabled.
disable
The Telnet service is disabled.
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The settelnet(8) command makes settings for the Telnet service in the XSCF
network.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the status of the Telnet service for the XSCF network.
XSCF> showtelnet
Telnet status:enabled
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
settelnet(8)
System Administration
405
showtelnet(8)
406
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showtimezone(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showtimezone - display the XSCF time zone and Daylight Saving Time information
of current settings
showtimezone -c tz
showtimezone -c dst
showtimezone -h
DESCRIPTION
The showtimezone(8) command displays the XSCF time zone and Daylight Saving
Time information of current settings.
It is displayed in the following format.
std offset dst[offset2] [from-date[/time] to-date[/time] ]
std
Abbreviations of time zone.
offset
Offset time of time zone and Greenwich mean time (GMT).
Displayed in minus "–" in case the offset is plus, and displayed in
plus "+" in case the offset is minus.
dst
Name of Daylight Saving Time.
System Administration
407
showtimezone(8)
offset2
Offset time of Daylight Saving Time and Greenwich mean time
(GMT).
Displayed in minus "–" in case the offset is plus, and displayed in
plus "+" in case the offset is minus.
from-date[/time]
The starting time of Daylight Saving Time.
Any of the following formats displays from-date.
Mm.w.d
Mm: Shows the month when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any
numeric from 1 to 12 comes in m.
w: Shows the week when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any
numeric from 1 to 5 comes in, "1" for the first week and "5" for
the last week in the month.
d: Shows the day of the week when Daylight Saving Time
starts. Any numeric from 0 to 6 comes in, "0" for Sunday and
"6" for Saturday.
Jn
Jn: The date when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric
from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leap-year day
is not counted.
n
n: The date when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric
from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leap-year day
is counted.
In time, the time to switch to Daylight Saving Time is shown in
the pre-switched time.
hh:mm:ss
408
Shows the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. The
default value is "02:00:00."
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showtimezone(8)
offset2
Offset time of Daylight Saving Time and Greenwich mean time
(GMT).
Displayed in minus "–" in case the offset is plus, and displayed in
plus "+" in case the offset is minus.
from-date[/time]
The starting time of Daylight Saving Time.
Any of the following formats displays from-date.
Mm.w.d
Mm: Shows the month when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any
numeric from 1 to 12 comes in m.
w: Shows the week when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any
numeric from 1 to 5 comes in, "1" for the first week and "5" for
the last week in the month.
d: Shows the day of the week when Daylight Saving Time
starts. Any numeric from 0 to 6 comes in, "0" for Sunday and
"6" for Saturday.
Jn
Jn: The date when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric
from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leap-year day
is not counted.
n
n: The date when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric
from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leap-year day
is counted.
In time, the time to switch to Daylight Saving Time is shown in
the pre-switched time.
hh:mm:ss
Shows the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. The
default value is "02:00:00."
System Administration
409
showtimezone(8)
to-date[/time]
The termination time of Daylight Saving Time.
Any of the following formats displays to-date.
Mm.w.d
Mm: Shows the month when Daylight Saving Time terminates.
Any numeric from 1 to 12 comes in m.
w: Shows the week when Daylight Saving Time terminates.
Any numeric from 1 to 5 comes in, "1" for the first week and
"5" for the last week in the month.
d: Shows the day of the week when start Daylight Saving Time
terminates. Any numeric from 0 to 6 comes in, "0" for Sunday
and "6" for Saturday.
Jn
Jn: The date when Daylight Saving Time terminates. Any
numeric from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leapyear day is not counted.
n
n: The date when Daylight Saving Time terminates. Any
numeric from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leapyear day is counted.
In time, the time to switch from Daylight Saving Time is shown in
the pre-switched time.
hh:mm:ss
Privileges
Shows the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. The
default value is "02:00:00."
You must have one of the following privileges to run this command:
useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr,
domainop, fieldeng
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
410
The following option is supported:
-c tz
Displays the time zone.
-c dst
Displays the Daylight Saving Time information.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showtimezone(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
The settimezone(8) command sets the time zone of the XSCF.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the time zone.
XSCF> showtimezone -c tz
Asia/Tokyo
EXAMPLE 2
Displays the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: the abbreviation
of time zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving
Time is JDT, Daylight Saving Time is 1 hour ahead, and the time period is
from the last Sunday of March 2:00 to the last Sunday of October 2:00.
XSCF> showtimezone -c dst
JST-9JDT,M3.5.0,M10.5.0
EXAMPLE 3
Displays the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: the abbreviation
of time zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving
Time is JDT, Daylight Saving Time is 1 hour ahead, and the time period is
from the first Sunday of April 0:00 to the first Sunday of September 0:00.
XSCF> showtimezone -c dst
JST-9JDT-10,M4.1.0/00:00:00,M9.1.0/00:00:00
EXAMPLE 4
When no Daylight Saving Time is set
XSCF> showtimezone -c dst
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setdate(8), settimezone(8), showdate(8)
System Administration
411
showtimezone(8)
412
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
showuser(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
showuser - display user account information
showuser
showuser [ [-a] [-M] [-p] [-u] [ user]]
showuser [ [-a] [-l] [-M] [-p] [-u]]
showuser -h
DESCRIPTION
showuser (8) displays XSCF user account information. If the user argument is
specified, showuser displays account information for the specified user. If the user
argument is not specified, then showuser displays account information for the
current user. If the -l option is specified, showuser displays account information
for all local users.
When invoked with one or more of the options -a, -p, or-u, showuser displays
information as described in the OPTIONS section below. When invoked without
any of these options, showuser displays all account information.
Privileges
No privileges are needed for you to view your own account. You must have
useradm privileges to run this command for any other user.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-a
Displays password validity and account state information. This is
only valid for XSCF user accounts.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
OPERANDS
-l
Displays information on all local XSCF user accounts sorted by
user login name. Cannot be used with the user operand.
-M
Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the
same as that of the more command.
-p
Displays all privileges assigned to the user. This is valid for local
and remote users.
-u
Displays user ID (UID). This is valid for local and remote users.
The following operands are supported:
user
Name of an existing user account. Cannot be used with the -l
option.
System Administration
413
showuser(8)
EXAMPLES
Displays Password and Account Validity Information
EXAMPLE 1
XSCF>
showuser -a
User Name:
jsmith
Status:
Enabled
Minimum:
0
Maximum:
99999
Warning:
7
Inactive:
-1
Last Change:
Aug 22, 2005
Password Expires:
Never
Password Inactive: Never
Account Expires:
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF>
Never
Displays Privileges Information
showuser -p
User Name:
jsmith
Privileges:
domainadm@1,3-6,8,9
platadm
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
414
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
adduser(8), deleteuser(8), disableuser(8), enableuser(8), password(8),
setprivileges(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
snapshot(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
snapshot - collect and transfer environment, log, error, and FRUID data
snapshot -d device [-r] [-e [-P
-{y|n}] [-S time [-E time]]
password]] [-L {F|I|R}] [-l] [-v] [ [-q]
snapshot -t user@host: directory [-e [-P password]] [-k host-key] [-l] [-L
{F|I|R}] [-p password] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-S time [-E time]]
snapshot -T [-D directory] [-e [-P password]] [-k host-key] [-l] [-L {F|I|R}]
[-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-S time [-E time]]
snapshot -h
DESCRIPTION
The snapshot(8) command provides a data-collection mechanism that enables
rapid, reliable, and flexible retrieval of diagnostic information on the Service
Processor. snapshot(8) collects the following data: Configuration, Environmentals,
Logs, Errors, and FRUID information. It transfers data to the specified destination.
snapshot opens an output file, the name of which is automatically generated
based on the host name and IP address assigned to the Service Processor and the
UTC time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) and date on the Service Processor at the
time snapshot is invoked. For example: jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T2233-44. snapshot does not support user-specified file names for the output file. As
files and command output are collected from the Service Processor, snapshot
compresses the output data and writes it in the format of a .zip archive.
snapshot stores the collected data on a remote network host or on an external
media device, based upon the use of the -t, -T or -d option. To store the collected
data on a remote network host using the -t option, you must specify a host name
(or IP address), a target directory on the remote network host, and the user name of
a user on the remote host. If you have already set an archive target using
setarchiving(8), you can use the -T option to store the data on a remote network
host using that same information, or use -T in conjunction with the -D option to
change only the target directory. When storing data on a remote network host,
snapshot opens a network connection using SSH to act as a data pipe to the
remote file.
It is possible to restrict data collection on some larger log files to a specific date
range using the options -S and, optionally, -E.
Encrypted network protocols, such as SSH and SSL, are used for transmission of the
data across a network connection. The entire .zip archive itself can be encrypted
using the -e flag. To decrypt a .zip archive that has been encrypted with this
process, use the encryption password given to snapshot with the openssl
System Administration
415
snapshot(8)
command. The following example decrypts the file
jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T22-33-44.zip.e:
% openssl aes-128-cbc -d -in jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T22-3344.zip.e -out jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T22-33-44.zip
Every .zip archive generated by snapshot includes two files generated by
snapshot itself. The first file, called README, contains the original name of the
.zip archive, the name of the configuration file on the Service Processor used to
create the .zip archive, the version of snapshot and whether log-only mode (the
-l flag) was used to generate the archive. The second file, called CONFIG, is a copy
of the actual configuration file used by snapshot to generate the archive.
The data collected by snapshot may potentially be used by Service personnel to
diagnose problems with the system. snapshot can collect different sets of data for
different diagnostic purposes. The three different sets are named Initial, Root
Cause, and Full, and are specified through the use of the -L option.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported.
-D directory
Used with the -T option, specifies a value for directory instead
of the value set using setarchiving(8). The directory field
must not begin with a hyphen (-) or a tilde (~). Refer to the
description of the -T option for more detailed information.
-d device
Specifies the external media device to use. The following
option is available to -d:
-r
-E time
Removes all files from the external media
device prior to data collection. This option
is not valid with the -t or -T options.
Specifies the end time for the time period for which data is
collected. Used with the -S time option for the start time,
defines the period of time for which log messages are collected
by snapshot. Only those log entries created before the time
specified by -E time are collected by snapshot. Refer also to
the description of the -S option.
time
Interpreted using strptime(3), using one
of the following two formats:
%Y-%m-%d,%H:%M:%S
%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S
416
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
snapshot(8)
-e
Encrypts the zip archive. Required when using -P password.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-k host-key
Used with the -t or -T option, sets the public key that the
Service Processor uses to log in to the network host. This
option is not valid with the -d option.
Possible values for host-key are as follows:
none
This literal value specifies that a public key should not be used
to authenticate the network host.
download
This literal value specifies that snapshot will use ssh to
download a public host key for the network host and download
the key from the host specified in the -t argument. snapshot
displays the key’s md5 fingerprint and prompts for confirmation.
If you accept the key, it is used for server authentication. If you
reject the key, snapshot exits without doing anything. This is
the default behavior in SSH Target Mode if -k is not specified.
public
The specified public key is used for server authentication. The
host-key argument should be the complete public key of the
network host, beginning with key type (the complete contents of
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key.pub on the network host).
Note – The public key should be enclosed in quotes to ensure
that the shell treats it as a single word.
-L {F|I|R}
Specifies which set of logs will be collected.
F
Full log set.
I
Initial log set.
R
Root Cause log set.
If no log set is specified, the Initial log set is collected by
default.
-l
Specifies collecting only log files. Does not collect command
output.
-n
Automatically answers n (no) to all prompts.
System Administration
417
snapshot(8)
-e
Encrypts the zip archive. Required when using -P password.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-k host-key
Used with the -t or -T option, sets the public key that the
Service Processor uses to log in to the network host. This
option is not valid with the -d option.
Possible values for host-key are as follows:
none
This literal value specifies that a public key should not be used
to authenticate the network host.
download
This literal value specifies that snapshot will use ssh to
download a public host key for the network host and download
the key from the host specified in the -t argument. snapshot
displays the key’s md5 fingerprint and prompts for confirmation.
If you accept the key, it is used for server authentication. If you
reject the key, snapshot exits without doing anything. This is
the default behavior in SSH Target Mode if -k is not specified.
public
The specified public key is used for server authentication. The
host-key argument should be the complete public key of the
network host, beginning with key type (the complete contents of
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key.pub on the network host).
Note – The public key should be enclosed in quotes to ensure
that the shell treats it as a single word.
-L {F|I|R}
Specifies which set of logs will be collected.
F
Full log set.
I
Initial log set.
R
Root Cause log set.
If no log set is specified, the Initial log set is collected by
default.
418
-l
Specifies collecting only log files. Does not collect command
output.
-n
Automatically answers n (no) to all prompts.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
snapshot(8)
-P password
Used with the -e option, sets the encryption password used
for encrypting the output file.
-p password
Specifies the user password used to log in to the host using
SSH. This option is valid with the -t option, not with the -d or
-T options.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-S time
Specifies the start time for the time period for which data is
collected. Used with the -E time option for the end time,
defines the period of time for which log messages are collected
by snapshot. If no end time is specified, the target time
period ends at the time the snapshot command is launched.
Refer also to the description of the -E option.
time
Interpreted using strptime(3), using one
of the following two formats:
%Y-%m-%d,%H:%M:%S
%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S
-T
Specifies executing snapshot in SSH target mode using the
value for user@host:directory previously set using
setarchiving(8). Can be used with the -D option to
substitute an alternative value for directory.
Note – The user must create the target directory on the remote
host, snapshot does not create the target directory.
-t
user@host:directory
Sets the network host and remote directory for data
destination. The host field specifies the host name or IP address
of the network host. The user field specifies the user name for
the ssh login to the archive host. The directory field specifies
the archive directory on the archive host where the output file
should be stored. The directory field must not begin with a
hyphen (-) or a tilde (~).
Note – The user must create the target directory on the remote
host, snapshot does not create the target directory.
-v
Specifies verbose output. Displays all actions and commands
as they are executed. If this option is specified with the -q
option, the -v option is ignored.
Note – You may not have the required privileges to run all the
commands that are executed by the snapshot configuration
file. If this occurs, you will see error messages indicating these
operations are not permitted.
-y
Automatically answers y (yes) to all prompts.
System Administration
419
snapshot(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
Modes of Operation
The following is a brief overview of the modes of operation for the snapshot
command.
The first mode is SSH Target Mode. The data collector is run in this mode when it is
invoked with the -t or -T option. In this mode, the data collector opens an SSH
connection from the Service Processor to the specified target (after appropriate
authentication) and sends the zip data archive through the SSH connection to the
target host. The user must create the target directory on the remote host, snapshot
does not create the target directory. The transmission encryption in this mode is
provided by SSH.
The second mode is USB Device Mode. The data collector is run in this mode when
it is invoked with the -d flag. In this mode, the data collector’s output (which is the
zip archive) is saved in a file on the USB device. The USB device should be
formatted using the FAT32 file system. As in SSH Target mode, you can use the -e
option to encrypt the zip file in this mode. However, no transmission encryption
(such as SSH) occurs in this mode, since the data stays local to the Service
Processor.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Downloading a Public Key Using SSH
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x -k download
Downloading Public Key from ‘jupiter.west’...
Key fingerprint in md5: c9:e0:bc+b2:1a:80:29:24:13:d9:f1:13:f5:5c:2c:0f
Accept this public key (yes/no)? Y
Enter ssh password for user ‘joe’ on host ‘jupiter.west’
Setting up ssh connection to remote host...
Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip
Data collection complete.
EXAMPLE 2
Downloading a Host Key
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x
Downloading Public Key from ‘jupiter.west’...
Public Key Fingerprint: c9:e0:bc+b2:1a:80:29:24:13:d9:f1:13:f5:5c:2c:0f
Accept this public key (yes/no)? y
Enter ssh password for user ‘joe’ on host ‘jupiter.west’
420
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
snapshot(8)
Setting up ssh connection to remote host...
Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip
Data collection complete.
EXAMPLE 3
Downloading With a User-Provided Public Key
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x -k “ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAwVFiSQNVBFhTTzq0AX5iQqCkkJjd6ezWkVGt
mMkJJzzMjYK0sBlhn6dGEIiHdBSzO8QLAXb8N4Kq8JDOBpLSN4yokUPTcZQNxJaY
A0W058Qgxbn”
Enter ssh password for user ‘joe’ on host ‘jupiter.west’
Setting up ssh connection to remote host...
Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip
Data collection complete.
EXAMPLE 4
Log Files Only Using No Public Key
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/bob/logs/x -k none -l
Enter ssh password for user ’bob’ on host ’mars.east’
Log only mode. No commands will be collected.
Setting up ssh connection to remote host...
Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip
Data collection complete.
EXAMPLE 5
Downloading Using Encryption With Provided Password and No Public Key
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/bob/logs/x -k none -e -P
password
Output data will be encrypted.
Enter ssh password for user ’bob’ on host ’mars.east’
Setting up ssh connection to remote host...
Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip
Data collection complete.
System Administration
421
snapshot(8)
EXAMPLE 6
Downloading Using No Key to Invalid Directory
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/sue/logs/bad_dir -k none
Enter ssh password for user ’sue’ on host ’saturn.north’
Setting up ssh connection to remote host...
Failed to create remote file:
/home/sue/logs/bad_dir/archive.zip
Verify adequate disk permissions and disk space on target host
Error opening SSH target
Exiting with error 1
EXAMPLE 7
Downloading Public Key With Connectivity Failure
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/sue/logs/x -k download
Downloading Public Key from ’saturne.west’...
Error downloading key for host ’saturne.west’
Error opening SSH target
Exiting with error 1
EXAMPLE 8
Downloading Public Key and Answering No to All Prompts
XSCF> snapshot -v -t [email protected]:/home/jill/logs/x -k download
-n
Downloading Public Key from ‘earth.east’...
Public Key: ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAwVFiSQNVBFhTTzq0AX5iQqCkkJjd6ezWkVGtmMkJJzzM
jYK0sBlhn6dGEIiHdBSzO8QLAXb8N4Kq8JDOBpLSN4yokUPTcZQNxJaYA0W058Qgxbn
Key fingerprint in md5: c9:e0:bc+b2:1a:80:29:24:13:d9:f1:13:f5:5c:2c:0f
Accept this public key (yes/no)? no
Public Key declined
Error opening SSH target
Exiting with error 1
422
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
snapshot(8)
EXAMPLE 9
Downloading Public Key Attempted by Unauthorized User
XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/fakedir -p fake-password
Downloading Public Key from ’fakehost.com’...
Error downoading key for host ’fakehost.com’
Error opening SSH target
Exiting with error 1
EXAMPLE 10
Downloading to External Media Device
XSCF> snapshot -d usb0 -r
Testing writability of USB device....SUCCESS
About to remove all files from device ‘usb0’. Continue? [y|n] : y
Collecting data into /media/usb_msd/jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-04-17T22-4151.zip
Data collection complete.
EXAMPLE 11
Limiting Data Collection for Certain Logs to a Date Range
XSCF> snapshot -d usb0 -S 2007-01-01,01:00:00
-E 2007-01-31_14-
00-00
Testing writability of USB device....SUCCESS
Collecting data into /media/usb_msd/jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-04-17T22-4151.zip
Data collection complete.
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setarchiving(8), showarchiving(8), showlogs(8)
System Administration
423
snapshot(8)
424
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
switchscf(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
switchscf - switch the XSCF unit between the active and standby states
switchscf [ [-q] -{y|n}] -t {Active | Standby} [-f]
switchscf -h
DESCRIPTION
The switchscf(8) command switches the XSCF unit that the user is currently
logged in to, between the active and standby states.
If the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the switchscf(8) command can be
executed. When the active XSCF unit currently logged in to is switched from active
to standby or vice versa, the state of the standby XSCF unit is also switched.
Note – When switched, the session of the network which has been connected to the
active XSCF is terminated.
Note – Usually, XSCFs cannot be switched while maintenance work is in progress.
If "Switching of XSCF state is disabled due to a maintenance operation. Try again
later." is displayed as a result from the switchscf(8) command and XSCFs cannot
be switched, check whether the addfru(8), deletefru(8), replacefru(8), or
flashupdate(8) maintenance command is being executed. If the command is
being executed, wait until the command ends. If XSCFs cannot be switched though
none of those maintenance commands is being executed, use the -f option to
switch them.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-f
Switches the state in a case XSCF state can't be changed due to a
maintenance operation.
Note – Since the -f option forcibly switches XSCF, limit the use
of this option to such cases as when switching does not work in
normal operations.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-t Active
Switches the state of the XSCF unit to active.
-t Standby
Switches the state of the XSCF unit to standby.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
System Administration
425
switchscf(8)
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES
When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command
with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to
cancel the command.
EXAMPLE 1
Switches the state of the XSCF unit that the user is currently logged in to, to
standby.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby
The XSCF unit switch between the Active and Standby states. Continue? [y|n]:y
EXAMPLE 2
Switches the state of the XSCF unit that the user is currently logged in to, to
standby. Automatically answers 'y' to all prompts.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby -y
The XSCF unit switch between the Active and Standby states. Continue? [y|n]:y
EXIT STATUS
426
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised November 2007
testsb(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
testsb - perform an initial diagnosis of the specified physical system board (PSB)
testsb [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-m diag=mode] location
testsb [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-m diag=mode] -c {all | expansion}
testsb -v [ -y|-n] [-m diag=mode] location
testsb -v [-y|-n] [-m diag=mode] -c {all | expansion}
testsb -h
DESCRIPTION
testsb(8) command performs an initial diagnosis of the specified PSB.
The configuration of the PSB and operation of each device mounted on the PSB are
checked. After the diagnostics, the result is displayed. The PSB must not be
configured in the domain, or the domain in which the PSB configured must be
powered off.
The result also can be seen in "Test" and "Fault" displayed by showboards(8)
command.
Privileges
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
System Administration
427
testsb(8)
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:.
-c {all|expansion} Specifies the target PSB to be diagnosed. One of the values
shown below can be specified:
all
Diagnoses all the PSB that are mounted.
If the following conditions not satisfied, it leads to an error.
■
The system has been powered off.
■
All of the target PSB are Uni-XSB.
expansion
Diagnoses all the PSB that are mounted
on the expansion cabinet.
If the following conditions not satisfied, it leads to an error.
OPERANDS
428
All of the target PSB are not operating on the domain.
■
All of the target PSB are Uni-XSB.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-m diag=mode
Specifies the diagnostic level of initial diagnosis. One of the
values shown below can be specified:
min
Normal (default)
max
Maximum
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-v
Displays a detailed message of initial diagnosis.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
The following operand is supported:
location
EXTENDED
DESCRIPTION
■
■
Specifies only one PSB number. An integer from 00–15 can be
specified.
When the system board (XSB: eXtended System Board) belonging to the specified
PSB is in any status below, the testsb(8) command results in an error.
■
XSB is installed in the domain and this domain is in operation.
■
XSB is installed in the domain and this domain is in OpenBoot PROM (ok>
prompt) status.
■
XSB is installed in the domain and this domain is power ON status, power
OFF status, or reset status.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
testsb(8)
■
The addboard(8), deleteboard(8), or moveboard(8) command is executed
for XSB.
■
In case an XSB which belongs to the specified PSB is in Unmount or Faulted
status, it may be excluded from the target of diagnosis and may not be shown in
the diagnosis result. In a case like this, use the testsb(8) command to check the
diagnosis result.
■
In case there are the settings for the warm-up time of the system and the wait
time before system startup, a prompt appears to confirm whether or not it can
ignore these settings to execute the testsb(8) command. Enter "y" to execute the
command or "n" to cancel the command.
■
The displayed diagnostic results of the testsb(8) command are as follows:
XSB
XSB numbers belonging to the specified PSBs. One XSB number
is displayed for the Uni-XSB type, and four XSB numbers are
displayed for the Quad-XSB type.
Test
Status of the initial diagnosis of XSBs. One of the following status
values is displayed:
EXAMPLE 1
No XSB could be recognized because no XSB
is mounted or because an error occurred.
Unknown
Not tested.
Testing
Initial diagnosis is in progress.
Passed
Initial diagnosis ended normally.
Failed
An error was detected during the initial
diagnosis. An XSB cannot be used or is in a
degraded state.
XSB error. One or more states are displayed:
Fault
EXAMPLES
Unmount
Normal
Normal state.
Degraded
One or more components are degraded. Each
XSB can operate.
Faulted
An XSB cannot operate because an error
occurred.
Performs the initial diagnosis on PSB#00.
XSCF> testsb 0
Initial diagnosis is about to start, Continue?[y|n] :y
SB#00 power on sequence started.
System Administration
429
testsb(8)
0end
Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end
Initial diagnosis has completed.
SB power off sequence started. [1200sec]
0.end
SB powered off.
XSB
Test
Fault
---- ------- -------00-0 Passed
Normal
00-1 Passed
Normal
00-2 Passed
Normal
00-3 Passed
Normal
EXAMPLE 2
Performs an initial diagnosis of PSB#01 with detailed messages displayed.
XSCF> testsb -v 1
Initial diagnosis is about to start. Continue? [y|n] :y
SB#01 powered on sequence started.
:
:
Initial diagnosis has completed.
{0} ok SB power off sequence started. [1200sec]
0.end
SB powered off.
XSB
Test
Fault
---- ------- -------01-0 Passed
EXAMPLE 3
Normal
Performs the initial diagnosis on all the PSB that are mounted.
XSCF> testsb -c all
Initial diagnosis is about to start. Continue? [y|n] :y
SB power on sequence started.
0end
430
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
testsb(8)
Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end
Initial diagnosis has completed.
SB power off sequence started. [1200sec]
0.end
SB powered off.
XSB
Test
Fault
---- ------- -------00-0 Passed
Normal
01-0 Passed
Normal
02-0 Passed
Normal
03-0 Passed
Normal
EXAMPLE 4
Ignores the settings for the warm-up time of the system and the wait time before system startup to perform the initial diagnosis on the PSB that are
mounted.
XSCF> testsb -c all
Initial diagnosis is about to start. Continue? [y|n] :y
Ignore warmup-time and air-conditioner-wait-time, Continue?[y|n] :y
SB power on sequence started.
0end
Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end
Initial diagnosis has completed.
SB power off sequence started. [1200sec]
0.end
SB powered off.
XSB
Test
Fault
---- ------- -------00-0 Passed
Normal
01-0 Passed
Normal
02-0 Passed
Normal
03-0 Passed
Normal
System Administration
431
testsb(8)
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
432
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
addfru(8), deletefru(8), replacefru(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8),
showfru(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008
unlockmaintenance(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
unlockmaintenance - forcibly release the locked status of XSCF
unlockmaintenance [ [-q] -{y|n}]
unlockmaintenance -h
DESCRIPTION
unlockmaintenance(8) command releases the locked status of XSCF forcibly.
Normally, while the maintenance command addfru(8), deletefru(8), or
replacefru(8) is in execution, XSCF is in the locked status. After the command
complete, the lock is released. However, in case an error such as LAN disconnection
occurred while executing any of the maintenance command, the XSCF lock may
become unable to release. In such a case, you can execute the
unlockmaintenance(8) command to forcibly release the locked status of XSCF.
Privileges
You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-n
Automatically answers 'n' (no) to all prompts.
-q
Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.
-y
Automatically answers 'y' (yes) to all prompts.
EXAMPLE 1
Unlocks the maintenance lock status.
XSCF> unlockmaintenance
This command unlocks the maintenance lock which prevents the multiple
execution of maintenance commands.
*Never* use this command, except when the lock state remains by some reason.
Careless execution of this command causes serious situation because it
interrupts the running command and XSCF might not be able to recognize the
parts.
Continue? [y|n] :
EXAMPLE 2
Unlocks the maintenance lock status. Automatically answers "y" to all
System Administration
433
unlockmaintenance(8)
prompts.
XSCF> unlockmaintenance -y
This command unlocks the maintenance lock which prevents the multiple
execution of maintenance commands.
*Never* use this command, except when the lock state remains by some
reason.
Careless execution of this command causes serious situation because it
interrupts the running command and XSCF might not be able to recognize the
parts.
Continue? [y|n] :y
EXAMPLE 3
Unlocks the maintenance lock status. Automatically answers "y" to all
prompts.
XSCF> unlockmaintenance -q -y
XSCF>
EXAMPLE 4
Cancels the unlockmaintenance command execution that is in progress.
Automatically answers "n" to all prompts.
XSCF> unlockmaintenance -n
This command unlocks the maintenance lock which prevents the multiple
execution of maintenance commands.
*Never* use this command, except when the lock state remains by some
reason.
Careless execution of this command causes serious situation because it
interrupts the running command and XSCF might not be able to recognize the
parts.
Continue? [y|n] :n
EXAMPLE 5
Cancels the unlockmaintenance command execution that is in progress.
Automatically answers "n" to all prompts.
XSCF> unlockmaintenance -q -n
XSCF>
EXIT STATUS
434
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
unlockmaintenance(8)
SEE ALSO
addfru(8), deletefru(8), replacefru(8)
System Administration
435
unlockmaintenance(8)
436
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
version(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
version - display firmware version
version -c xcp [-v] [-t]
version -c {cmu | xscf} [-v]
version -h
DESCRIPTION
The version(8) command displays firmware version.
The following versions can be displayed:
Privileges
xcp
The comprehensive version of the XSCF control package (XCP)
firmware currently applied to the system.
cmu
The version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.
xscf
The version of XSCF firmware.
You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
EXAMPLES
The following options are supported:.
-c xcp
Displays the XCP version.
-c cmu
Displays the version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.
-c xscf
Displays the version of XSCF firmware.
-h
Displays usage statement. When used with other options or
operands, an error occurs.
-t
Displays information of the XCP version that is registered in the
XSCF. This option is used together with "-c xcp".
-v
Displays detailed information. Specifying this option with "-c
xscf" displays the same information as the usual information.
EXAMPLE 1
Displays the XCP version.
XSCF> version -c xcp
XSCF#0 (Active)
XCP0 (Current): 1020
XCP1 (Reserve): 1020
System Administration
437
version(8)
XSCF#1 (Standby)
XCP0 (Current): 1020
XCP1 (Reserve): 1020
Displays the details of the XCP version.
EXAMPLE 2
XSCF> version -c xcp -v
XSCF#0 (Active)
XCP0 (Current): 1020
OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001
SCF
: 01.01.0001
XCP1 (Reserve): 1020
OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001
OpenBoot PROM BACKUP
#0:
01.01.0001
#1:
01.02.0001
XSCF#1 (Standby)
XCP0 (Current): 1020
OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001
SCF
: 01.01.0001
XCP1 (Reserve): 1020
OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001
SCF
: 01.01.0001
OpenBoot PROM BACKUP
#0:
01.01.0001
#1:
01.02.0001
EXAMPLE 3
Displays the XCP version that is registered in the XSCF.
XSCF> version -c xcp -t
XCP: 1020
438
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
version(8)
EXAMPLE 4
Displays the details of the XCP version that is registered in the XSCF.
XSCF> version -c xcp -v -t
XCP
: 1020
OpenBoot PROM: 01.01.0001
SCF
EXAMPLE 5
: 01.01.0001
Displays the version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.
XSCF> version -c cmu
DomainID 00 : 01.01.0001
DomainID 01 : 01.01.0001
DomainID 02 : 01.01.0001
DomainID 03 : 01.01.0001
:
DomainID 23: 01.01.0001
EXAMPLE 6
Displays the detailed version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.
XSCF> version -c cmu -v
DomainID 00 : 01.01.0001
DomainID 01 : 01.01.0001
DomainID 02 : 01.01.0001
DomainID 03 : 01.01.0001
:
DomainID 23: 01.01.0001
XSB#00-0
: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)
XSB#00-1
: 01.01.0001 (Reserve), 01.01.0001 (Current)
XSB#00-2
: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)
XSB#00-3
: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)
:
XSB#15-3
: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)
System Administration
439
version(8)
EXAMPLE 7
Displays the version of XSCF firmware.
XSCF> version -c xscf
XSCF#0 (Active)
01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)
XSCF#1 (Standby) 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)
EXIT STATUS
440
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007
viewaudit(8)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
viewaudit - display audit records
viewaudit
viewaudit [-A date-time] [ -B date-time ] [ -C] [ -c classes] [ -D date-time] [-E endrecord] [-e events ] [ -i audit-ids] [-l] [ -m del] [ -n] [ -p privilege-results] [ -r
return-values ] [ -S start-record] [ -u users] [-x]
viewaudit -h
DESCRIPTION
Privileges
viewaudit(8) displays audit records. When invoked without options, viewaudit
displays all current local audit records. When invoked with options, viewaudit
displays only the selected records. By default, records are displayed in text format,
one token per line, with a comma as the field separator. The output can be modified
using the -C, -E, -l,-m del, -n, -S, or -x option.
You must have auditadm or auditop privileges to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
-A date-time
Selects records that occurred at or after date-time. The datetime argument is in local time. the -A and -B options can be
used together to form a range. Valid values for date-time are:
Absolute date-time : yyyymmdd[hh[mm[ss]]]
where:
■
yyyy = year (1970 is the earliest valid value)
■
mm = month (01–12)
■
dd = day (01–31)
■
hh = hour (00–23)
■
mm = minutes (00–59)
■
ss = seconds (00–59)
The default value is 00 for hh, mm, and ss.
System Administration
441
viewaudit(8)
-B date-time
Selects records that occurred before date-time. The date-time
argument is in local time. the -A and -B options can be
used together to form a range. Valid values for date-time are
either absolute or offset:
Absolute date-time : yyyymmdd[hh[mm[ss]]]
where:
■
yyyy = year (1970 is the earliest valid value)
■
mm = month (01–12)
■
dd = day (01–31)
■
hh = hour (00–23)
■
mm = minutes (00–59)
■
ss = seconds (00–59)
Offset date-time: +n d|h|m|s
where:
■
n = number of units
■
d = days
■
h = hours
■
m = minutes
■
s = seconds
Offset is only available with the -B option and must be
used with -A.
(The default value is 00 for hh, mm and ss.)
-C
442
Appends the number of records that matched the selection
criteria to the end of the output.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
viewaudit(8)
-B date-time
Selects records that occurred before date-time. The date-time
argument is in local time. the -A and -B options can be
used together to form a range. Valid values for date-time are
either absolute or offset:
Absolute date-time : yyyymmdd[hh[mm[ss]]]
where:
■
yyyy = year (1970 is the earliest valid value)
■
mm = month (01–12)
■
dd = day (01–31)
■
hh = hour (00–23)
■
mm = minutes (00–59)
■
ss = seconds (00–59)
Offset date-time: +n d|h|m|s
where:
■
n = number of units
■
d = days
■
h = hours
■
m = minutes
■
s = seconds
Offset is only available with the -B option and must be
used with -A.
(The default value is 00 for hh, mm and ss.)
-C
Appends the number of records that matched the selection
criteria to the end of the output.
System Administration
443
viewaudit(8)
-c classes
Selects records in indicated classes. classes is a commaseparated list of audit classes. A class may be specified by
its numeric value or its name. The ACS_ prefix may be
omitted. For example, the class of audit related events can
be expressed as ACS_AUDIT, AUDIT or 16.
The following are valid classes:
444
all
Denotes all classes.
ACS_SYSTEM(1)
System-related events
ACS_WRITE(2)
Commands that can modify
a state
ACS_READ(4)
Commands that read a
current state
ACS_LOGIN(8)
Login-related events
ACS_AUDIT(16)
Audit-related events
ACS_DOMAIN(32)
Domain management–
related events
ACS_USER(64)
User management–related
events
ACS_PLATFORM(128)
Platform management–
related events
ACS_MODES(256)
Mode-related events
-D date-time
Selects records that occurred on a specific day (a 24-hour
period beginning at 00:00:00 of the day specified and
ending at 23:59:59). The day specified is in local time in the
following format: yyyymmddhhmmss (year,month,day,
hour,minute,second). The time portion of the argument, if
supplied, is ignored. Any records with timestamps during
that day are selected. If any hours, minutes, or seconds are
given, they are ignored. -D cannot be used with -A or -B.
-E end-record
Selects the last record matching the selection criteria to
display.
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
viewaudit(8)
-e events
Selects records of the indicated events. events is a commaseparated list of audit events. An event may be specified by
its numeric value or its name. The AEV_ prefix may be
omitted. For example, the event for SSH login can be
expressed as AEV_LOGIN_SSH, LOGIN_SSH or 4.
See showaudit -e all for a list of valid events.
-h
Displays usage statement.
When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.
-i audit-ids
Selects records of the indicated audit session identifier. If
you become interested in activity reflected in a particular
audit record, you might wish to view all the audit records
for that session. An audit-id is not persistent and can be
reassigned across reboots of the Service Processor. audit-ids
is a comma-separated list of audit session identifiers. The
audit-id is the number following the label subject in an
audit file.
For example, in the following listing, the audit-id is 1
(shown in boldface for emphasis).
subject,1,bob,normal,telnet 45880 jupiter
-l
Prints one line per record.
-m del
Uses del as the field delimiter instead of the default
delimiter, which is the comma. If del has special meaning
for the shell, it must be quoted. The maximum size of a
delimiter is three characters. The delimiter is not
meaningful and is not used with the -x option.
-n
Specifies that UIDs and IP addresses should not be
converted to user names or host names.
-p privilege-results
Select records according to the indicated privilege-results.
privilege-results is a comma-separated list. privilege-results
are: granted, denied, or error.
-r return-values
Selects records according to the indicated return values.
returnvals is a comma-separated list of the values: success,
or failure. success corresponds to a return value of 0.
failure corresponds to a nonzero return value.
-S start-record
Selects the first record matching the selection criteria to
display.
System Administration
445
viewaudit(8)
EXAMPLES
-u users
Selects records attributed to indicated users. users is a
comma-separated list of users. A user can be specified by
user name or numeric UID.
-x
Prints in XML format.
EXAMPLE 1
Displaying Audit Records for December 12, 2005
XSCF> viewaudit -D 20051212
file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter
EXAMPLE 2
Displaying User Audit Records
XSCF> viewaudit -u jsmith
file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter
header,37,1,login - telnet,jupiter,2006-01-11 11:31:09.659 -05:00
subject,1,jsmith,normal,ssh 45880 jupiter
command,showuser
platform access,granted
return,0
EXAMPLE 3
Displaying Audit Records for Privileges
file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter
header,37,1,login - telnet,jupiter,2006-01-11 11:31:09.659 -05:00
subject,1,jsmith,normal,ssh 45880 jupiter
command,showuser
platform access,granted
return,0
XSCF> viewaudit -p granted
446
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
viewaudit(8)
EXAMPLE 4
Displaying Audit Records for Successful Access
XSCF> viewaudit -r success
file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter
header,37,1,login - telnet,jupiter,2006-01-11 11:31:09.659 -05:00
subject,1,jsmith,normal,ssh 45880 jupiter
command,showuser
platform access,granted
return,0
header,57,1,command - viewaudit,jupiter.company.com,2006-01-26
16:13:09.128 -05:00
subject,5,sue,normal,ssh 1282 saturn
command,viewaudit
platform access,granted
return,0
...
EXAMPLE 5
Displaying Audit Records Within a Range of Two Days
XSCF> viewaudit -A 20060125 -B +2d
file,1,2006-01-26 16:11:52.785 05:00,20060126211152.0000000000.jupiter.west.company.com
subject,1,jsmith,normal,ssh 51409 jupiter.west
header,56,1,command - showldap,jupiter.west,2006-01-27 21:15:12.416 -05:00
subject,4,jblake,normal,telnet 51409 sr1.company.com
command,showldap
platform access,granted
return,0
subject,7,bob,normal,ssh 40952 mars.com
header,57,1,command - viewaudit,mars.company.com,2006-01-26 16:12:16.127 05:00
subject,0,opl,normal,ssh 40952 apps
command,viewaudit
platform access,denied
System Administration
447
viewaudit(8)
EXAMPLE 6
Displaying First 5 Records (of 70) that Match a Date Range
XSCF> viewaudit -l -A 20070515 -B 20070516 -C -S 1 -E 5
file,1,2007-05-07 10:47:56.753 -07:00,20070507174756.0000000000.san-ff236-0
header,37,1,login - telnet,san-ff2-36-0.West.Sun.COM,2007-05-15
00:12:03.880 -07:00,subject,1084,root,escalation,telnet 56444
recon.West.Sun.COM
header,37,1,login - telnet,san-ff2-36-0.West.Sun.COM,2007-05-15
00:27:29.382 -07:00,subject,1085,root,escalation,telnet 62134
recon.West.Sun.COM
header,37,1,login - telnet,san-ff2-36-0.West.Sun.COM,2007-05-15
00:29:05.313 -07:00,subject,1086,root,escalation,telnet 33231
recon.West.Sun.COM
header,37,1,login - telnet,san-ff2-36-0.West.Sun.COM,2007-05-15
00:42:04.800 -07:00,subject,1087,root,escalation,telnet 38058
recon.West.Sun.COM
70
EXIT STATUS
SEE ALSO
448
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
setaudit(8), showaudit(8)
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007
who(1)
NAME
SYNOPSIS
who - display a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the XSCF
who
who -h
DESCRIPTION
who(1) displays a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the XSCF.
The following information is displayed:
Privileges
■
XSCF user account name
■
Terminal used
■
Idle time
■
Login time
■
Remote host name
No privileges are required to run this command.
Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
Displays usage statement.
-h
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
Displays a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the XSCF.
XSCF> who
EXIT STATUS
USER
TTY
IDLE
FROM
HOST
scf
pts/0
00:00m
Dec 21 13:57
JJJJ.ggg.fujitsu.com
The following exit values are returned:
0
Successful completion.
>0
An error occurred.
System Administration
449
who(1)
450
SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007